Home

KYOCERA FS FS-6530MFP

1. System Menu Counter Interrupt Logout Energy Saver 2 a 2 O Status Job Cancel Copy Reset Ready to copy P 10 10 2 Copy Favorites 2 i Application Send Selection LE ersi 5 Auto Normal 0 w G4 i 9 Duplex r C 8 Document F AX 1 sided gt gt 1 sided Collate unctions kg avorites a _ OY GID Clear S Enter C oH go ral Job Separator Processing Memory Attention os Lights when there is paper in Touch panel Displays buttons Processing Blinks while printing or sending the job separator tray for configuring machine Memory Blinks while the machine is accessing the settings fax memory or USB memory general purpose item Attention Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped Returns settings to their O Numeric keys Clear Clears entered numbers and default states Enter numbers and characters symbols O O O 0 6 Quick No Specifies registered Cancels or pauses the Search information such as address printing job in progress numbers and user IDs by number Enter Finalizes numeric key entry and finalizes screen during setting of functions Operates linked with the on screen OK Starts copying and scanning operations and processing for setting operations Preparation before Use gt Part Names Touch Panel Displays the status of the Ready to copy _ 9 Displays the time and number of naa Bo W
2. Cassette 1 Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassette 1 Inside the Right Cover 3 Follow the steps below to clear paper jams inside the right cover 3 1 2 aes Y 10 27 Troubleshooting gt Clearing Paper Jams Cassette 2 or 3 Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassette 2 or 3 Optional Document Finisher Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the optional document finisher 10 28 Troubleshooting gt Clearing Paper Jams Optional Document Finisher Staple Jam Follow the steps below to clear staple jams in the optional document finisher Bridge Unit Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the bridge unit 10 29 Troubleshooting gt Clearing Paper Jams Document Processor Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the document processor 10 30 11 Appendix This chapter explains the following topics OT Mal TEQUIOII ON serar ENE R ase cdsaceseessadeucachnet ieee A E 11 2 Overview of Optional Equipment ccccccscccesccnseecececeneceueecueecueecsuecsueceaeecsueceuesseessuesaeeseuesssaeeseeesas 11 2 PF 470 Paper Feeder single Cassette cccccsscccccsseecceeeecceueeecseesecsuseeseuseeesegeeeseseesseeessaneessanseesseas 11 3 PF 471 Paper Feeder double Cassette cc eecccccccccsecceeceeeeecaeeeeeseeeeese
3. Ready to copy 10 10 Ready to copy 10 10 n ___ Copies 1 E o al eee E on Prevent Bleed through AN _ Paper mS Zoom all Density Off Selection aa f Margin Auto 100 Normal 0 8 2 off ja ee err saz ree 3 4 a a os gg Continuous Scan Duplex Combine gg Collate Su ste Offset _ Auto Image Rotation 1 sided gt 1 sided_ Off Collate Es On Close Add Edit Shortcu GB0001_01 GB0002_02 Use V or AN to scroll up and down 2 Select the function 10 10 On GB0835_00 an l G 3 56 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Zoom MEE o l USB Reduce or enlarge original to send or store size Reproduces the original size Adjust the image to match the send or store size NOTE Select Sending Storing Size when you reduce or enlarge original Refer to Sending Size on page 6 40 and Storing Size on page 7 15 N 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Zoom 10 10 10 10 Dest 0 l Background Density Adj Recall _ Check p koroua Density Adj on Prevent Bleed through One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book gt 1 2 A Aor E mail Folder FAX FAX TX Resolution 2 dpi 200x100dpbi Normal a Zoom lt 1 100 Close Add Edi Shortcu m Use V or AN to scroll up and down GB0055_00
4. GB0057_15 GB0696_00 GB0696_00 Sending gt Registering Destinations in the Address Book 3 Host Name abc Path abc Port 10 10 21 Login User Name abc Cancel GB0709_03 6 Enter the address number 10 10 Select the item that you want to change 000 250 FTP Address Number Auto Cancel J e Press or numeric keys to enter a particular Address Number 1 250 GB0078_03 GB0217_01 Address Number is an ID for a destination You can select any available number out of 200 numbers for contacts and 50 numbers for groups If you set 000 as the address number the address is registered under the lowest available number Register the destination 7 Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Name Sales department 1 E mail Address GB0078_02 Cancel sending gt Registering Destinations in the Address Book Adding a Group Compile two or more contacts into a group Designations in the group can be added at the same time When adding a group a maximum of 50 groups can be added in the Address Book Before adding a group in the Address Book the contacts to be included in the group must be added first NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with administrator privileges Designations in the group can also be registered in the system menu 1 Display the
5. lt GB0052_00 Check the status 10 10 0089 doc0000892010092514 1 1 GB0182_00 GS Cancel Pause All Close Print Jobs Refer to Print Job Status Screen on page 8 3 Send Job Status screen on page 8 4 Store Job N Status screen on page 8 5 and Scheduled Job screen on page 8 5 Status Job Cancel gt Checking Job Status Details of the Status Screens Print Job Status Screen Status Job Cancel 10 10 0089 doc0000892010092514 5 23 B GB0182_00 oo ee 1 2 34 6 Item Key Detail Icons that indicate the job type Copy job Printer job a Job from Document Box A FAX reception 7 E mail reception Report List ji Data from removable memory Cancel Select the job to be canceled from the list and press this key Press for the job for which you wish to display detailed information Pause All Print Jobs Pauses all the printing jobs By pressing this key again the printing jobs will be resumed Status of job Printing Printing priority override E Printing interrupt copying a Print Waiting Print Waiting priority override F Print Waiting interrupt copying H Pausing print job or error Canceling the job E The status before starting to print The status before starting to print priority override 4 The status before starting to print interrupt copying ma Printin
6. ccccecceeccssceceeeceeecea ceca cececceeeeaseccueecacecseecauecsuecsueecseesseeeeetesseessassaas 1 2 ENVION sarc nacanceasaadarasacaduanneudet oancrunase catacvmaveden ances aapaienaeduumbe lamatennienasst E 1 3 Frocautons TOR USO occcesa cele tees waite ae poses e EE ATE a a eai e EEE SEN EA aE EEE EEEN EES 1 3 Le aland Salet MIOrmMaAUON sssrinin ann annia aiaa EA EEE N Da Ane E OEE EEr arrei 1 9 Her MIN OVA OGD EE E EA E E T teers E E A E E A A E E 1 9 Energy Saving C ntolFUNCUOM seccaeccicnssmassaosannndecosaneceoeseaiueheciesebenveuss sannnydeseamsebunce Tean oa raii 1 12 Automatic 2 Sided Copy Function cccccccccccceccceeeceseecececeeeceecesaeesaeecueceueeseeesueseueeseeeseeesaeeseeeeseeeeaees 1 12 ROSU GAVINO PADET sasra nae EE Ta E e ENE wo secetneouen 1 12 Environmental benefits of Power Management cccceecceececeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseesseeesaees 1 12 Energy Star ENERGY STAR ProQVa in ecscispcescdaconntageademnevacqcassineceastaes ucdesacazeunaceienmadensealaveceoesdienevaed 1 13 About this Operation Guide cccccccscccacecsececeeceeeeceeceuecseeseesaueesaeesuecuecaueeaueecueesauecsuessueesageseueesueessuesaeesegs 1 14 Conventions Im LNS GUE ess ese ec sae gee bese eons aire ae E ee motte semen veane EAE EEEE ETES 1 14 Originals and Paper Sizes sdsraivancrrevsdnantuan wesiownsaseerduaetesendeunpususeduad saexndeadeamrdstvaseeauesduaneysesuteateuesunciameusiens 1 16 1 1 P
7. 2 sided Book Original page 3 37 Scan Resolution page 3 52 Density page 3 51 File Name Entry page 3 63 Functions Original Size page 3 32 Original Orientation page 3 34 Mixed Size Originals page 3 35 Storing Size page 7 15 Color Selection page 3 60 Original Image page 3 53 Sharpness page 3 54 Background Density Adj page 3 55 Prevent Bleed through page 3 56 Zoom page 3 57 Continuous Scan page 3 40 Job Finish Notice page 3 61 Add Edit Shortcut page 3 22 Print Copies page 7 4 Paper Selection page 3 42 Collate Offset page 3 44 Duplex page 7 11 Functions Paper Output page 3 43 Staple page 3 49 Margin page 3 46 Job Finish Notice page 3 61 Priority Override page 3 64 Encrypted PDF Password page 7 12 JPEG TIFF Print page 7 13 XPS Fit to Page page 7 14 Add Edit Shortcut page 3 22 Sub Address Box refer to Fax Operation Guide Polling Box refer to Fax Operation Guide xii Status Job Cancel gt Print Job Status page 8 3 Send Job Status page 8 4 Store Job Status page 8 5 Scheduled Job page 8 5 Print Job Log page 8 6 Send Job Log page 8 6 Store Job Log page 8 6 Scanner page 8 11 Printer page 8 12 FAX page 8 12 Removable Memo
8. Scan to USB 10 10 2 sided Scan o Book Resolution 1 sided 300x300dpi l r all Density L File Name pasand abf Entry l doc Normal 0 Functions GB0096_00 Cancel 2 Enter the name Input 3 a 1 Limit 32 GB0057_06 Up to 32 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters X 3 Add other information Ready to copy 10 10 Use V or AN to scroll up and down None Date and Time 1 2 Job No Job No amp Date and Time Cancel lt Back lt GB0068_00 3 63 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Priority Override Suspend the current job and give a new job top priority The suspended job resumes after the other job is finished NOTE This function is not available if current job was an override Print from USB Priority override may not be available depending on the status of the current print job and memory usage q1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Priority Override Ready to copy 10 10 Ready to copy 10 10 Copies 1 la Job Finish Notice ae AN all Density aj File Name Entry _ Paper Selection Auto E Duplex Normal 0 ir Collate __ Offset q Lantis l JI 1 sided gt gt 1 sided C
9. 3 End the interrupt copy Interrupt When interrupt copying ends press the Interrupt key The machine resumes the paused print jobs Copying gt Interrupt Copy 4 18 5 Printing This chapter explains the following topics FAnn TOMADI AUONS 2 oiiae EE EEE EE E E i 5 2 Printing Data Saved on the Printer cccccccccseccccsseeeceesceceeseeceeeecseueecseaeessueeecsueeeesaueeesueesssageeessueeesseneeesagees 5 5 PEVAR INT oera a E E E A EE E E E 5 5 FOOT eA FOR egre e a E EE EEE E E E 5 7 Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents 5 1 Printing gt Printing from Applications Printing from Applications This section provides basic instructions for printing documents Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 7 You can print documents created on your computer once you install the printer driver from the included DVD Product Library Refer to Installing Software on page 2 14 N For more information about how to configure advanced printer driver settings and print documents refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on the DVD 1 Display the window r Adobe Reader Edit View Document Tools Window Help gt Open aO fio ied l Find x Create Adobe PDE Using Acrobat com ig Collaborate gt Save a Copy Shift Ctrl S Save as Text Attach to Email Close Ctrl W Properties Ctrl D Digital Editions
10. Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Colors appear different than Run Tone Curve Adjustment 9 27 you anticipated Perform Tone Curve Over long periods of use the effects of Run Tone Curve Adjustment 9 27 Adjustment is displayed the ambient temperature and humidity can cause color output hues to vary slightly Cannot send via SMB Is the network cable connected Connect the correct network cable 2 10 securely Have the network settings for the Configure the TCP IP settings 9 19 equipment been configured properly properly Have the folder sharing settings been Check sharing settings and access 6 7 configured properly privileges under the folder properties Has the SMB protocol been set to On Set the SMB protocol setting to On 2 25 Has the Host Name been entered Check the name of the computer to 6 5 properly which data is being sent Has the Path been entered properly Check the share name for the shared 6 8 folder Has the Login User Name been Check the domain name and login 6 21 entered properly user name Has the same domain name been Delete the domain name and 6 21 used for the Host Name and Login backslash from the Login User User Name Name Has the Login Password been Check the login password 6 21 entered properly Have exceptions for Windows Firewall Configure exceptions for Windows 6 10 been configured properly Firewall properly 6 13 Do the time settings fo
11. 3 Gata Make sure that the View tab is selected Remove the checkmark from Use Sharing Wizard Recommended in Advanced settings In Windows XP click the View tab and remove the checkmark from Use Simple File Sharing Recommended in Advanced settings 4 Create a folder 1 Create a folder on your computer For example create a folder with the name scannerdata on the desktop sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC 2 Right click the scannerdata folder and click Share and Advanced sharing Click the Advanced Sharing button scannerdata Properti Make sure that the Sharing tab is selected Network File and Folder Sharing scannerdata Not Shared Network Path Not Shared Advanced Sharing Set custom permissions create multiple shares and set other advanced sharing options Password Protection People must have a user account and password for this computer to access shared folders To change this setting use the Network and Sharing Center ic OKs Cancel Apply In Windows XP right click the scannerdata folder and select Sharing and Security or Sharing 2 Configures permission settings 1 Select the Share this folder checkbox and click the Permissions button Sharing res 1 Settings Share name Make a note of the Share name Limit the number of simultaneous users to 20 Comments
12. 8 11 Status Job Cancel gt Check of Device Status Printer 10 10 GB0190_00 Error information such as paper jam out of toner or out of paper and status such as waiting or printing are displayed FAX Option amp 10 10 GB0191_00 e The information such as sending receiving and dialing is displayed e Press Line Off to cancel a fax in sending receiving For details refer to the FAX Operation Guide Removable Memory 10 10 Status Loaded Capacity 1 9GB Used Area 684 1MB Free Space 1 2GB Menu Remove Memo e The usage and capacity of the external media connected to this machine are displayed GB0194_00 e Press Menu and then Format to format external media e Press Remove Memory to safely remove the external media This operation is the same as that for Removing USB Memory on page 7 9 8 12 Status Job Cancel gt Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper Check the remaining amount of toner paper and staples on the touch panel 1 Display the screen 10 10 Status st Sn Job Cancel fre Running 2 Drax 2 Toner Status Waiting OK Use V or AN to scroll up and down Pre Status No Paper Pause All Print Jobs Status Job Cancel GB0052_02 m 2 m Removable Memory Attached P USB Keyboard 2 Invalid 4 4
13. Horizontal direction 2 Preparation before Use This chapter explains the following topics FI INGTNSS oe a E E te satin sas apeanansuptouunew smut E E E 2 2 MIACIIMG E EEE EEA A AE E EE EE A N IA 2 2 Oner INO er E E E A A A E EE 2 6 TOUGH FAG eserse a E a E E 2 7 Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables cccccccccseececseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeesaueeseeesseeeseaees 2 8 Conneccion ANIC cass sects Sices esd ninen EAE aE EE E E E EE AAE EEEa 2 8 Preparing Necessary Cables siiasmnsssaiedispecsracaadortumntunsansaasannantsiasnneluniuesandontnnusraatwhsesaiewietaunccunaunapaenanats 2 9 COMME CUING C ADIOS mara E E E E E E 2 10 Gonnecung LAN CADIS sisssnassasdcsanocsrsdchanmediancanescsanotiuassumtshuunsniaaenhumsenienieGuxisisaantuninaiahiastneaunteainteunssuminen 2 10 CONN ECUNG WSC AOS atta surercsnscninnesuteceunetannschin E NN EEEE STE EATA OESTE EEEE 2 11 Connecting the Power Cable ccccccccccssceceseeceeseceuscseuecccsecessececeusesaueeseusensueessueeteueeseseeeeseseesaneeneetenes 2 11 POWE OM OU aeeai EA E E E EE T EE EEEE 2 12 PONO I e E T EE AE 2 12 PONOT OI seser EE EE E EAE RE E A EEE EE 2 12 Hoan ON O aese EE dus E E EE ERE ans 2 14 Software On DVD WINdOWS sacesincesousecdansidedetsdvnsedesscucedadeaideideddesvurs ceasasennatscsiddeicesdecsuunsddvxesdedadessinesansedt 2 14 Installing Printer Driver in WINGOWS ccccecccceeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeseeeseeeee
14. Input 6 1 Limit 32 GB0057_80 Cancel lt Back Next gt Eem Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters N Common Operations gt Favorites 5 Check the settings Check the settings and change or add information as needed Name Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Input 6 Limit Name Sending Job E mail _ ce Job Type Multi Sending i 1 2 Number Auto Owner Admin e GB0766_00 GB0057_81 Number Select the item that you want to change 10 10 D 10 10 Name Sending Job E mail Job Type Multi Sending 1 2 Number Auto Admin l e Permission 00 20 GB0766_00 GB0760_00 Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Permission Private N Destination Address Book Function Type Wizard e GB0305_00 Configures permission settings for favorites to determine how they are shared with other users GB0766_02 12 Destination Select the item that you want to change 10 10 ae 10 10 Address Book Ext Address Book Permission Private Destination Address Book 2 2 Functions 2 1 4 One Touch Key Function Type Wizard Address Entry E mail When the job type is Send or FAX selects the Destination Recall Method GB0766_02 GBO0771_00 Functions Select the item that you want to change 10 10 SSS S738 10 10 Destination Address Book Or
15. Security Level page 9 4 Restart page 9 4 RAM Disk Setting page 9 23 Optional Memory page 9 24 Optional Function page 11 5 X X Date Timer page 9 24 Date Time page 9 24 Date Format page 9 24 Time Zone page 9 24 Auto Panel Reset page 9 24 Panel Reset Timer page 9 24 Low Power Timer page 9 24 Auto Sleep page 9 24 Sleep Level page 9 25 Sleep Timer page 9 25 Auto Error Clear page 9 25 Error Clear Timer page 9 25 Interrupt Clear Timer page 9 25 Unusable Time refer to Fax Operation Guide Adjustment Maintenance page 9 26 Density Adjustment Copy page 9 26 age 9 26 pag Send Box page 9 26 Background Density Copy Auto page 9 26 Adj page 9 26 Send Box Auto page 9 26 Toner Save Level Copy page 9 26 EcoPrint page 9 26 Printer page 9 26 Print Density page 9 26 Auto Color Correction page 9 26 Correcting Black Line page 9 26 Display Brightness page 9 26 Tone Curve Adjustment page 9 27 Drum Refresh 1 page 9 27 Drum Refresh 2 page 9 27 Auto Drum Refresh page 9 27 DP Adjustment page 9 27 XX 1 Preface This chapter explains the following topics NOO aan a E cases ms nne poner saceecannccsec oats cane sabaraeseeenonb segues ase coecnnesteneteaee E E 1 2 Safety Conventions in THIS Guide
16. Emphasize the outline of texts or lines Blur the image outline Sharpness gt page 3 54 Darken or lighten the background i e the area with no text or images of originals Background Density Adjust gt page 3 55 Prevent bleed through for 2 sided originals Prevent Bleed through page 3 56 Add margins white space Margin gt page 3 46 Scan a large number of originals separately and then produce as one job Continuous Scan gt page 3 40 Automatically rotate the scanned image to match the paper orientation Auto Image Rotation gt page 4 16 Send notice by e mail when a job is complete Job Finish Notice gt page 3 61 Add a file name to the job to easily check its status File Name Entry gt page 3 63 Suspend the current job and override it to give a new job top priority Priority Override gt page 3 64 Pause the current jobs and make copies immediately Interrupt Copy gt page 4 17 Copying gt Copying Functions Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image Auto A3 141 M He We gt lt lt 2 A5 70 Mile lt Adjusts the image to match the paper size Standard Zoom Adjusts the image to match present sizes Zoom Level Original Zoom Level Original Inch Models Copy Auto 400 Max 200 STMT gt gt Ledger 154 STMT gt gt Legal 129 Letter gt gt Ledger 121 Legal gt gt Ledger 100
17. cccccecceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeseeeeaeeeseeeseeseeees 2 18 Seting TWAIN DUVET cgeocsctescitelneceneiseacesdterceidswandeaianencnegceea a E OEE 2 20 Seting WIA DIVET setea eE teincdsiemtemmennnancoebeeseneeaadoasacdabobelennemenceuinsacenene 2 21 EMC KO Savor UNCION saaneeni ne E N EEEE E EE EE EAEE 2 22 Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode cccccccceecceeeceeeeeeeeseeeseeeeseeeaeeeeas 2 22 Sleep and AUTO SICCD ccdcdeiees derinse eain Ta a mw E EAE AEEA REEE EE A OAE DEN AE 2 23 Machine Setup Wizard giciesderendeacs navichamennneectice te gemantotd aE EENAA EAE EEA DENRA 2 24 Command Center RX Settings for E mail ccccccececseeeeceeeeseeeeceeeseeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeesees 2 25 CIFIC IID eaea EE E EE EE E EE AEE E E E 2 26 3 CoOmMmMON ODEraHONS ssscnccstincncecatenccvnastanscsesecatanmorstesentenseatecnueasssaveceesaaaes 3 1 EO AGING PAPEI senine a e R A EEEE 3 2 Before Loading Papel sossnrocrenraia neea e A E REER 3 2 Loading Paper in the Cassettes cccccccceccssecceeeeseeceeecececeeeseeeesaeesseesageseueeneeeseees 3 3 Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray cccccccecccsecceeeeseeeeseeeseeeseeeeaeeeseeeseesaees 3 5 Loading MOINS rreren die eaan ie EEE E e A AEE anie 3 7 Placing Originals on the Platen cccccccccceccceeeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeseeseeeseueeseeeseeseeeseeeeaees 3 7 Loading Originals in the Document Processor ccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeseeeaees 3 8 C
18. 16 3 8x20 1 2x10 7 8 416x521x275 5 mm Weight Approx 26 4 Ib Approx 12 kg Environmental Specifications Recovery time from Low Power Mode Description 10 seconds or less Time to Low Power Mode 1 minute Recovery time from sleep 20 seconds or less Time to sleep 1 minute Duplexing NOTE Standard Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types EN ISO 7779 Der h chste Schalldruckpegel betr gt 70 dB A oder weniger gem EN ISO 7779 EK1 ITB 2000 Das Ger t ist nicht f r die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen Um st rende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld platziert werden 11 22 Appendix gt Glossary Glossary Auto Form Feed Timeout During data transmission the machine may sometimes have to wait until receiving the next data This is the auto form feed timeout When the preset timeout passes the machine automatically put paper out However no output is performed if the last page has no data to be printed Auto IP Auto IP is a module that enables dynamic IPv4 addresses to be assigned to a device on startup However DHCP requires a DHCP server Auto IP is a server less method of choosing an IP address IP addresses between 169 254 0 0 to 169 254 255 255 are reserved for Auto IP and assinged automatically Auto Pa
19. Blur the image outline Sharpness gt page 3 54 Darken or lighten the background i e the area with no text or images of originals Background Density Adjust gt page 3 55 Prevent bleed through for 2 sided originals Prevent Bleed through page 3 56 Enlarge or shrink originals according to the sending size Zoom page 3 57 Scan a large number of originals separately and then produce as one job Continuous Scan gt page 3 40 Add a file name to the scanned images File Name Entry gt page 3 63 Add an E mail subject and body when sending E mail E mail Subject Body page 6 43 Send notice by e mail when a job is complete Job Finish Notice gt page 3 61 Encrypt your message FTP Encrypted TX gt page 6 44 Send a image to a WSD compatible computer NOTE WSD Scan gt page 6 45 This section does not include fax settings For details on fax operation refer to the FAX Operation Guide Fax functionality requires the optional fax kit 6 39 sending gt Sending Functions Sending Size Select size of image to be sent Same as Original Size Automatically sends the same size as the original Metric Select from A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 B6 Folio or 216 x 340 mm Select from Ledger Letter Legal Statement 11 x 15 or Oficio Il Select from 8K 16K Hagaki or Oufukuhagaki Relationship between Original Size Sending Size and Zoom
20. Envelope C5 162 x 229mm A5 R 148 x 210 mm Envelope C4 229 x 324mm Folio 210 x 330 mm ISO B5 176 x 250 mm Ledger Envelope 10 Commercial 10 4 1 8 x 9 1 2 Legal Envelope 9 Commercial 9 3 7 8 x 8 7 8 Letter Envelope 6 Commercial 6 3 4 3 5 8 x 6 1 2 Letter R Envelope Monarch 3 7 8 x7 1 2 Statement R Youkei 2 114 x 162 mm Oficio II Youkei 4 105 x 235 mm 216 x 340 mm Size Entry 98 x 148 to 297 x 432 mm Smoothness 8K 273 x 394 mm 16K 273 x 197 mm 16K R 197 x 273 mm The paper surface should be smooth but it must be uncoated With paper that is too smooth and slippery several sheets may accidentally be supplied at once causing jams Basis Weight In countries that use the metric system basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square meter in area In the United States basis weight is the weight in pounds of one ream 500 sheets of paper cut to the standard size or trade size for a specific grade of paper Paper that is too heavy or too light may be supplied incorrectly or cause paper jams which may cause excessive wear of the machine Mixed paper weight i e thickness may cause several sheets to be supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or other printing problems if the toner fails to adhere correctly Thickness Avoid using paper that is too thick or thin Sig
21. GB0051_00 1 1 el GB0650_00 2 Select the creator of the document to print 10 10 Cancel lt Back GB0651_00 i 3 Select the document 10 10 tit Vi doc 4100908135138 cm _ doc 0100908134821 GB0653_01 Displays details for individual documents 5 5 Printing gt Printing Data Saved on the Printer 4 Print and delete the document To print the document 10 10 i Vi Bi doc 4100908135138 e _ doc 0100908134821 U 1 1 GB0653_01 NOTE The password entry screen will be displayed Enter the password using the numeric keys 10 10 1 999 GB0003_00 Specify the number of copies to print as desired When using the number of copies specified with print job select Upon completion of printing the Private Print job is automatically deleted To delete Document Box 10 10 _ doc 0100908134821 am GB0653_01 L G NOTE The password entry screen will be displayed Enter the password using the numeric keys 5 6 Printing gt Printing Data Saved on the Printer Proof and Hold Proof and Hold stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver as a Proof and Hold Print job Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Proof and Hold Print job using the printer driver NOTE RAM disk mode must be enabled For details refer to RAM Di
22. H7 Ae CCAA EDTDAIBL V XKMGET E h BRAIcD MNILE JEE The label shown below is attached on the right side of the machine CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT KLASSE 1 LASER PRODUKT Preface gt Notice SAFETY OF LASER BEAM USA 1 Safety of laser beam This machine has been certified by the manufacturer to Class 1 level under the radiation performance standards established by the U S DHHS Department of Health and Human Services in 1968 This indicates that the product is safe to use during normal operation and maintenance The laser optical system enclosed in a protective housing and sealed within the external covers never permits the laser beam to escape 2 The CDRH Act A laser product related act was implemented on Aug 2 1976 by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH of the U S Food and Drug Administration FDA This act prohibits the sale of laser products in the U S without certification and applies to laser products manufactured after Aug 1 1976 The label shown below indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States On this machine the label is on the right 3 Optical unit When checking the optical unit avoid direct exposure to the laser beam which is invisible Shown at below is the label located on the cover of the optical unit DANGER e CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM AT
23. Login user name and enter Login User Name up to 321 characters and Password up to 64 characters Password When job accounting is enabled select the checkbox beside Account ID and enter the account ID as many as eight digits Cancel NOTE When the machine s IP address is unknown contact Administrator Finish registering amp Kyocera TWAIN Driver Le S Scanner List NOTE Click Delete to delete the added machine Click Edit to change names 2 20 Preparation before Use gt Installing Software Setting WIA Driver Register this machine to the WIA Driver Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 7 1 Display the screen 1 Click the Windows Start button and enter Scanner in Program and File Search Click View scanners and cameras in the search list The Scanners and Cameras screen appears 2 Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers and press the Properties If you do not see your device in the list make sure it is connected to the computer and turned on then choos sh hoose Refresh Refresh F Add Device Scan Profiles Y Properties Do I need to use this to install my scanner or camera Configure WIA Driver WIA Driver Network 2 Properties l General Color Managerfer ettines pout Scanner address Authentication Secure protocol settings 4 Enter the m
24. Original Size page 3 32 Sending Size and Zoom page 3 57 are related to each other Refer to the following table Original Size and the size you wish to the same different send as are Original Size Specify as necessary Specify as necessary Sending Size Select Same as Original Select the required size Zoom Select 100 or Auto Select Auto NOTE When you select Sending Size that is different from Original Size and select the Zoom 100 you can send the image as the actual size No Zoom 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6 2 display the screen Ready to send _ 10 10 Ready to send 10 10 Se M s OF Recall Check ee Sct Boek Original er EX Sending Size p PX Same as Original Size One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book d a8 Ed File Separation a3 1 2 M _ V r Scan Resolution E mail Folder FAX dpi 300x300dpi rd m i Close Add Edit Shortcut Use V or AN to scroll up and down vv Favorites GB0055_00 GB0081_ 01 2 Select the sending size Same as Original Size 10 10 Metric gt Inch gt GBO0071_00 6 40 sending gt Sending Functions Metric Inch or Others 10 10 s Select the desired size L 6 41 GB0071_00 Ready to send 10 10 Cancel Use V or AN to scroll up and down GB0072_00 sending gt Sending Functio
25. Replacement of the parts in the maintenance kit is necessary at every 300 000 pages of printing and requires professional servicing Contact your Service Representative When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses Corrective Actions Scanning cannot be performed due to insufficient memory of scanner Only one copy of the scanned pages is available Press Continue to print send or store the scanned pages Press Cancel to cancel the printing job The machine may reproduce the same originals by arranging the following settings Reduce the number of originals to be scanned at once Furthermore the machine may reproduce the same originals by arranging the following settings Select Copy Priority of Optional Memory in System Menu NOTE Before changing the Optional Memory setting contact your administrator An error has occurred during transmission The job is canceled Press End Refer to Responding to Send Error for the error code and corrective actions Load the paper width guide and paper length guide properly so that there is no space between the guides and the paper Reference Page Troubleshooting gt Responding to Messages Message Staple is empty Checkpoints Has any of the document finisher run out of staples Corrective Actions If the staples are depleted the machine will stop and the loc
26. THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED AND KYOCERA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THIS WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO AND KYOCERA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHICH MAY ARISE OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE MFP KYOCERA Document Solutions America Inc KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada Ltd 225 Sand Road 6120 Kestrel Rd Mississauga ON LST 1S8 Fairfield New Jersey 07004 0008 USA Canada 1 7 Preface gt Notice Legal Restriction on Copying Scanning It may be prohibited to copy scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner Copying Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by low It may not be limited to these items Do not knowingly copy scan the items that are not to be copied scanned Paper money Bank note Securities Stamp Passport Certificate Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying scanning of other items not mentioned above 1 8 Preface gt Legal and Safety Information Legal and Safety Information Legal Information Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc is prohibited Regarding Trade Names e PRESCRIBE and ECOSYS are trademarks of Kyocera Corporation e KPDL is a trademark of
27. 297 mm in 1mm increments Media Type Plain 105 g m or less Transparency Rough Vellum 59 g m or less Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Envelope Thick 106 g m and more High Quality Custom 1 8 3 42 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Paper Output USB Set paper output to document finisher or job separator tray Inner Tray Places pages face down in the inner tray Finisher Tray Job Separator Tray NOTE Places pages face down in the optional document finisher tray Places pages face down in the job separator tray If the optional document finisher has been installed Inner Tray will change to Finisher Tray To change default destination refer to Paper Output on page 9 73 for details 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Paper Output 10 10 10 10 Copies J a lil SSS PS ed py Original Size Paper R Zoom al Density XE Auto es Selection Original Orientation Auto 100 Normal 0 i Top Edge on Top ee r gt Mixed Size Originals Duplex v Combine g Collate 1 sided gt 1 sided Le Offset Paper Output V off Collate Inner tray Shortcut GB0001_01 GB0002_00 Use V or AN to scroll up and down 2 Select the output destination
28. Account Name Others el GB0441_00 GB0057_28 9 38 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Login Password 10 10 User Name User A Login User Name User a Login Password FORO Account Name Others amp Enter the same login password twice for confirmation purposes Input 3 Limit 64 l GB0441_00 Account Name Searches by account name System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 ol Bii A Prienu _ User Name User A Login User Name User A Login Password FOO K 1 Account Name Others Cancel ave Cancel GB0441_00 GB0603_00 Allows you to search for an account name and sorts results Displays details for individual account names E mail Address 10 10 2 Input 11 e Limit 128 Access Level Administ ator My Panel Local Authorization l GB0441_01 GB0057_30 My Panel 10 10 Access Level m System Menu Counter 10 10 Language Default Screen Shortcut Shared Shortcut Local Authorization GB0441_01 GB0749_00 For details on My Panel refer to My Panel on page 9 37 N 9 39 Setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Local Authorization System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 E mail Address Access Level administrator My Panel Printer Off 2 ff Copy O Send off
29. Address Book 1 gt 1 1 gt Address Entry gt el Up to 128 characters can be entered GB0057_22 Cancel p OK PETE ER GB0583_00 Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters 3 Accept the destination System Menu Counter 10 10 E E mail abc def com ce 1 1 Menu Cancel GB0581_01 Status Job Cancel gt Sending the Log History Automatic Log History Transmission This function automatically sends the log history to the specified destinations whenever a set number of jobs has been logged 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to Sending the Log History on page 8 7 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 Send Log History Off 1 1 Destination Job Log Subject GB0578_00 2 Select the function 10 10 10 10 OK E Ea lt a Press On and enter the number of jobs in the log history print You can enter any number between 1 and 16 GB0579_00 GB0580_00 Manual Log History Transmission You can also send the log history to the specified destinations manually 1 Display the screen Referring to Sending the Log History on page 8 7 display the screen 2 Send the log history 10 10 Send Log History Auto Sending Destination i E mail abc def com Job Log Subject GB0578_01 8 9 Status Job Cancel gt Sending the Log History Setting E mail Subject Set the
30. Cancel Next gt el GB0790_01 GB0796_00 2 Edit the shortcut No ES 10 10 ES 10 10 Name Shortcut 1 1 Functions Zoom GB0794_00 GB0797_00 a T Name 10 10 Input 10 Limit 24 Number Shortcut 1 Name Shortcut 1 1 1 l e O N LQ oO fo a GB0797_00 3 24 Common Operations gt Shortcuts 3 Register the shortcut 10 10 Number Shortcut 1 GB0797_00 To delete a M MME 10 10 10 10 Edit 1 1 Private Shortcut 2 Shared Shortcut 1 Shared Shortcut 2 T a 2 A Si c0 2 Cancel OK 2 a A F Oo O Select the shortcut you wish to delete Using Shortcuts The registered shortcut will be displayed on the Copy Send FAX Print from USB Memory or Save to USB Memory or Polling Box initial screen Pressing Shortcut will switch to the registered function s screen Requires the optional fax kit Ready to copy OOOO O O 10 10 Copy _ ee copies i ae Sry ey _ Paper Ba Zoom ll Density lt Selection e Auto 11100 Normal 0 e Duplex Ss Combine gp Collate 25 L Offset 1 sided gt gt 1 sided Off Collate GB0001_04 3 25 Common Operations gt Quick Setup Wizard Quick Setup Wizard Make the following basic settings as instructed by the Wizard Energy Saver Setup Configures sleep mode and low power mode 1 Sleep Mode Sleep Mode Auto Sleep S
31. FAX Transmission Off Cancel Local Authorization Cancel GB0441_01 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Local Authorization is displayed when selecting On for Local User Authorization Refer to Local User Authorization on page 9 36 N 3 Register the user System Menu Counter 10 10 User Name User A Login User Name User A Login Password FORK Account Name Others Cancel GB0441_00 To delete System Menu Counter A es DeviceAdmin S User A GB0440_01 Select the user you wish to delete and press Delete the trash can icon NOTE Also you can delete the user by selecting the user press Menu and then Delete 9 40 GB0839_00 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Simple Login The simple login function allows users to log in simply by selecting a user name Users must be registered in advance to use this functionality For details refer to Adding a User on page 9 32 Simple Login Settings Enable simple login 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 29 display the screen 2 Select the authentication method as explained in User Login Settings on page 9 29 System Menu Counter 10 10 User Login Local Authentication Local User List 1 1 Simple login settings gt Off Local User Authorization GB0435_00 2 Enable simple login 10 10 10 10
32. Letter R A4 R 18 sheets min Ledger A3 12 sheets min Legal B4 12 sheets min B5 25 sheets min B5 R 16 sheets min A5 R 12 sheets min Description FS 6530MFP Letter A4 30 sheets min Letter R A4 R 22 sheets min Ledger A3 15 sheets min Legal B4 15 sheets min B5 30 sheets min B5 R 20 sheets min A5 R 15 sheets min First Print Time A4 feed from Cassette 7 8 seconds Zoom Level Manual mode 25 to 400 1 increments Auto mode Preset Zoom Continuous Copying 1 to 999 sheets Resolution 600x600 dpi Supported Original Type Sheet Book 3 dimensional objects maximum original size Ledger A3 Original Feed System Fixed 11 19 Appendix gt Specifications Printer functions Description Printing Speed Same as Copying Speed First Print Time A4 feed from Cassette 8 5 seconds or less Resolution 600x600 dpi Operating System Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 Apple Macintosh OS X Page Description Language PRESCRIBE Emulations PCL6 PCL5e PCL XL KPDL3 PostScript 3 compatible Scanner Description System requirements CPU 600 Mhz or higher RAM 128 MB or more Resolution 600 dpi 400 dpi 300 dpi 200 dpi 200x100 dpi 200x400 dpi Resolution in FAX mode included File Format TIFF JPEG6 0 tn2 JPEG XPS PDF 1 4 A Scanning Speed A4 landscape 300 dpi Image
33. On HTTP Select whether or not to communicate using HTTP Value Off On HTTPS Select whether or not to communicate using HTTPS SSL must be set to On in SSL on page 9 22 Value Off On IPP Select whether or not to communicate using IPP When selecting On set the IPP default Port Number Use the IPP default port 631 Value Off On Port 1 32767 IPP over SSL Select whether or not to use IPP over SSL When selecting On set the IPP over SSL default Port Number Use the IPP over SSL default port 443 SSL must be set to On in SSL on page 9 22 Value Off On Port 1 32767 Raw Port Select whether or not to receive documents using Raw Port Value Off On ThinPrint Select whether or not to use ThinPrint Value Off On ThinPrintOverSSL Select whether or not to use ThinPrintOverSSL SSL must be set to On in SSL on page 9 22 Value Off On After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON 9 21 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu WSD Scan Description Select whether or not to use WSD Scan Value Off On After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON WSD Print Item Description Select whether or not to use WSD Print Value Off On After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON Enhanced WSD De
34. Original Image gt page 3 53 Emphasize the outline of texts or lines Blur the image outline Sharpness page 3 54 Darken or lighten the background i e the area with no text or images of originals Background Density Adjust gt page 3 55 Prevent bleed through for 2 sided originals Prevent Bleed through page 3 56 Enlarge or shrink originals according to the sending or storing size Zoom page 3 57 Select the file format for images being sent or stored File Format gt page 3 58 Change the color mode for images being sent or stored Color Selection gt page 3 60 Send notice by e mail when a job is complete Job Finish Notice gt page 3 61 Add a file name to the job to easily check its status File Name Entry gt page 3 63 Suspend the current job and override it to give a new job top priority 3 31 Priority Override gt page 3 64 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Original Size 00683 USB Specify the original size to be scanned Auto Automatically detects the size of the original Metric Select from A3 A4 R A4 A5 R A5 A6 R B4 B5 R B5 B6 R B6 Folio or 216 x 340 mm Inch Select from Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement R Statement 11 x 15 or Oficio Il Others Select from 8K 16K R 16K Hagaki Oufukuhagaki or Custom Size Entry Enter the size Inch models Horizontal 2 to 17 in 0 01 increments
35. Plain Rough Vellum Recycled Preprinted Bond Color Prepunched Letterhead Thick High Quality Custom 1 to 8 Duplex Same as Simplex Dimensions W x D x H 23 1 4x23 3 16x13 7 8 590x589x352 mm Weight Approx 46 lb Approx 21 kg Paper Feeder double cassette option Paper Supply Method Description Friction Feed No Sheets 500 80 g m 2 cassette Paper Size Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement R Oficio Il A3 A4 R A4 A5 R B4 B5 R B5 Folio 216 x 340 mm 8K 16K R 16K Supported Paper Paper weight 45 163 g m Media types Plain Rough Vellum Recycled Preprinted Bond Color Prepunched Letterhead Thick High Quality Custom 1 to 8 Duplex Same as Simplex Dimensions W x D x H 23 1 4x23 3 16x13 7 8 590x589x352 mm Weight Approx 46 Ib Approx 21 kg 11 21 Appendix gt Specifications Document Finisher option Number of Trays Description 1 tray Paper Size Non stapling Ledger Legal Oficio Il A3 B4 Folio 216 x 340 mm 8K 250 sheets Letter Letter R Executive R Statement R A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R 16K 500 sheets Supported Paper Weight 45 to 256 g m Stapling 90 g m or less Maximum Sheets for Stapling Ledger Legal Oficio Il A3 B4 216 x 340 mm 8K 25 sheets Letter Letter R A4 A4 R B5 B5 R 16K 50 sheets Paper weight 90 g m or less Dimensions W x D x H
36. Ready to copy 10 10 Job Separator Tray GB0031_00 o l e 3 43 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Collate Offset Offset the output by page or set USB Collate Scan multiple originals and deliver complete sets of copies as required according to page number Offset Without Document Finisher Option When you use offsetting printed copies are produced after rotating each set or page by 90 NOTE To offset without a document finisher load the same size paper into a second paper source with a different orientation The paper sizes supported in Offset are A4 B5 Letter and 16K With Document Finisher Option When you use offsetting printed copies are segregated after each set of copies or after each page 3 44 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Press Collate Offset Ready to copy 10 10 Copies ek i _ Paper Zoom Density A Selection l a Auto Gal Collate _ Offset Collate Duplex 1 sided gt gt 1 sided hed Favorites GBO0001_01 2 Select the function 10 10 123 123 123 Collate Only Offset Each Page Fem Offset Each Set Qs ir GB0021_00 3 45 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Margin Add margins white space In addition
37. a i 3 Press OK 9 52 System Menu Counter 10 10 1 65535 339 2 Cancel 01 4 amp Input 11 Limit 32 Input 4 Limit 128 System Menu Counter 3 10 10 5 255 L 2 Cancel t GB0439_01 GB0057_35 GB0057_36 GB0693_00 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Job Accounting Job accounting Manages the copy print count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each account Job accounting helps the following activities in business organizations e Manageability of up to 100 individual accounts e Availability for account IDs with as many as eight digits between 0 and 99999999 for security e Integrated management of printing and scanning statistics through the use of an identical account ID e Tracking the print volume for each account and for all accounts combined e Restricting the print counter in one page increments up to 9 999 999 copies e Resetting the print counter for each account or for all accounts combined First Job Accounting Setup Follow these steps for the first job accounting setup For details about the configuration method refer to Job Accounting Settings on page 9 55 1 Enable job accounting 10 10 On 1 1 l G GB0462_00 2 Add an account System Menu Counter 10 10 Q JI iit Sales department 00000001 1 1 GB0473_00 3 Log o
38. gt 1 sided 1 sided gt gt 2 sided 2 sided gt gt 1 sided gt si si Others o Cancel OK 3 wy J 0 Others Ready to copy 000 E to copy 10 10 4 1 sided gt gt 1 sided 1 cided gt gt cided 2 sided gt gt 1 sided GE x 2 om sided Others Cancel P CO GB0009_00 Copying gt Copying Functions 2 Select the desired Duplex option Ready to copy 10 10 Duplex 1 sided gt gt 1 sided GB0010_00 i a e Ready to copy 10 10 d 1 sided gt gt 1 sided 2 W 1 sided gt gt 2 sided pa N tp 2 sided gt gt 1 sided U 2 sided gt gt 2 sided Cancel If you choose a 2 sided sheet or book proceed to Step 3 If you choose duplex proceed to Step 4 If you choose Book gt gt 2 sided proceed to Step 5 Use V or AN to scroll up and down j GB0024 3 Select the binding edge of the originals Ready to copy 10 10 10 10 aa i 2 sided gt gt 2 sided aa Left Right Binding in Original E Left Right Top Binding in Finishing Left Right Original Orientation Top Edge on Top S p O d E E a O i 0 4 Select the binding edge of the finished copies Ready to copy 10 10 Ready to copy 10 10 oe Left Right Top Original Orientation Top Edge on Top i NE 8 d E O O 5 Select the binding edge of the finished copies Ready to copy 10 10 Ready to copy 10 10 7 Book gt gt 2 sided
39. machine from Sleep mode Blank sheets are ejected Are the originals loaded correctly When placing originals on the platen 3 7 place them face down and align them with the original size indicator plates When placing originals in the 3 9 document processor place them face up Check that the settings of the application software Printouts are totally too light Is the paper damp Replace the paper with new paper 3 2 If you experience frequent problems 2 4 turn the cassette heater switch on Have you changed the density Select appropriate density level 3 51 9 26 Is the toner distributed evenly within Shake the toner container from side to 10 2 the toner container side about several times Is there a message indicating the Replace the toner container 10 2 addition of toner Is EcoPrint mode enabled Disable EcoPrint mode 4 15 Run Drum Refresh 1 9 27 Make sure the paper type setting is 9 8 correct the paper being used Printouts are too dark even Have you changed the density Select appropriate density level 3 51 though the background of the 9 26 scanned o The background density is Run Background Density Adjustment 3 55 obtrusive 9 26 10 8 Troubleshooting gt Solving Malfunctions Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Copies have a moire pattern Is the original a printed photograph Set the original image to Photo 3 5
40. oO pon to Cancel OK 2 JE a 22 o O Destinations can be changed later Refer to Checking and Editing Destinations on page 6 25 N sending gt Specifying Destination Entering a New E mail Address Enter the desired e mail address NOTE Access the Command Center RX beforehand and specify the settings required for sending e mail For details refer to Command Center RX Settings for E mail on page 2 25 1 3 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6 2 display the screen Ready to send 10 10 lt a ee Q Recall Enie One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book vi E mail Folder E Functions GB0055_00 Input 11 Limit 128 GB0057_07 Up to 128 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters N To enter multiple destinations press Next Destination and enter the next destination Up to 100 E mail addresses can be specified You can register the entered email address in the Address Book by pressing Menu and then Add to Address Book You can also replace the information for a previously registered destination Accept the destinations abc def com Input 11 Limit 128 GB0057_07 Destinations can be changed later Refer to Checking and Editing Destinations on page 6 25 sending gt Specifying Destination Specifying a New PC Folder Specify either the desired shared folder on a compu
41. or AN to scroll up and down Select the original size Size Entry 10 10 10 10 l C X 50 432 Y 50 297 45m O gt Metric gt Inch gt gt Size Entry Cancel 04 GB0025_00 L e Press the text box displaying the numbers and use or the numeric keypad to enter a value i 3 33 GB0026_00 GB0029_00 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Original Orientation Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction To use any of the following functions the document s original orientation must be set e Duplex e Margin e Combine e Staple option When placing originals on the platen Top Edge on Top Top Edge on Left 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Original Orientation Ready to copy 10 10 Ready to copy 10 10 Copies 1 Er ees SS ry Original Size I BE Auto Paper B Zoom Density Selection p az Original Orientation Auto 100 Normal 0 Top Edge on Top ee ee re gt Mixed Size Originals Off a Duplex Combine Collate _ B A1 J 1 Offset Paper Output 1 sided gt 1 sided Off Collate Inner tray F 7 eset eens cee PIS sv Favorites Close Add Edit i s Shortcut GBO000
42. or numeric keys to select the number of pages and press OK GB0474_00 9 63 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Counting the Number of Pages Printed This counts the number of pages printed Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job Accounting A new count can also be started after resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period of time Types of the counts are as follows Printed Pages Displays the number of pages copied and printed and the total number of pages used You can also use by Paper Size by Duplex and by Combine to check the number of pages used e You can use by Paper Size to check the number of pages used in the paper size set in Count by Paper Size on page 9 68 as well as the number of pages used in other paper sizes You can use by Duplex to check the number of pages used in Duplex 1 sided mode Duplex 2 sided mode and the total for both You can use by Combine to check the number of pages used in Combine None mode Combine 2 in 1 mode Combine 4 in 1 mode and the total for all three Scanned Pages Displays the number of pages scanned for copying faxing and other functions as well as the total number of pages scanned FAX Transmission Pages Displays the number of pages faxed FAX Transmission Time Displays the total duration of fax transmissions This item is displayed when the optional fax k
43. s Book gt gt Book EAR J ij Copying gt Copying Functions 6 Select the original orientation Ready to copy 10 10 10 10 A Top Edge on Top E Top Edge on Left Cancel GB0010_01 If the original is placed on the platen replace the original and press the Start key After scanning all originals press Finish Scan to start copying o e GB0015_03 Copying gt Copying Functions Combine Combine 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 copied page You can select the page layout or the type of boundary lines around the pages Copies 2 originals onto each page Copies 4 originals onto each page Other Combine 2 in 1 L to R T to B Copies 2 originals onto each page Settings 2 in 1 R to L B to T 4 in 1 Right then Down Copies 4 originals onto each page 4 in 1 Left then Down Border Line Sets the boundary line type to a solid line dotted line or positioning mark Original Orientation Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction NOTE Combine mode is available for the copy paper sizes of A3 A4 R A4 A5 R B4 B5 R B5 Folio 216 x 340 mm Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement R Oficio Il 8K 16K R and 16K When placing the original on the platen be sure to copy the originals in page order 4 12 Copying gt Copying Functions 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on pag
44. ti ES doc 100831170850 _ doc 100831170814 os _ doc 100831170659 __ doc 100831170519 Specify the number of copies to print as desired When using the number of copies specified with print job select GB0654_00 GB0003_00 Printing gt Printing Data Saved on the Printer To delete V i doc 100831170850 _ Ejdoc 100831170814 1 1 it c5 a _ S doc 100831170659 om a Gal 5 doc 100831170519 G GB0654_00 Printing gt Printing Data Saved on the Printer Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents This setting specifies that documents such as Private Printing or Proof and Hold Printing saved temporarily in the job box are automatically deleted after they have been saved for a set time Temporary documents are not automatically deleted Documents are deleted after 1 hour 4 hours Documents are deleted after 4 hours 1 day Documents are deleted after 1 day 1 week Documents are deleted after 1 week NOTE This function is valid for documents saved after the function is set Regardless of this function setting temporary documents are deleted when the main power switch is turned off 1 Display the screen 10 10 Ce 4 1 E System Menu Counter 10 10 Favorites i Sub Address Box GB0054_02 SS _ 1 1 a Box Sys
45. 1 Copies i Ero es ey v i _ Paper all Density Paper gz Collate Duplex saadi L Selection Selection _ Offset Auto Normal 0 A4 D Collate 1 sided aaasssssi ee ee r Q Duplex i estr Collate L Offset 1 sided gt gt 1 sided Collate Copy Screen Print Screen GB0001_01 GB0097_00 This function can be set while sending a This function can be set while saving a file to USB document memory 10 10 Desti 0 j Recall S Check Nee Fi L 2 sided Scan TE Book Resolution 1 sided 300x300dpi One Touch One Touch Key j Address Book Ext Address Book E eeel a a BE Density File Name abpED Entry X aii f Vv Normal 0 doc mai Folder FAX eee Lisa Send Screen Store File Screen GB0055_00 GBO0096_00 In this guide steps where touch panel keys are used are outlined in red E g Select Zoom Ready to copy 10 10 Copies H Er pem _ Paper LS Selection Auto K L 1 sided gt gt 1 sided M Density Normal 0 Duplex errn Collate Offset Collate GB0001_01 Procedures consisting of a series of operation panel and or touch panel operations are numbered as follows E g Select Functions and then EcoPrint Ready to copy l
46. 10 Prevent Bleed through off iB Margin i Continuous Scan 2 eel Auto Image Rotation lt GB0002_02 Add Edit Shortcu pm Use V or AN to scroll up and down GBO0001_01 GB0044_00 Copying gt Interrupt Copy Interrupt Copy This function allows you to pause the current jobs in progress when you need to make copies immediately When interruption copy ends the machine resumes the paused print jobs NOTE If the machine is left unused for 60 seconds in interrupt copy mode interrupt copying is automatically cancelled and printing resumes You can change the delay until interrupt copying is cancelled Change the delay as required For more information refer to nterrupt Clear Timer on page 9 25 The interrupt copy function may be unavailable due to insufficient memory depending on the manner in which the equipment is being utilized 1 Press the Interrupt key rl Ready for interrupt copy Seay 10 10 e e e e m Copies J J En all P a Z D nte rru pt N Suction y 5 e aes Auto 100 Normal 0 Duplex 2 Combine 7a Collate i gt _ Offset i sided gt gt 1 sided Collate GB0001_99 iii 2 The current print job is temporarily interrupted 2 Make an interrupt copy 1 Place the originals onto the machine for interrupt copy and configure the copy settings 2 Press the Start key to start interrupt copying Start
47. 10 Ready to copy i 3 36 GB0035_00 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions 2 sided Book Original Oe Select the type and orientation of the binding based on the original 1 sided Set when using a 1 sided sheet original 2 sided Set when using a 2 sided sheet original that will be bound on the left or right Book Set when using a book original such as a magazine or book that is bound on the left Other 2 sided 1 sided Set when using a 1 sided sheet original Settings Book Original 2 sided Binding Left Set when using a 2 sided sheet original that will be bound on the left or Right right 2 sided Binding Top Set when using a 2 sided sheet original that will be bound at the top Book Binding Left N Set when using a book original such as a magazine or book that is bound on the left Set when using a book original such as a magazine or book that is bound on the right Original Orientation Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction Requires the document processor This function is displayed when 2 sided Binding Left Right or 2 sided Binding Top is selected 3 37 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Send i 10 10 l me Dest 0 j Recall _ Check One Tou
48. 7 11 Encrypted PDF aS SW secere osaatvowed canta vanad EE E EEE 7 12 UP MG electorate E A E E oe ered erotic nave edie sees pee AT E E A A E 7 13 DOP GO AQ iee E E E E A E ER 7 14 SHEIN S KS ZS E eee hearse etree ecw andi cardia met E EE E tania eave saa tiene ce eee amen E E E EE 7 15 1 1 Document Box gt What is Document Box What is Document Box A document box is a place in machine memory that can be used to store document data scanned from the machine a print job from a computer or fax data The following types of document boxes are available Removable Memory Box A USB memory stick can be connected to the USB port A1 on the machine to print a saved PDF file You can print PDF data directly from the USB memory without a PC Image files scanned using this machine can also be saved to USB memory in the PDF TIFF JPEG or XPS format Scan to USB Refer to Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory on page 7 3 X Refer to Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB on page 7 6 Job Box A print job can be saved in a job box in the machine and printed when needed Refer to Printing Data Saved on the Printer on page 5 5 Sub Address Box Polling Box Fax data can be saved in Sub Address Box or Polling Box For details refer to the Operation Guide supplied with the fax kit 1 2 Document Box gt Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory Plugging
49. A Password Login Off Icon Male 1 d User System Menu Counter 10 10 Name User af Password Login off GB0739_00 GB0739_00 GB0712_01 Local User Input 6 Limit 32 i System Menu Counter 10 10 Network User 2 Select the user to use for simple logins from Local User or Network User Password Login 10 10 User User a Password Login Off Icon Male 1 e 9 45 GB0739_00 System Menu Counter 10 10 off On 1 1 GB0736_01 E lt GB0057_62 GB0740_00 GBO0710_01 GB0738_00 Setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Icon System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 gt rr 1 p ibe 2 2 v aiii 1 ayers 2 gre Basket Piano Guitar f C i Car Bicycle Cancel User User A Password Login Off 1 Icon Male 1 Cancel GB0739_00 GB0828_01 Use V or AN to scroll up and down 3 Register the user 10 10 Password Login Off Cancel GB0739_00 To delete ee Be 01 User A 02User i 03 User C 04 User D 05User E 1 1 07 None 08 None 09 None r 5 Menu End gt a E Select the user you wish to delete and press Delete the trash can icon NOTE You can also delete a user by selecting the name pressing Menu and then pressing Delete 9 46 setup Registration and User
50. A If you choose a 2 sided copy of a book select the setting for duplex Original Orientation Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction This item is not displayed when 1 sided gt gt 1 sided Book gt gt 1 sided or Book gt gt 2 sided is selected Copying gt Copying Functions NOTE The paper sizes supported in 2 sided to 2 sided are Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Executive Statement R Oficio Il A3 A4 R A4 A5 R B4 B5 R B5 Folio and 216 x 340 mm The following sizes of originals and paper are supported in Book to 2 sided mode Original Ledger Letter R A3 A4 R A5 R B4 B5 R and 8K Paper Letter A4 and B5 The following sizes of originals and paper are supported in 2 sided to 1 sided and Book to 1 sided Original Ledger Letter R A3 A4 R A5 R B4 B5 R and 8K Paper Letter A4 B5 and 16K You may change paper size and reduce or enlarge copy to match that size 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 4 2 display the screen Ready to copy 10 10 Copies 1 Er E SSS SOS _ Paper i Zoom all Density V2 Selection TOAS Auto Normal 0 ii 70 Collate __ Offset Collate Functions hed Favorites GB0001_01 2 Select the function 1 sided gt gt 1 sided 1 sided gt gt 2 sided 2 sided gt gt 1 sided or 2 sided gt gt 2 sided 10 10 fy gO 1 sided gt
51. Counter 3 Bok One To a 2 UUT Sales uuz None vus None i department 1 1 004 None 005 None 006 None 007 None 008 None 009 None 010 None 011 None 012 None N N oO a 0 e Select the One Touch Key you wish to delete and press Delete the trash can icon 6 38 sending gt Sending Functions Sending Functions send screen shows the commonly used functions By pressing Functions other selectable functions will be shown as a list Use V or A to select the function What do you want to do Select the file format for images being sent Reference Page File Format page 3 58 Specify the original size Original Size gt page 3 32 Specify the original orientation to scan in the correct direction Original Orientation gt page 3 34 Send mixed size originals Mixed Size Originals gt page 3 35 Automatically scan 2 sided originals 2 sided Book Original gt page 3 37 Change the size of the image being sent Send each page in a separate file Sending Size gt page 6 40 File Separation gt page 6 42 Set the resolution at which to scan originals Scan Resolution gt page 3 52 Adjust the density Change the color mode for images being sent Density gt page 3 51 Color Selection page 3 60 Select original image type for best results Original Image gt page 3 53 Emphasize the outline of texts or lines
52. Functions Sharpness copy USB Adjust the sharpness of the image When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines clear copies can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward Sharpen When copying images made up of patterned dots such as magazine photos in which moire patterns appear edge softening and weakening of the moire effect can be obtained by setting the sharpness toward Blur Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Sharpness Ready to copy 10 10 Ready to copy 10 10 Copies es a eee i Original Image _ 3 ll i L Text Photo N _ Paper B Zoom Density SZ Selection amn EcoPrint Auto 100 Normal 0 L off pS ere m O o lt b gt 2 4 EE hee a U ep Mebelinhes Duplex Combine g Collate 0 a 4 Offset Background Density Ad 1 sided gt 1 sided Off Collate Aa GB0001_01 GB0002_01 Add Edi Shortcut Use V or AN to scroll up and down 2 Adjust the sharpness Ready to copy 10 10 Blur GBO0060_00 l e Press 3 to 3 Blur Sharpen to adjust the sharpness 3 54 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Background Density Adjust ony Sona a Remove dark background from originals such as newspapers This fea
53. GB0081_03 2 Select the function 10 10 100 Auto an e GB0087_00 3 57 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions File Format USB Specify the image file format In addition you can adjust the image quality level Saves or sends a PDF file You can specify the format that comply with PDF A Saves or sends a TIFF file Saves or sends a JPEG file Each page will be saved individually XPS Saves or sends a file in XPS Others File Format Select from PDF TIFF JPEG and XPS Image Quality Set the image quality from 1 to 5 Low Quality High Quality PDF A Set PDF A from PDF A 1a and PDF A 1b This setting is displayed only when PDF has been selected as the file format 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen Send Ready to send 10 10 Ready to send 10 10 Dest Q Recall Check File Format F original SIZe 2 E n eS ee Le Auto One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book Original Orientation SS i 1 2 ad Top Edge on Top 4 bai Aor V Mixed Size Originals E mail Folder FAX off Close Add Edil Shortcu GB0055_00 GBO0081_00 Use V or A to scroll up and down Scan to USB 10 10 2 sided _ Book 1 sided i Density s File Name paa ab SE try Normal 0 doc O fad Q Oo G
54. INN OS etic ei ee eae ce soto ee reciente EAE EA E AE E E E ance 2 2 KACINGO sea arcsec E loss peeese wae A ncee asian E aene deecaceos eset 2 2 Operation Panel ssir deaveaceteene aenmtes soxedsens o aneia ia ana Aaaa aeeie EE EAEAN 2 6 TOU CEPRANO aeea O A de E E ON 2 7 Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables c ccccceccseeeseeeseeeeeeeeaeeenes 2 8 COMING CLIO Example ois cose sects cosecie eine mionna E EE E eE EAEE 2 8 Preparing Necessary Cables cccccccsscccseeceeeceeeceeeceueecaceceueceueesaeesseesagesseeeseeesgees 2 9 MNS CAINS sds ATE wns dete neem ese Oa OE 2 10 Connecting LAN Cable ssenaridir a Na OAE AKA A aaae RAAD 2 10 Connecing USB CADIS sasari o Ena e AE a e EE 2 11 Connecting the Power Cable ccccccccccccceecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeseeesaeeeseeeaees 2 11 FONE r ON O e A E E E ee eee ee eee 2 12 POWO I eaae AE E EE AE EAE EE E E A E 2 12 PONOT O eer E A E A E seosdeecan eeenaeten ana 2 12 Installing SONY NO satheraecs accion yesen nindian eE iaiaaeaia RENAR OEE 2 14 Software on DVD Windows siusvces encnwn bese scioasteennasais cu mneneation shin naducndendswaldnsusutcaldnndianueydates 2 14 Installing Printer Driver in WINGOWS ccccccccecccseeeeeecceeeseeeeaeeeseeeseeeseueeaeeeseeesaeess 2 15 Uninstalling the Software seceececnwostancuadevecndacnsnigiecareodooceesiiete seakdeeiebeeseeicedanotennwetemtaneerdd 2 17 Installing Printer Driver in Macintosh
55. Kyocera Corporation e Microsoft Windows Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 Windows 7 and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U S A and or other countries e PCL is a trademark of Hewlett Packard Company e Adobe Acrobat Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated e Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation e IBM and IBM PC AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation e Power PC is a trademark of IBM in the U S A and or other countries e Bonjour Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries e All fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype Imaging Inc e Helvetica Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype GmbH e ITC Avant Garde Gothic ITC Bookman ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered trademarks of International Typeface Corporation e UFST MicroType fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc are installed in this machine e This machine contains the software having modules developed by Independent JPEG Group e ThinPrint is a trademark of ThinPrint GmbH in Germany and other countries e This machine contains the NF module developed by ACCESS Co Ltd e e This product contains NetFront Browser of ACCESS CO LTD AC ESS e ACCESS ACCESS logo and NetFront are tr
56. Management gt User Login Administration Group Authorization Set restrictions of the machine usage by each individual group registered in the authentication server NOTE To use the group authorization settings Network Authentication must be selected for the authentication method and NTLM or Kerberos must be selected as the server type in Enabling Disabling User Login Administration on page 9 30 Select On for LDAP in Protocol Detail on page 9 21 Group Authorization Settings Use the group authorization 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 29 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 User Login Network Authentication Local User List Simple login settings gt Group Authorization Off Group List 2 Group Authorization Set gt Use V or A to scroll up and down GB0435_03 GB0450_00 2 Select On 10 10 off 0 1 1 maner l e GB0451_00 Add a Group Register the groups that is restricted the machine usage Up to 20 groups can be individually registered Other users and groups belong to Others Group ID Enter the ID displayed on the group list between 1 and 4294967295 Group Name Enter the name displayed on the group list up to 32 characters Access Level Select Administrator or User for group access privileges Printer Select whether or not to reject usage of print functions for the print
57. Memory 2 Select and open the folder in which the file you wish to print is stored The machine will display documents in the top 3 folder levels including the root folder To return to a higher level folder press lt Back 3 Select the file 10 10 i J 11 3 3 1PG Vi 7 9 2 JPG GB0089_02 Displays details for individual files Select the file to be printed and press Print 4 Enter the quantity Ready to print from Box a _ pa V _ Paper Collate Duplex SZ Selection L Offset i A4 D Collate 1 sided NOTE Press the Clear key to change the copy quantity Cancel GB0097_00 7 4 Document Box gt Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory 5 Select the functions 6 Se __ _ to print from Box 10 10 Copies 1 5 a Poe Duplex VS Selection Offset A4 D alate 1 ed GB0097_00 Cancel Select the function to use for Document Box Press Functions to display other functions For details refer to Functions for Document Box on page 7 10 X Start printing Start Press the Start key to start printing Remove the USB memory For details refer to Removing USB Memory on page 7 9 Document Box gt Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB This function allows you to store scanned image files in USB memory connected to the machine You can store files in PDF TIFF JPEG
58. Message Reference Page Clear the paper jammed in the multi purpose tray 10 26 Clear the paper jammed in right cover 1 Clear the paper jammed in cassette 1 Clear the paper jammed in cassette 2 Clear the paper jammed in cassette 3 Clear the paper jammed in the finisher 10 28 Clear the staple jammed in the finisher 2 3 4 Clear the paper jammed in right cover 3 5 6 7 Clear the paper jammed in the bridge unit Clear the paper jammed in the document processor Precautions with Paper Jams e Do not reuse jammed papers e Ifthe paper tears during removal be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming e Discard paper that has jammed in the optional document finisher A page affected by a paper jam will be printed again A Caution The fixing unit is extremely hot Take sufficient care when working in this area as there is a danger of getting burned 10 25 Troubleshooting gt Clearing Paper Jams Multi Purpose Tray Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the multi purpose tray Inside the Right Cover 1 Follow the steps below to clear paper jams inside the right cover 1 A Caution The fixing unit is extremely hot Take sufficient care when working in this area as there is a danger of getting burned 10 26 Troubleshooting gt Clearing Paper Jams
59. OVIV SS xr ahsned anesaetcamnneuennsaineracteaperacamae danictans sarvanasacdusanerane E E E E 3 14 FREGISIENING Favorits sc ccccsceienecvaeinenasancalsdnonesdbuaddavtenenshesuieis tueneudlnebddclendsidesdieemseseaanendsedbecsndeuistiendeedeeselewaciond 3 14 ECMNG and Deleting Favoritos setoniicoseceseresedesanriiaoodsunledad arepnnsased uniateudsapeitsags e E aE eiai 3 18 CUSHING FAVOS aerae re a E E T E E N E E see ennint 3 20 ADO UON aer E E E E EE E E E EE E E T 3 21 SOE AUS corpse EE E E E E E A E A T EEE AE E E A E A E N E E T 3 22 ROJER ONC US eeaeee e E E E E EE EEE E EEE 3 22 Editing and Deleting SHOrTCU S sa sieccisteactaasousientsustunsnendenwundisonenseretsueeincdeysusbestauaewnciet a EAEE AEEA Ea ENE aE 3 24 Sn PORN UNS ahs a arena EE EE E E E EE E E E E T 3 25 Guik Setup Wizard sesaran E SENTE e E EA DEEE E ENES EENE EEAS 3 26 FMS CN aoan E E E E EE E E E EO 3 28 RAC ae e oe EE A EE neat sce mate A S E E E E E EE EE T E 3 29 USING Vargus FUNCIONS srorsiracnaner noae TTE A Eas 3 30 ORINA E e E E E E E EE E E E E EEE 3 32 OPOMORE eena ee e a E e E E E peaneedantts 3 34 Mixed oze OngiNalS seasea eun E E ANE EE TNA ESEA S EEEE AEE E N EE EES 3 35 2 SIGCC BOOK MOMMA saprene a E E 3 37 COTES O AT sarie aE e TEE EE EEEE E EEEE E EET ET ene 3 40 ADE See UON sene EE E EE E a A E EE 3 42 OS OUDOT a E E E E EES N EE AOE E EEE E E 3 43 OOS OE opar E A E E E T E E E E A 3 44 MO erste E EEEE E E E E E E E E EE E oust E E E OEE EE E EE 3 46 E
60. Power Mode Auto Low Power Mode automatically switches the machine into Low Power Mode if left idle for a preset time The default preset time is 1 minute For more information about configuring settings refer to Low Power Timer on page 9 24 X NOTE When a preset time of Low Power Timer and Sleep Timer is same Sleep overrides Low Power Mode 2 22 Preparation before Use gt Energy Saver function Sleep and Auto Sleep Sleep Power Q To enter Sleep press the Power key Touch panel and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to save a maximum amount of power except the Main Power indicator This status is referred to as Sleep Vie If print data is received during Sleep the touch panel lights up and printing starts When using the optional fax received data is printed out while the operation panel remains unlit To resume press the Power key The machine will be ready to use within 20 seconds Note that ambient environmental conditions such as ventilation may cause the machine to respond more slowly Auto Sleep Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into Sleep if left idle for a preset time The default preset time is 1 minute For more information about configuring settings refer to Sleep Timer on page 9 25 X NOTE When a preset time of Low Power Timer and Sleep Timer is same Sleep overrides Low Power Mode Energy Saver This mode reduces power consumption even more than
61. SMTP settings on the Command Center RX 10 23 Troubleshooting gt Responding to Messages Failed to send the e mail Corrective Actions Check the authentication methods of both the sender and the recipient Failed to send via FTP Check the network e The network cable is connected e The hub is not operating properly e The server is not operating properly Reference Page Failed to send the e mail Check the SMTP user authentication method of the recipient Turn the main power switch off and back on If this error occurs several times make a note of the displayed error code and contact your service representative The scanned original exceeds the acceptable number of pages of 999 Send the excess pages separately 10 24 Troubleshooting gt Clearing Paper Jams Clearing Paper Jams If a paper jam occurs the touch panel will display Paper Jam and the machine will stop Refer to these procedures to remove the jammed paper How to read the screen i 10 10 Paper jam Clear the paper jammed in se cassette 1 Displays the processing i a Displays the current je Press Next gt to follow method i the instructions step j JAM 0501 a E a Returns to the Advances to the next previous step step Jam Location Indicators Detailed paper jam positions are as follows Refer to the indicated page number to remove the paper jam Paper Jam
62. Saver 3 26 settings Language Select the language displayed on the touch panel 9 5 Report Print reports to check the machine settings and status Default settings 9 5 for printing the result reports can also be configured Counter This counts the number of pages printed or scanned 3 11 User Property Allows you to view information about logged in users and edit some of 9 7 that information Cassette MP Tray Settings Select paper size and media type for Cassette 1 to 3 and multi purpose 9 8 tray Common Settings Configures overall machine operation 9 9 Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start up default screen 9 9 Sound Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations 9 9 Original Settings Configures settings for originals 9 9 Paper Settings Configures settings for paper 9 10 Function Defaults Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm up is completed 9 12 or the Reset key is pressed Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending Setting the frequently used values as defaults makes subsequent jobs easier Q IMPORTANT If you want to enable the changed defaults immediately move to the function screen and press the Reset key Paper Output Select output tray respectively for copy jobs print jobs from Custom 9 13 Box computers and FAX RX data Preset Limit Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time 9 13 Error Handling Select whether to cancel o
63. System Menu Media Type Setting Select the media type you wish to change Y Available N Not available Light Normal 1 Normal2 Normal 3 Weight g m 45 g m to 59 g m 60 g m to 74 g m 75 g m to 90 g m 91 g m to 105 g m Heavy 1 106 g m to 128 g m 129 g m to 163 g m 164 g m to 256 g m Transpar encies Plain Y Y Y default Y N N N N Transparency N N N N Y Y ve Y default Rough Y Y Y default Y Y Y N Vellum Y default Y Y N N N N Labels y 3 y Y default Y Y Recycled Y default N Preprinted Y default N Bond Y default Y Cardstock N Y default Color Y default N Prepunched Y default N Letterhead Y default N Envelope N Y default Thick N Y default lt z 2 lt lt lt 2 lt lt lt x lt z z lt lt lt z lt lt lt x High Quality Y default N lt lt Z zZ lt lt lt z lt lt lt Custom 1 8 lt lt Y default The media type cannot be selected for the cassettes Y For Custom 1 8 settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed Custom 1 8 Select the setting for duplex Value Prohibit Permit Description 9 11 Change names for Custom 1 8 Names should be not more than 16 charact
64. a ar r A Pause All Print Jobs Select the consumable you wish to check Staple OK GB0052_03 2 Check the status Toner Status Black E 100 Waste Toner 0 4 rr D OS i 10 10 ee End GB0192_00 e You can check the remaining amount of toner as one of 11 levels from 100 to 0 and check the status of waste toner box Paper Status 10 10 4 a4 Ptan lE 100 Plain Plain i a Plain GB0193_00 The remaining amount of paper is shown by four levels as 100 70 30 and 0 none however the paper in the multi purpose tray is shown by two levels as 100 and 0 If there is no paper in either cassette the paper status will be shown as No Paper 8 13 Status Job Cancel gt Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper Staple Status 10 10 Status Job Cancel GB0195_00 You can check the status of staples 8 14 9 setup Registration and User Management This chapter explains the following topics SY NOTU enaena E E E E 9 2 Operauon Menon seseg ei e nEn E ENEP EEEE EEEE EEEE E EEE a 9 2 System Menu SetliNnNgS ictwsacnwesrindsanceddensinasnandaasanumadensaawed vxtaiaaion vied pandaaunpsuaneewchstuaueastsuasecdeaetapaudansundadacoune 9 3 KODON orrea eects ier cis hg psteieis ct nse gone eee E teases da neue ancien secon seule sens peeeaeasaesoeeeccesere 9 5 WISOE PODON osasia E E E E E E EEE 9 7 Cassette MP Tray Settings jececctinces
65. and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations 1 Remove the old toner container 1 10 2 Troubleshooting gt Toner Container Replacement 2 Prepare the new toner container 1 3 Install the new toner container 10 3 Troubleshooting gt Waste Toner Box Replacement Waste Toner Box Replacement When the touch panel displays Check waste toner box replace the waste toner box 1 Remove the old waste toner box 10 4 Troubleshooting gt Replacing Staples Replacing Staples If a message displays indicating that staples have run out the staple cartridge holder need to be replenished with Staples NOTE If the Staple Unit runs out of staples contact your service representative or the place of purchase After the cartridge holder returned to the original position open the staple cover and remove the cartridge holder 2 Remove the empty staple cartridge NOTE The staple cartridge can only be removed when it contains no more staples 3 Insert the new staple cartridge The staple cartridge holder will click into place when it has been inserted correctly 10 5 Troubleshooting gt Cleaning Cleaning Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum output quality A Caution For safety always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine Original Cover Glass Platen Wipe the original holder inside of the document p
66. character code OAH Value LF Only LF and CR Ignore LF CR Action Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code character code ODH Value CR Only LF and CR Ignore CR Job Name Set whether the job name set in the printer driver is displayed Value Off On User Name Set whether the user name set in the printer driver is displayed Value Off On Paper Feed Mode While printing from the computer select how to feed paper when the paper source and type are specified Value Auto Search the paper source that matches the selected paper size and type Fixed Print on paper loaded in the specified paper source Resolution Set the resolution used for printing Value 600 dpi Fast1200 The machine is equipped with the smoothing function which realizes an excellent output resolution of about 2400 dpi x 600 dpi Value Off On Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu System Configures machine system settings Network Configures network settings Host Name Item Description Host Name Check the host name of the machine TCP IP Description TCP IP Set up TCP IP to connect to the Windows network Value Off On IPv4 Settings Set up TCP IP IPv4 to connect to the network The IPv4 setting is available when selecting On for TCP IP DHCP Select whether or not to use the DHCP IPv4 server Value Off
67. create a gap and feed air between the papers 4 Finally align the papers on a level flat table If the paper is curled or folded straighten it before loading Paper that is curled or folded may Cause a jam Q IMPORTANT If you copy onto used paper paper already used for copying do not use paper that is stapled or clipped together This may damage the machine or cause poor image quality NOTE If printouts are curled or not neatly stapled turn the stack in the cassette upside down If you use special paper such as letterhead paper with holes or paper with pre prints like logo or company name refer to Paper on page 11 10 Avoid exposing opened paper to high temperatures and high humidity as dampness can be a cause of problems Seal any remaining paper after loading in the multi purpose tray or cassettes back in the paper storage bag If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag 3 2 Common Operations gt Loading Paper Loading Paper in the Cassettes The standard cassette will each hold plain paper recycled paper or color paper The standard cassette holds up to 500 sheets of plain paper 80 g m7 The following paper sizes are supported Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement R Oficio Il A3 B4 A4 A4 R A5 R B5 B5 R Folio 216 x 340 mm 8K 16K R and 16K NOTE You should not use inkjet p
68. exposed adhesive In addition do not use the type of envelope in which the adhesive is exposed after the top layer is peeled off Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive comes off in the machine e Do not use envelopes with certain special features For example do not use envelopes with a grommet for winding a string to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film covered window e If paper jams occur load fewer envelopes at once Thick Paper Before loading thick paper in the multi purpose tray fan it and align the edges Some thick paper may still have rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki by placing the paper on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler Printing onto paper with rough edges may cause jams NOTE If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed load the paper in the multi purpose tray with the leading edge raised a few millimeters Colored Paper Colored paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 11 11 In addition the pigments in the paper must be able to withstand the heat of printing up to 200 C or 392 F Preprinted Paper Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 17 17 The colored ink must be able to withstand the heat of printing It must be resistant to silicone oil as well Do not use paper with a treated surface such as glos
69. hours e Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat sunlight or dampness Other Paper Specifications Porosity The density of the paper fibers Stiffness Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine causing jams Curl Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened When paper passes through the fixing unit it curls upward slightly To deliver flat printouts load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the paper tray Static electricity During printing paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner adheres Choose paper that can be discharged quickly so that copies do not cling together Whiteness Paper whiteness affects print contrast Use whiter paper for sharper brighter copies Quality Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not Square edges are rough sheets are uncut or edges or corners are crushed In order to prevent these problems be especially careful when you cut the paper yourself Packaging Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in boxes Ideally the packaging itself should have been treated with a coating to inhibit moisture Specially treated paper We do not recommend printing onto the following types of paper even if it conforms to the basic specifications When you use these kinds of paper purchase a small amount first as a sample to test e Glossy paper e Watermarked paper e Paper with an uneven surf
70. i Copies 1 i _ Paper 7 Collate Duplex Selection Offset bs A4 D Collate 1 sided Select the function 10 10 GB0097_00 Cancel e e GB0102_00 Ready to print from Box 10 10 mp encypted PDF Password JPEG TIFF Print lagi Paper Size F XPS Fit to P A it to Page oe Add Edi Shortcut Use VV or AN to scroll up and down GBO0099_01 Document Box gt Functions for Document Box Storing Size Select size of image to be stored Same as Original Size Store an image the same size as the original Metric Select from A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 B6 Folio or 216 x 340 mm Select from Ledger Letter Legal Statement 11 x 15 or Oficio II Select from 8K 16K Hagaki or Oufukuhagaki Relationship between Original Size Storing Size and Zoom Original Size page 3 32 Storing Size and Zoom page 3 57 are related to each other Refer to the following table Original Size and the size you wish to the same different store as are Original Size Specify as necessary Specify as necessary Storing Size Select Same as Original Select the required size Zoom Select 100 or Auto Select Auto NOTE When you select Storing Size that is different from Original Size and select the Zoom 100 you can store the image as the actual size No Zoom 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB on page 7 6 displa
71. is suggested that the room be properly ventilated Precautions for Use Cautions when handling consumables A CAUTION Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner Dangerous sparks may cause burns Keep parts which contain toner out of the reach of children If toner happens to spill from parts which contain toner avoid inhalation and ingestion as well as contact with your eyes and skin e If you do happen to inhale toner move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of water If coughing develops contact a physician e lf you do happen to ingest toner rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the contents of your stomach If necessary contact a physician e lf you do happen to get toner in your eyes flush them thoroughly with water If there is any remaining tenderness contact a physician e If toner does happen to get on your skin wash with soap and water Do not attempt to force open or destroy parts which contain toner Other precautions Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative The collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40 C while avoiding sharp changes of temperature and humidity If the
72. job is printed Display Error Message to cancel printing is displayed No Staple Error Select what to do when staples run out during printing Value Ignore Printing continues without stapling Display Error Message to cancel printing is displayed NOTE This function requires the optional document finisher Stapling Limit Error Select what to do when stapling capacity is exceeded during printing Value Ignore Printing continues without stapling Display Error Message to cancel printing is displayed NOTE This function requires the optional document finisher Paper Mismatch Error Select what to do when the selected paper size or type does not match paper size or type loaded in the specified paper source while printing from the computer by specifying the cassette or multi purpose tray Value Ignore The setting is ignored and the job is printed Display Error Message to cancel printing is displayed Inserted Paper Mismatch Select what to do when the paper size set for the paper source does not match the paper size that was actually loaded Value Ignore The setting is ignored and the job is printed Display Error Message to cancel printing is displayed Measurement Item Description Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions Value mm inch Keyboard Layout Item Description Keyboard Layout Change the layout of the touch panel keyboard used to enter characters Valu
73. lt gt System Menu Counter Configure the function 10 10 System AN Date Timer Displays available Scrolls up and down functions when the list of values cannot be displayed in its entirety on a single screen Adjustment Maintenance System Menu Counter Date Time 10 10 2012 10 10 Date Format DD MM YY 1 4 GB0054_04 Displays available Time Zone a functions rs Return to the previous screen 10 10 Selecting a value it to be 12 00 International Date Line West accepted 11 00 Samoa gt 1 24 11 00 Universal Coordinated Time 11 Returns to the original ise i z 10 00 H ii screen without making kA Accepts the settings NOTE In order to change settings that require administer privileges you must log in with administrator privileges The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below Enter login user name and password 10 10 Login User Name oe Mode Name Login Login User Name Password Login Password eee FS 6525MFP FS 6530MFP L GB0723_00 Refer to System Menu Settings on the following page and configure as needed Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu System Menu Settings System Menu include Item Description Reference Page Quick Setup Wizard The Quick Setup Wizard configures Fax Network and Energy
74. machine will not be used for an extended period of time remove the paper from the cassette and the Multi Purpose MP Tray return it to its original package and reseal it 1 3 Preface gt Notice Laser Safety Europe Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body For this reason laser radiation emitted inside this machine is hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover In the normal operation of the product by user no radiation can leak from the machine This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC EN 60825 1 2007 Caution Performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure These labels are attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine and are not in a user access area DANGER ATTENTION VORSICHT ATTENZIONE PRECAUCION VARO QS lt CLASS 3B 74 Olas AA CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM e CLASE 3B RAYONNEMENT LASER EN CAS D OUVERTURE EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU KLASSE 3B LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNE NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN e CLASSE 3B RADIAZIONE LASER IN CASO DI APERTURA EVITARE L ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO CLASSE 3B RADIACIONE LASER CUANDO SE ABRE EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYO AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA LUOKAN 3B LASERSATEILYLLE ALA KATSO SATEESEEN Zr mABRAt om HARATA AHA oR ABH EmA BA Em JAHAT AXE RAE FE R EG
75. on Left 1 1 d GB0033_01 NOTE Original Orientation is not displayed when printing a document from USB memory 3 50 GB0034_00 GB0015_02 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Density Adjust density using 7 levels xx lt 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen Copy Scan to USB Ready to copy 10 10 Ready to store in Box 10 10 ae a a Paper BE Density Tey file L 2 sided al Scan Selection ae L Format _ Book Resolution Auto Normal 0 PDF 1 sided 300x300dpi m 7 a Foon a Br Duplex Combine Collate al Density File Name L AES L Offset EnA 1 sided gt gt 1 sided Off Collate Normal 0 oO oO oO S a a 0 Send Ready to send i 10 10 Ready to send 10 10 end ooo m m atl Dest 0 i Check Density Recall og Normal 0 AN Color Selection Full Color One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book y Original aE oe I A T Sharpness L p coat Trae a IM i od Favorites Close Add Edit Shortcut GB0081_02 GB0055_00 Use VV or AN to scroll up and down 2 Adjust density Ready to copy Normal i Press 3 to 3 Lighter Darker to adjust density GB0008_00 3 51 Common Operations gt Using Various Funct
76. paper do not peel these margins from the carrier sheet before completing output Allowed Not allowed Top sheet Carrier sheet Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications Top sheet weight 44 to 74 g m Basis weight overall paper weight 104 to 151 g m Top sheet thickness 0 086 to 0 107 mm Overall paper thickness 0 115 to 0 160 mm Moisture content 4 to 6 composite 11 15 Appendix gt Paper Hagaki Before loading Hagaki into the multi purpose tray fan them and align the edges If the Hagaki paper is curled straighten it before loading Printing onto curled Hagaki may cause jams Use unfolded Oufukuhagaki available at post offices Some Hagaki may still have rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side Remove any such rough edges by placing the Hagaki on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler Envelopes Use the multi purpose tray for envelopes Due to the structure of envelopes printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases Thin envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through Before purchasing envelopes in volume try testing a sample to ensure the print quality Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled Thus keep the package sealed until you are ready to use them Keep the following points in mind e Do not use envelopes with
77. quality Text Photo original 1 sided B W 40 Images min Color 20 Images min Network Protocol TCP IP Transmission System PC transmission SMB Scan to SMB FTP Scan to FTP FTP over SSL E mail SMTP Scan to E mail transmission TWAIN scan WIA scan When using the document processor except TWAIN and WIA scanning Available Operating System Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 Available Operating System Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 11 20 Appendix gt Specifications Document Processor Original Feed Method Description Automatic feed Supported Original Types Sheet originals Paper Size Maximum Ledger A3 Minimum Statement R A5 R Paper Weight 45 to 160 g m duplex 50 to 120 g m Loading Capacity 50 sheets 50 to 80 g m maximum Mixed original sizes auto selection 30 sheets 50 to 80 g m maximum Dimensions W x D x H 23 1 4x19 1 4x4 7 8 590x489x123 mm Weight Approx 15 4 Ib or less Approx 7 kg or less Paper Feeder single cassette option Paper Supply Method Description Friction Feed No Sheets 500 80 g m 1 cassette Paper Size Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement R Oficio Il A3 A4 R A4 A5 R B4 B5 R B5 Folio 216 x 340 mm 8K 16K R 16K Supported Paper Paper weight 45 163 g m Media types
78. screen 10 10 mm Dest 0 i Check S 2 Recall gs p gt One Touch Key Ext Address Book GB0055_00 een E E mail 10 10 Address Book All KI q BH 001 B Sales department 1 123456 C 1 al 001 Support department 123 456789 co G 1 1 _ 5001 c 12345 com uw 1001 w Support department 11111 com 3 a Ea Cancel lt fae E GB0426_01 2 Adds a new destination D E 10 10 Sort No Use V or AN to scroll up and down Add Edit GB0396_01 3 Select the registration method 10 10 1 1 GB0419_01 e Sending gt Registering Destinations in the Address Book 4 Enter the group name Input 18 Limit 32 Support department _ z x clv a N M Up to 32 characters can be entered GB0057_16 Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters N 5 Select the members destinations 1 Display the screen Select the item that you want to change 10 10 E N Name Support department Member Member 0 1 1 1 41 Address Number Auto m fae GB0420_02 e Menu 2 Press the checkbox to select the desired destination from the list The selected destinations are indicated by a checkmark in the check box 10 10 Address Book All IYK V 001 idm Sales departrient 1 0123456 t GB0114_03 Searches by destination name Advanced search by type of regist
79. set the default screen displayed when you press the Send key Value Destination Address Book Ext Address Book One Touch Favorites Application Configure settings for Favorites Application Item Default Screen Description Use this procedure to set the default screen displayed when you press the Favorites Application key Value Favorites Application Application 1 5 applications being used Application You can install activate deactivate and delete applications A list of installed applications is shown You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing Detail You can install new applications You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing Detail a To install the applications insert the USB memory containing the application to be installed into the USB Port If Removable Memory is recognized Displaying files appears press No To remove the USB memory press Remove Memory and wait until the Removable Memory can be safely removed message appears Then remove the USB memory Activate Deactivate Activates the application selected on the list Official The application can be used without a time limit Entry of the license key may be necessary Trial The application can be used on a trial basis for a limited period of time Deactivates the application selected on the list Print Report Prints information on the in
80. subject automatically entered when sending log histories by E mail 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Sending the Log History on page 8 7 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 Send Log History Auto Sending Off Destination E mail abc def com Job Log Subject GB0578_01 2 Enter an E mail subject Input 8 E 1 Limit 60 GB0057_23 Up to 60 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters N Status Job Cancel gt Check of Device Status Check of Device Status Configure the devices lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status You can also control devices depending on their status 1 Display the screen 10 10 Status St Job Ca ncel f Job Log AN Send Job Log gt 2 4 Bistore Job Log and down Print Jobs Status Job Cancel 10 10 fore Running FAX Waiting 2 OK Pee Status No Paper N Pause All Print Jobs Status Job Cancel 10 10 1 GB0052_01 gt Toner Status GB0052_02 USB Keyboard 2 Invalid Staple OK Pause All Print Jobs Select the device you wish to check GB0052_03 2 Check the status Scanner Status Job Cancel 10 10 GB0189_00 The status of an original scanning in the document processor or the error information paper jam opened cover etc is displayed
81. that indicate the job type Storing Job Scan Storing Job Printer B Storing Job FAX Cancel Select the job you want to cancel from the list and press this key Press for the job for which you wish to display detailed information Status of job Storing Data oO Pausing the job or error Canceling the job F The status before starting to save such as during scanning originals Close Closes the Store Job Status screen Scheduled Job screen Status Job Cancel 10 10 0014 1233 GB0185_00 Display Key Details Icons that indicate the job type B Sending Job FAX Menu Pressing this key displays Start Now Select the job you wish to send immediately and then press Menu followed by Start Now Cancel Select the job you want to cancel from the list and press this key Press for the job for which you wish to display detailed information Status of job Sending Waiting Close Closes the Scheduled Job screen Status Job Cancel gt Checking Job History Checking Job History Check the history of completed jobs Available Job History Screens The job histories are displayed separately in three screens Printing Jobs Sending Jobs and Storing Jobs The following job histories are available Print Job Log Copy Send Job Log FAX Printer Folder SMB FTP FAX reception E mail E mail reception Application Prin
82. the multi purpose tray check that there is no paper left over in the tray from a previous job before loading the paper If there is just a small amount of paper left over in the multi purpose tray and you want to add more first remove the left over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before loading the paper back into the tray When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multi purpose tray Close the flap Cardstock Return postcard Hagaki Portrait form Landscape form Oufuku Hagaki envelopes envelopes Open the flap Load envelope with the print side facing down Q IMPORTANT Use unfolded return postcard Oufukuhagaki How to load envelopes orientation and facing will differ depending on the type of envelope Be sure to load it in correctly otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face 3 6 Common Operations gt Loading Originals Loading Originals Placing Originals on the Platen You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals NOTE Before opening the document processor be sure that there are no originals left on the original table or on the original eject table Originals left on the original table or on the original eject table may fall off when the document processor is opened Shadows may be produced around the edges and in the middle of open faced originals Align it flush against the Origina
83. the optional interface slots OPT1 or OPT2 Optional Interface 2 Value Unblock Block After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON RAM Disk Setting Description RAM Disk Setting A RAM disk can be created and its size can be set Creating a RAM disk makes it possible to print from a Job Box Value RAM Disk Setting Off On RAM Disk Size The setting range varies depending on the amount of memory installed and the option memory usage setting After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON 9 23 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Optional Memory Description Optional Memory When optional memory is installed select the memory allocation scheme based on the application in which you are using the equipment Value Printer Priority Normal Copy Priority After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON Date Timer Configures settings related to the date and time Description Date Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine If you perform Send as E mail the date and time set here will be displayed on the header Value Year 2000 to 2037 Month 1 to 12 Day 1 to 31 Hour 00 to 23 Minute 00 to 59 Second 00 to 59 Date Format Select the display format of year month and date The year is displayed in Western not
84. to SMB Name Vescnption optional Enter Scan to SMB in Name and click Finish In Windows XP or Windows Vista 1 From the Start menu select Control Panel System and Security or Security Center and then Check Firewall Status or Windows Firewall If the User Account Control dialog box appears click the Continue button 2 Click the Exceptions tab and then the Add port button 3 Specify Add a Port settings Enter any name in Name example Scan to SMB This will be the name of the new port Enter 139 in Port Number Select TCP for Protocol 4 Click the OK button to close the Add a Port dialog box 6 13 sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC Register the shared folder in the address book 1 Display the screen 10 10 al Dest z 0 la Check S n 2 Recall gt One Touch Key Ext Address Book III 1 oe e E mail GB0055_00 om 10 10 Address Book All HH 001 BB Sales department 1 123456 _ 001 Support department 123 456789 co 1 1 _ 5001 c 12345 com 1001 Support department 11111 com si _L_ iz a GB0426_01 2 Adds a new destination E eale Sort No Use V or AN to scroll up and down Add Edit GB0396_01 3 Select the registration method 10 10 Contact Group gt 1 1 5 gi 3 4 Enter the destination name Sales department 1 Input 18 p
85. tray Press Paper Selection to select the other paper source Press Continue to print on the paper in the currently selected paper source Does the paper size set for the Press Continue to continue printing paper source matches the paper Press Cancel to cancel the job size that was actually loaded When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses B Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Box limit exceeded Is End displayed on the touch Document box is full and no further panel storage is available Job is canceled Press End Try to perform the job again after printing or deleting data from the Document Box When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses C Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Cannot connect to Authentication Set machine time to match the server s Server time Check the domain name Check the host name Check the connection status with the server 10 13 Troubleshooting gt Responding to Messages Message Cannot duplex print on the following paper Checkpoints Did you select a paper size media type that cannot be duplex printed Corrective Actions Press Paper Selection to select the available paper Press Continue to print without using Duplex
86. you can set the margin width and the back page margin Print from USB gt Margin Width Input units Margin Width Inch Models 0 75 to 0 75 in 0 01 increments Metric Models 18 mm to 18 mm in 1 mm increments Margin on the Back Side When duplex copying you can also specify the margin on the back side Auto When Auto is selected an appropriate margin is applied automatically on the rear page depending on a margin specified for the front page and a binding orientation Manual Enables you to specify the front and back settings separately NOTE You can set the default margin width Refer to Margin on page 9 12 for details 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Margin Ready to copy 10 10 Ready to copy 10 10 Copies 1 m aj Prevent Bleed through 2 _ Paper Zoom all Density Selection emi Auto 100 Normal 0 M ee i ee Continuous Scan Dupl rs Combine ees COllate we Fa 2233 Offset 2 Auto Image Rotation 1 sided gt 1 sided Off Collate lt GB0001_01 ner Close Add Edit Shortcu GB0002_02 Use VV or AN to scroll up and down 3 46 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions 2 Enter the margin width Ready to copy 10 10 4 S E z 0 Ready to copy 10 10 Ready to copy 1
87. 0 Destination Address Book Ext Address Book One Touch Q oO l Cancel lt Back a O Shortcut System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 Shared Shortcut cm Private Shortcut Language English 2 Default Screen Copy Shortcut Shared Shortcut 1 1 4 Cancel GB0749_00 GB0750_00 Displays details for individual shortcuts 9 37 Setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Editing and Deleting Users User properties can be changed and users can be deleted 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 29 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 User Login Lacal Authenticatian Simple login settings Local User Authorization GB0435_00 2 Edit or delete a user To edit a user 1 Press for the user whose settings you wish to edit 10 10 Q i Searches by user name a am S DeviceAdmin 2500 User A User A GB0440_01 Menu 2 Edit the user For more information about individual settings refer to Adding a User on page 9 32 N User Name System Menu Counter 10 10 2 Input 6 1 Limit 32 a Login User Name Login Password ORK KK Account Name Others l GB0441_00 GB0057_54 Login User Name 10 10 Input 6 2 Limit 64 User Name User af Login User Name User A 1 2 Login Password EEK KKK
88. 0 Sending Job E mail 00 20 Job Type Multi Sending 1 2 Number o1 Admin 1 S SE 3 18 GB0780_00 GB0057_82 GB0760_01 Common Operations gt Favorites Permission 10 10 Permission OK m l Configures permission settings for favorites to determine how they are shared with other users GB0781_02 GB0305_01 t 3 Register the favorite DP 10 10 Name Sending Job E mail Job Type Multi Sending Number 01 GB0781_00 10 10 01 i Sending Job E mail Ee ID Card Copy 16 Paper Saving Copy es EI gt Cancel Delete GB0779_00 GB0782_00 Select the favorite you wish to delete Common Operations gt Favorites Using Favorites Call up settings from a favorite 1 Display the screen Favorites Application BN 2 Select a favorite 10 10 p ID Card Copy Paper Saving Copy Scan to PC Address Entry a bea r v B u B u m Scan to PC Scan to E mail Scan to E mail Address Book Address Entry Address Book Menu Application When using the wizard mode 1 The registered screens are displayed in order Make the desired settings GB0056_00 Set Combine 10 10 3 oO Vii n _ gt D 0 gt LA 7 Adjust the density 10 10 foe 2 in 1 ZOHOly i S Lighter Normal Darker Input 0 Limit 128 i Ot
89. 0 Network Interface 2 4 2 9 O One Touch Key 6 36 Adding a Destination 6 36 Editing and Deleting 6 38 Open SSL License 1 10 Operation Panel 2 2 2 6 Option Card Authentication Kit 11 4 Document Finisher 11 3 Expansion Memory 11 3 FAX Kit 11 3 Gigabit Ethernet Board 11 5 Overview 11 2 Paper Feeder double cassette 11 3 Paper Feeder single cassette 11 3 Optional Function 11 5 Optional Memory 9 24 Option Interface 2 4 Original Cover 2 2 Original Image 3 53 Original Loaded Indicator 2 3 Original Orientation 3 34 Originals Custom Original Size 9 9 Loading Originals 3 7 Original Auto Detect 9 9 Original Size 3 32 Original Size 3 32 Original Size Indicator Plates 2 2 Original SSLeay License 1 10 Original Table 2 3 Original Width Guides 2 3 P Paper Appropriate Paper 11 11 Before Loading 3 2 Cassette 9 8 Checking the Remaining Amount of Paper 8 13 Custom Paper Size 9 10 Default Paper Source 9 10 Loading Envelopes 3 6 Loading in the Cassettes 3 3 Loading in the Multi Purpose Tray 3 5 Media for Auto 9 10 Media Type Setting 9 10 Multi Purpose Tray 9 8 Setup 9 10 Size and Media 9 8 Special Paper 11 14 Special Paper Action 9 10 Specifications 11 11 Paper Feeder double cassette 11 3 Paper Feeder single cassette 11 3 Paper Feed Mode 9 18 Paper Length Guide 2 3 Paper Output 3 43 9 13 Paper Selection 3 42 Paper Width Guide 2 3 Part Names 2 2 PDF A 11 25 Platen 2 2 POP3 11 25 POP3 E mail RX Protocol Detail 9 21 Po
90. 0 10 Margin Left 6mm Back rage Same as Front Page Original Orientation Top Edge on Top e Press the text box and use to enter a value GB0039_00 a a d 3 Specify the margin on the back side Ready to copy 10 10 Margin Left 6mm Back Page Same as Front Page Original Orientation Top Edge on Top 1 1 GB0039_00 NOTE Original Orientation is not displayed when printing a document from USB memory Auto Manual gt 10 10 GB0041_00 3 47 GB0040_00 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Manual 10 10 1 1 i L e Press the text box and use to enter a value GB0041_00 Select the original orientation 10 10 Margin Left 6mm Safne as Front Paqe 1 1 Original Orientation Top Edge on Top GB0039_00 NOTE Original Orientation is not displayed when printing a document from USB memory 3 48 Ready to copy L R 18 18 T T B 18 18 10 10 a Q mm eae Ready to copy OK e 10 10 A Top Edge on Top a Top Edge on Left GB0042_00 GB0015_01 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Staple Print from USB Staple documents In addition you can specify the staple position NOTE Stapling requires the document finisher The following stapling options and orientations are available Cassette P
91. 02 sending gt Specifying Destination Specifying Destination Select the destination to which to send an image Select the destination using either of the following methods e Choosing from the Address Book page 6 77 e Choosing by One Touch Key page 6 79 e Entering a New E mail Address page 6 20 e Specifying a New PC Folder page 6 27 NOTE When the optional fax kit has been installed you can specify the fax destination Enter the other party s number using the numeric keypad Choosing from the Address Book Select a destination registered in the Address Book NOTE For more information about how to register destinations in the Address Book refer to Registering Destinations in the Address Book on page 6 27 For details on the External Address Book refer to Command Center RX User Guide 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6 2 display the screen 2 10 10 Dest 0 Recall Check bo One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book Of _ v E mail Folder FAX _ _ ee GB0055_00 2 Select the destination 10 10 Address Book All IYE Sales department 1 123456 Use YV or A to scroll up and down 1 1 fod Support department 123 456789 co am fo 3 Sales department 1 12345 com ca Jodi L Support department 11111 com OK G GB0426_00 Press the checkbox to select the desired d
92. 10 10 10 10 Copies 1 Ero Say a ny Original Image _ Paper Zoom HE Density ai Text Photo lt Selection sa EcoPrint Auto 100 Normal 0 L a a E Gre gt ja Sharpness ie Duplex Combine ern COllate 4 m Offset Background Density Adj GBO0001_01 GB0002_01 Close Add Edi Shortcut Use V or AN to scroll up and down Preface gt About this Operation Guide Originals and Paper Sizes This section explains the notation used in this guide when referring to sizes of originals or paper sizes As with A4 B5 and Letter which may be used either in the horizontal or vertical direction horizontal direction is indicated by an additional letter R in order to indicate the orientation of the original paper Placement direction Indicated size Vertical A4 B5 Ad Letter direction Statement Original For the originals paper dimension Y is longer than X Horizontal X A4 R B5 R A5 R direction Letter R Statement R Original For the originals paper dimension Y is shorter than X The size of the original paper that can be used depends on the function and source tray For further details refer to the page detailing that function or source tray Icons on the Touch Panel The following icons are used to indicate originals and paper placement directions on the touch panel Placement Originals direction Vertical direction
93. 1_ 01 GB0002_00 Use V or AN to scroll up and down 2 Select the function Ready to copy 10 10 TN Top Edge on Top Top Edge on Left GB0036_00 o d Select the original orientation 3 34 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Mixed Size Originals send USB scans all sheets in the document processor even if they are of different sizes Supported Combinations of Originals e B4 and B5 B5 e Ledger and Letter R A4R Letter R NOTE When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination Folio and A4 R make sure to set Original Auto Detect to On for Folio For more information refer to Original Auto Detect on page 9 9 Up to 30 sheets can be placed in the document processor for mixed size originals 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Mixed Size Originals 10 10 10 10 Copies 2 7 7 ax A nA ld E E m ie l Size X Auto _ Paper Zoom m Density M Selection Auto 100 Normal 0 Top Edae on Top M a G A r Duplex Combine er COllate A1 ua Offset 1 sided gt 1 sided Off Collate Inner tray GB0001_01 GB0002_00 Shortcut Use V or AN to scroll up and down 3 35 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions 2 Select the function 10
94. 2 Cee Ji coors o _ cancel Apply _ In Windows XP select Share this folder and click the Permissions button 2 Click the Add button G Permissions for scannerdata Share Permissions Group or user names Ee ome sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC 3 ws Select Users or Groups Select this object type roups or Built in secunty pinci Enter the user name that you made a note of on page 6 5 in the text box and click the OK button 4 Permissions for scannerdata Share Permissions Group or user names ka E JAarUANE 4 PCOO1 PCO01 james smith Add Remove Pemissions for james smith Allow Deny E 74 Change v Read v Leam about access control and pemissions 1 If the computer name that you made a note of on page 6 5 is the same as the domain name If the computer name is not shown in From this location click the Locations button select the computer name and click the OK button Example PC001 If the computer name that you made a note of on page 6 5 is not the same as the domain name If the text after the first dot in the full computer name that you made a note of does not appear in From this location click the Locations button select the text after the dot and click the OK button Exa
95. 22 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Item Description SMTP Security Select the communication protocol according to the type of security employed by the SMTP server This setup is available when SSL is On Value Off SSL TLS STARTTLS POP3 Security User 1 Select the communication protocol according to the type of security employed by the POP3 i server This setup is available when POP3 is On POP3 Security User 2 Value Off SSL TLS STARTTLS POP3 Security User 3 After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON LDAP must be set to On in Protocol Detail on page 9 21 LAN Interface Item Description LAN Interface Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used Value Auto 10Base Half 10Base Full 100Base Half 100Base Full 1000BASE T After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON Interface Block Setting This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or optional interfaces Description USB Host This locks and protects the USB memory slot A1 or USB port A2 USB host Value Unblock Block USB Device This locks and protects the USB interface connector B1 USB Device Value Unblock Block USB Storage This locks and protects the USB memory slot A1 Value Unblock Block Optional Interface 1 This locks and protects
96. 3 dots grouped together in patterns and not aligned uniformly Texts are not clearly printed Did you choose appropriate image Select appropriate image quality 3 53 quality for the original Black or color dots appear on Is the original holder or the glass Clean the original holder or the glass 10 6 the white background when platen dirty platen white original is scanned Printouts are fuzzy Is the machine being used in Use in an environment that has 1 3 conditions of very humid or humidity suitable humidity or temperature rapidly changes If you experience frequent problems 2 4 turn the cassette heater switch on Run Drum Refresh 1 9 27 Images are skewed Are the originals placed correctly When placing originals on the platen 3 align them with the original size indicator plates ABC When placing originals in the 3 8 document processor align the original 199 width guides securely before placing the originals Is the paper loaded correctly Check the position of the paper width 3 2 guides 10 9 Perform center line adjustment For more information about how to do so contact your service representative Troubleshooting gt Solving Malfunctions Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Paper often jams Is the paper loaded correctly Load the paper correctly 3 2 Turn the orientation 180 degrees 1 16 around in which the paper is 3 3 pos
97. 4 3555 http www kyoceradocumentsolutions com X KYOCERA KSUCERd First Edition 2012 04 2MWKMENOOO
98. 5 SAUS JOD CANCE ranae aa 8 1 Checking JOD bc 0 8 ae ee ee eee eee ee ee 8 2 Details of the Status Screens ccc eccccccseccseecececeneceueecaueceeeceecsaeecaueceuecseessaeessessnans 8 3 OGhecking JOD FHISTOTY Sane ne ee ne Ree ne eee Pee eee ee 8 6 Sending the Log History eee ee ene eee ee eee eee ere eee eee ee eee eee 8 7 Setting the Destination 2 0 0 ccc ecccecccsscceseceeeeceeecaceceuecaueesaeeceeceueceuseseeeseeesenesaaeeseeess 8 8 Automatic Log History Transmission cccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeaeeses 8 9 Manual Log History Transmission cccccccsecceeeceeeceeeeeeneeeneeseeseeeeeeseeeseeeaeeaeeeneneaes 8 9 Setting E mail Subject ps ccctsectacenndecddcersctedetacensatecieanndesvenine dadeeeeuedvasdstancedsedsaenoehcusceed 8 10 Check of Device Status 2 0 0 0 ccc ccccccseccseeeceeeceeeceuecececeueceueceueeeeeseesaeeesaeesaeeseeeseeeeseeesaeeses 8 11 Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper cccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesaeeeas 8 13 Setup Registration and User Management ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 1 SECA aa Innes nee ee ee ee er ene ee eee ee ee 9 2 Operation Method sradercetiecseccemguantsseniccisneriecateescuasemarsinctsannct e E sanndieise aa a oE ii 9 2 System Men SENGS serrirostris EE E T aaea da 9 3 HMMS soe xo dante eS wave E EEE A E Semmes E A E tact 9 5 RODO sccnetainceaoherquatabns E E E E A ES 9 5 RISE ETOO sorae Ee E E E E E EA E
99. 57_E11 GB0057_E12 2 Enter A 1 Input 6 List A ime 32 Ss List A 1 Input 8 E i Limit 32 GB0057_E13 GB0057_E14 To enter numbers or symbols press ABC to display Symbol 3 Register the characters you entered List A 1 Input 8 Limit 32 Vv Press Next gt The entered characters are registered GB0057_E14 Appendix gt Paper Paper This section explains the paper that can be used in the paper source For the media type that can be used in the paper source refer to Media Type Setting on page 9 17 N Cassettes Supported paper sizes No of sheets Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement R Oficio II A3 A4 R A4 A5 R B4 B5 R B5 Folio 500 80 g m 216 x 340 mm 8K 16K R 16K Multi Purpose tray Supported paper sizes No of sheets Letter R Letter Statement R Executive A4 R A4 A5 R A6 R B5 R B5 B6 R Folio 16K R 16K 100 80 g m A4 Letter or smaller paper Ledger Legal Oficio Il A3 B4 216 x 340 mm 8K Paper lager than A4 Letter 25 80 g m Postcards 100 x 148 mm 20 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope C4 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 Envelope 9 Commercial 5 9 Envelope 6 Commercial 6 3 4 Monarch ISO B5 Youkei 2 Youkei 4 11 10 Appendix gt Paper Basic Paper Specifications This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular dry copiers and page printers such as laser p
100. 78 Legal gt gt Letter 77 Ledger gt gt Legal 64 Ledger gt gt Letter 50 Ledger gt gt STMT 25 Min Metric Models Copy Auto 400 Max 200 A5 gt gt A3 141 A4 gt gt A3 A5 gt gt A4 127 Folio gt gt A3 106 11x15 gt gt A3 100 90 Folio gt gt A4 75 11x15 gt gt A4 70 A3 gt gt A4 A4 gt gt Ad 50 25 Min Metric Models Asia Pacific Auto 400 Max 200 A5 gt gt A3 141 A4 gt gt A3 B5 gt gt B4 122 A4 gt gt B4 A5 gt gt B5 115 B4 gt gt A3 B5 gt gt A4 100 86 A3 gt gt B4 A4 gt gt B5 81 B4 gt gt A4 B5 gt gt A5 70 A3 gt gt A4 B4 gt gt B5 50 25 Min Copying gt Copying Functions Zoom Entry ie P a gt Specify the image size in 1 increment between 25 400 of the original 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 4 2 display the screen 10 10 Co l Copies E EN lt _ Paper ill Density _ _ Selection Auto Normal 0 ur CC a Duplex Combine Law Z5 1 sided gt gt 1 sided Off 2 oO ES O 2 Select the function Auto 10 10 100 Auto Standard Zoom Zoom Entry gt S d E oO Standard Zoom 10 10 10 10 115 B4 gt gt A3 B5 gt gt A4 2 N 100 Auto Standa
101. B0057_ 33 Cancel Access Level 10 10 Administrator User GB0459_00 e 9 48 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration 3 Check the settings Check the settings and change or add information as needed Group ID Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Group ID 1234567890 Group Name Group d Access Level Administrator Printer Off d GB0460_00 Group Name Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Group ID 1234567890 Group Name Group 01 Access Level Administrator Printer Off L d Access Level GB0460_00 Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Group ID 1234567890 Group Name Group 01 1 Access Level Administrator 1 4294967295 1234567890 2 System Menu Counter Cancel Input 7 Limit 128 OK Printer Off e GB0460_00 9 49 10 10 t l GB0454_00 GB0057_63 GB0455_00 Setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Printer Copy Send FAX Transmission Storing in Box Storing in Memory Select the item that you want to change Group ID 1234567890 Group Name Group 01 Access Level Administrator 10 10 Printer Off Cancel Select the item that you want to change FAX Transmission Storing in Box Select the item that you want to change Cance
102. B0096_00 3 58 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions 2 Select the file format PDF TIFF JPEG or XPS Ready to send Others GB0082_00 e Others 1 Ready to send 10 10 PDF TIFF JPEG E XPS XPS Others Cancel Next gt amp GB0082_01 2 Select the file format Ready to send 10 10 File Format PDF image Quality GB0698_00 3 Set the image quality 10 10 File Format GB0698_00 a d 4 Set PDF A 10 10 File Format PDF Image Quality PDF A GB0698_00 i a a 3 59 Ready to send 10 10 Tie TIFF 1 1 JPEG XPS Cancel i Ready to send 10 10 2 E e GB0145_00 GB0083_00 GB0699_00 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Color Selection Select the color mode setting Auto Color Gray Scan to URS 5 Automatically detects whether the document is color or black and white and scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Grayscale Auto Color B amp W Automatically recognize whether the document is color or black and white and scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Black and White Full Color Scan document in full color Grayscale Scan document in Grayscale for smoother and finer finish Black amp White Scan document in black and white Fi
103. Cursor Key Input Limit Display Press to move the cursor on the display Displays maximum number of characters and the number of characters entered Delete Key Press to delete a character to the left of the cursor Space Key Press to insert a space Enter Key Press to enter a line break Cancel Press to cancel entered characters and return to the screen before the entry was made lt Back Press to return to the previous screen OK Next gt Press to save the entered characters and move to the next screen Appendix gt Character Entry Method Upper case Letter Entry Screen AB GB0057_E02 Number Symbol Entry Screen Cancel lt Back Next gt EE Ee E Input 2 Limit 32 i 123 A S Symbol Input 3 Limit 32 GB0057_E03 Display Key A V Description To enter a number or symbol not shown in the keyboard press the cursor key and scroll the screen to view other numbers or symbols to enter Appendix gt Character Entry Method Entering Characters Follow the steps below to enter List A 1 for an example 4 Enter List Space 7 opui 1 rx List a Input 5 Del Limit 32 Limit 32 Ca 4 ongnued oT Ta OTE EEA PPT BA OTE aes To shift from lower case to upper case letters press a A To shift from upper case to lower case letters press A a GB00
104. D O Connect to a Network Projector Core Networking m HOOOOO HOOOOO Ld PSR ee PU EE NAE AE E E af gji N File and Printer Sharing D iSCSI Service O o O Media Center Extenders o o O Netlogon Service Oo 0 Allow another program 3 Select the File and Printer Sharing checkbox Add a port 2 p 1 From the Start menu select Control Panel System and Security and Check firewall status CMY ororo gt Srema Secur gt ag Control Panel H a ae Pey Action Center Review your computer s status and resolve issues e System and Securi k Change User Account Control settings Troubleshoot common computer problems Network and Internet Restore your computer to an earlier time Hardware and Sound a a on Programs l Check firewall status Allow a program through Windows Firewall User Accounts and Family Safety B System A View amount of RAM and processor speed Check the Windows Experience Index ppearance and See ae eee Allow remote access See the name ofthis computer Device Manager Clock Language and Region ey Windows Update P A ad Tiie mech me bin sem elation nn ne nfi Cla mab Ense cemolantne eee ee eee ee eed P gt Control Panel System and Security Windows Firewall Control Panel H a Help protect your computer with Windows Firewall Allow a program or feature Windows Firewall can help prevent hacke
105. Drint Cetin Chifts l trl D Print Ctrl P TTT TTT E Exit Ctrl Q _a ee Eee Click File and select Print in the application 2 Configure the printer 7 Print Printer Name Properties 2 Status a Type Document and Markups A Print Range Preview Composite All K 210 02 Subset All pages in range Reverse pages Page Handling Copies 1 Collate 297 01 Page Scaling Shrink to Printable Area z v Auto Rotate and Center F Choose paper source by PDF page size Use custom paper size when needed Units mm Zoom 96 Print to file o ce _ K 1 Select the printer 2 Click Properties button 5 2 Printing gt Printing from Applications Properties P i auickr e Bae frou Publishing Media type Unspecified Destination Printer default Orientation Duplex Portrait z E Print on both sides Landscape i Flip on long edge E Rotated Flip on short edge Quality T EcoPrint Collate an T Frint preview H KYOCERG Profiles e Kc Cancel 3 Select the Basic tab 4 Click Page Sizes button to select the paper size To print on the special paper such as thick paper click the Media Type menu and select the media type 5 Click Source and select the paper source NOTE If you choose Auto Select papers are supplied automatically from the paper source loaded with paper of optimum s
106. E E A E E E E E E ee 4 15 PAULO Mage TROLAUIONI x caseanootaccosaemavcudassinnneid ae E EE a E EESTE ETERNE 4 16 TUSTIN e e r E E E T E NE E E E AAE E 4 17 AE PEE cere ead E E E E EE 5 1 Printing from Applications cccccecceeeccceeeceeeceeeceeeese ees aN eere ARET ein 5 2 Printing Data Saved on the Printer ccccccccsecccececeeeceeeceeeceeeceueceueecaeecauecaeessueesueesseesaas 5 5 BT AUS EEE seep E E E E EEE E E EE 5 5 POOP ANG HOI aeren r E E T E E E A 5 7 Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents cccccceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 10 SCN ees eed eps act seeeie ete mace sececaenaseecepesentcteeceeesetecueecssccaseesiecene 6 1 Basie OI esos ore cinr psec tec Ea rE E deep E E 6 2 Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC oo cece cccccececeeeceeeeeeeeseeeceeeeaeeseeeseeeeaeeeges 6 5 Making a note of the computer name and full computer name cceeeceeee eee ees 6 5 Making a note of the user name and domain NAME cceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeeesaees 6 6 Creating a Shared Folder Making a Note of a Shared Folder ccccccseceeeeeees 6 7 Configuring Windows Firewall for Windows 7 cccccsseeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 6 10 Register the shared folder in the address DOOK cccccccecceeceeeeeeeeseeeneeeeeeeeeeneees 6 14 Specifying Destination sei winieicecce denetenecieneaseedstunea ddan oatateneiesaucnadedacacdedueidcenendenchamce
107. E O gt T ne T E AT E T A TEE ee T E E E ee ee T 3 49 BE EEE A E AE E E E T E N T A E E E T E AEE E TA 3 51 SGM RO ONO oen a E E E E E E S 3 52 DNIAMA GO serce ae E E E E E EE E EE E E S 3 53 SADE SS a ne reece eee E ee E ee eee 3 54 Background Density AdjUSt cccccccceccssceceeecneecseceueecaeeceueceuecsaceceeceuecseessaeesaeeseueeeeeesueesaeessueeseeesaaes 3 55 FEVER BICC O IAOUIOM casadcannsucenrcsawatassasne evant eneeucesdeainhimesaanbuanusse aieumensanmmnidscenide ented aT a 3 56 ZO OUI cstctcee ce ep E ica hee EE odie E depend ature EE ban E deacons EE E E E E E ES 3 57 FN TONAL ET E A dean E ET ses E weaasenn EE A T TT 3 58 COOP e a A E E A A E E A E T A E E E A A 3 60 SOP FI N OUGE sorua i E A T E A ES 3 61 FURAN AIMS ENUY saa E E A EEEE EE EEEE TTE E EEEE EE S E 3 63 POOR OV CUS sen E E EE T E a E A E E 3 64 3 1 Common Operations gt Loading Paper Loading Paper Paper can be loaded standardly in the cassette and the multi purpose tray A paper feeder is also available as an option refer to Optional Equipment on page 11 2 Before Loading Paper When you open a new package of paper fan the sheets to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following steps 1 3 SN A N CLAW s amp AS DES 2 4 S y AN os a 1 Bend the whole set of sheets to swell them in the middle 2 Hold the stack at both ends and stretch it while keeping the entire stack swelled 3 Raise the right and left hands alternately to
108. E mail TX Protocol Detail 9 21 SNMP Protocol Detail 9 21 SNMPv3 Protocol Detail 9 21 solving Malfunctions 10 8 Sound 9 9 Specifications Copy 11 19 Document Finisher 11 22 Document Processor 11 21 Environmental Specifications 11 22 Machine 11 18 Paper Feeder double cassette 11 21 Paper Feeder single cassette 11 21 Printer 11 20 Scanner 11 20 Staple 3 49 Status 11 26 Status Job Cancel 8 1 Status Page 11 26 Storing Size 7 15 Subnet Mask 11 26 Setup 9 19 Symbols 1 2 System Menu 9 2 T TCP IP 11 26 TCP IP IPv4 setup 9 19 TCP IP IPv6 11 26 ThinPrint Protocol Detail 9 21 ThinPrintOverSSL Protocol Detail 9 21 Tone Curve Adjustment 9 27 Toner Container 2 3 Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner 8 13 Replacement 10 2 Touch Panel 2 7 TWAIN 11 26 Setting TWAIN Driver 2 20 U Unknown Login User Name Job 9 69 USB 11 26 USB Cable Connecting 2 11 USB Interface 2 4 2 9 USB Keyboard Type 9 15 USB Memory Printing Documents 7 3 Removing 7 9 Saving Documents 7 6 USB Memory Slot 2 2 User Login Administration 9 28 Adding a User 9 32 Editing and Deleting 9 38 Enabling Disabling 9 30 Group Authorization 9 47 Local User Authorization 9 36 My Panel 9 37 Obtain Network User Property 9 51 Simple Login 9 41 User Property 9 7 Index 4 W Waste Toner Box 2 3 Replacement 10 4 WIA 11 26 setting WIA Driver 2 21 WSD Print Setup 9 22 WSD Scan Setup 9 22 X XPS Fit to Page 7 14 Z Zoom Copy 4 5 Sen
109. EE E E E 9 7 Cassette MP Tray Settings sceciidentscecdszdcarceddncsveanscamodiedcedan de Veaduenmendeanddaxnaveactenenvencsadate 9 8 COMON SOUNS serisi ernia aea E AO E A EEE E O E E TEER 9 9 OO aE E EE E E EE E E O 9 15 RUN N EE E E E E E E A E a 9 15 Favores APDIICAUON etc sece rac o ost ate esac Eea a a i E Oe 9 16 SANES AA E E A E E T E E A E E A E A A A E E E see 9 17 ET e E E E 9 17 SYS ia EE see sine ET EA E ome R EEE E E E EE E E R 9 19 ORE DIOT sereen a E E E dsenectonsecounos 9 24 Adjustment Maintenance ccccecccceececeeeccaeeeceeeeeaeeeeaeeeeaeeeeaeeeeseueeseecesueeseeeeseeeees 9 26 USEF Logn AQMINISTAUON scacccncdiuticcanssravausbaantuvnads a E aE iae iiias 9 28 First User Login Administration 2 1 0 0 ec ceccceeec eee eeceeeceeeseeeeeeseeeseeseeeseeeseeeeeseeeneees 9 28 RISO PTC CN ANNOS caps cece ees eee OEE E E 9 29 Enabling Disabling User Login Administration cccccccccceeccceeceeeeceeeeeesaeeeeaeeeeaes 9 30 PROOINIG WISER tiosaesuendonsd can taccenansauniduecsantvacseannccdnsaamesecaasstactevausiaeperdsseansunianns dautuatadee 9 32 Local User Authorization ccccccccccceeeceeeceeeaeeceeeceeceeceeeseesaeeseeeasesseseeeseeseesseees 9 36 I RANO sccanansncdaedundeentatstdrotaanestabiccenca cate sdees ue E O E A tina tadaesat 9 37 Editing and Deleting Users ccccccccecceeccaeceeeeaeesaecceecaeecaeeseeeeeesaeeseeeaseseseseeeneees 9 38 SIMIC HILO Zassaccesdccnusascanneeacosesgac
110. FTP Select On of the secure protocol settings on the Command 2 26 Center RX 1132 Failed to send via FTP Check the followings of the FTP server 2 26 e Is FIPS available e ls the encryption available 2101 Failed to send via SMB Check the network and SMB settings 2 26 e The network cable is connected e The hub is not operating properly e The server is not operating properly e Host name and IP address e Port number Failed to send via FTP Check the network and FTP settings e The network cable is connected e The hub is not operating properly e The server is not operating properly e Host name and IP address e Port number Failed to send the e mail Check the network and Command Center RX e The network cable is connected e The hub is not operating properly e POP3 server name of the POP3 user e SMTP server name 2102 Failed to send via FTP Check the followings of the FTP server 2103 e Is FTP available e The server is not operating properly Failed to send the e mail Check the network e The network cable is connected e The hub is not operating properly e The server is not operating properly Failed to send the e mail Check the network Failed to send via FTP e The network cable is connected Failed to send via SMB e The hub is not operating properly Failed to send via FTP e The server is not operating properly Failed to send the e mail Check the e mail size limit of the
111. Failed to store job retention data The job is canceled Press End Insufficient free space in the Job Box Try to perform the job again after printing or deleting data from the Job Box Finisher failure Contact your Service Representative Press the System Menu Counter key Adjustment Maintenance Service Setting and then Reset Disable Function Mode Press Execute to perform Reset Disable Function Mode Finisher is not connected to the machine properly Turn the main power switch off and then check the attachment of the bridge unit and the power cable Finisher tray is full of paper Is the acceptable storage capacity exceeded for the document finisher tray Remove paper from the document finisher tray Fuser unit is not installed Replace the fuser unit h to our specified fuser unit See the leaflet supplied with the fuser unit for details When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses 10 16 Troubleshooting gt Responding to Messages Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Incorrect account ID The account ID was incorrect when processing the job externally The job is canceled Press End Incorrect Login User Name or The login user name or password was Password incorrect when processing the job externally The job is canceled Press End Inner tray is full of pape
112. Kits consist of the developing unit the drum unit the transfer belt and the fixing unit Replacement Maintenance Kits have a 90 day Limited Warranty This warranty is valid only for the original retail purchaser referred to as the Customer of a new Kyocera MFP in the United States of America or Canada based upon the country of purchase In order to obtain performance of this warranty the Customer must immediately notify the Authorized Kyocera Dealer from whom the product was purchased If the Kyocera Dealer is not able to provide service write to Kyocera at the address below for the name and address of the Authorized Kyocera Dealer in your area or check Kyocera s website at http www kyoceradocumentsolutions com This warranty does not cover MFPs or accessories which a have become damaged due to operator negligence misuse accidents improper storage or unusual physical or electrical stress b have used parts or supplies which are not genuine Kyocera brand parts or supplies c have been installed or serviced by a technician not employed by Kyocera or an Authorized Kyocera Dealer or d have had the serial number modified altered or removed This warranty gives the Customer specific legal rights The Customer may also have other rights which vary from state to state or province to province Neither the seller nor any other person is authorized to extend the time period or expand this warranty on behalf of Kyocera
113. Management gt Job Accounting Editing and Deleting Accounts This changes the registered account information or deletes the account 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9 55 display the screen 2 10 10 VeTAUIT SELLING gt GB0461_01 2 Edit or delete an account To edit an account 1 Press for the account name you wish to edit 10 10 Q Searches by account name Sales department 00000001 fe fit 1 1 GB0473_00 e Allows you to search for an account name and sorts results You can specify an account name by account ID by pressing the Quick No Search key 2 Edit the account Account Name 10 10 2 y j Input 9 Limit 32 i Account Name Section 01 Account ID 00000001 1 i Print Total Off Scan Others Off l GB0478_00 GB0057_65 Account ID System Menu Counter 10 10 10 10 Account Name Section 01 1 0 99999999 Print Total Off Scan Others Off l GB0478_00 t GB0476_00 9 60 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Restriction System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 Account Name Section 01 Account ID 00000001 1 Oi Counter Limit Reject Usage Print Total Scan Others 2 Cancel System Menu Counter GB0478_00 10 10 a d sl eae a a a For details refer to
114. NE TOUCH KEY secuccacewsneindantcwsensmenee inanda niiina a Eea a a Ehina E a a 6 19 Entering a New E mall AGGleSS ccwcicdsosmesnvends tnmnheiaads ankwiadd sab autdesadedeensiadawierashiamuntadbdadiwehededmmanctdarmachomantes 6 20 Specifying a New PC Folder ccccccceccceccceeccesecceeecaeecauecaueecuecececseeceuessueesaeesaeesaeeeeueesaeeseeessunsseeesagess 6 21 Checking ANG Editing Destinations a cscsizessncseincwesceadiweanscnniedsomanstdcxtausesansdeqaedastekeddentiel leased emobusacsemobenedend 6 25 Sending to Different Types of Destinations Multi Sending ce ceeccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesseeesseeeeseeeees 6 26 Registering Destinations in the Address BOOK ccccccccceccceecceeeceeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeseeeseeesaeeeaees 6 27 PROGINS OPAC gine cscisstiet eaneeinertetsecteene eri E sini SE EE EREE se ER E OOA EESE 6 27 Adnod AOUD aaae E E E EE E E eee ers 6 31 Editing and Deleting Address Book Entries cccccccccccceccececeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeseeeaeeeseeseeeaeeenees 6 34 Adding a Destination on One Touch Key cccccccceccescccececececaceceueceueceeecsecsaeesauecaueeeaeesacecsuesageceusesaeesueseueeaes 6 36 Aang a SSA OU serieei a TEE Ei a ae NA a AESA E TNE EERE 6 36 Editing and Deleting One Touch K y sicsiiesrrrciruriasoreeieiceriasrnni ierann dinana aei a aA an A Eaa 6 38 SPN FUCUS eea eee EEE E ee ee ee E E eee eee 6 39 SNN AG aen e E E E E EEE a E E 6 40 P
115. NGD AE OOMGTATAUIONN oaeen Ei oe ar cmos E AE E EE a 3 34 Mixed Size Originals dezicteastrictetisdeunsaeeeensaxesesesseseraeeeesiwebeienackesaeeanesuvenenuetunatdecestease 3 35 2 8ided BOOK OrgINAN secccsartexassecgoncdauas sanaccececan a a E N ENE i aS 3 37 CONUNUGUS SCAN sesipisias ibis udania a aa EAE TEE SEE a a aaa 3 40 PAD el o ClO CUOMN enerne r a a a E E EE E EE Ea 3 42 ig ODU aanre eee ene eee ener E E ee ee EE E 3 43 CONAN OSCE arag E E E E so seannonusssesabeeracedas 3 44 AILE LEE 1 AEP E E EE E E E ETE A S O E O E E T E N A EET 3 46 SADI s E E E E 3 49 OSY ee S E E T E E T 3 51 SAARE OU ON oea E E E EE 3 52 CVU Image sinen a Naai a EE ye EEE S Ea A ET 3 53 RPA SS 9 sera e E E E A E E 3 54 Background Density Adjust sraudusncviswseicondutmuntecnsnaueroancistnnususnintanuuniuvataudatuexanumouneusteant 3 55 Prevent Blego ANroOUQN feitucmasgecovnrsenessoonuanss ieira Ee r aie BEE T eni Ee 3 56 E O aeee E E E demo E E E E E E 3 57 SM FOA a E e E eanadokenanc odeiedats 3 58 CONOR E eS p E E E A E A E E E E E E 3 60 JOD FINISH NOICE serii ea A EEE E E EES ET 3 61 FS ANAC ENUY derreire iea na aa Ee a aaa 3 63 PRON OOE setena E era E a i 3 64 EE E bce E A E E E E A TE 4 1 PASIOA O enei e EEE AEE E E ee 4 2 GODINO FUNCIONS eee ane er een eee ee ee een E EN ee eee ne eee eee 4 4 ZOOM erea E TE E E E E E 4 5 Bejo o E E E E T A A E E A E E E T A E E A E A 4 8 CONDE eaa EE E EE E E tenet oassioserenees 4 12 96 od seee EE
116. OPERATION GUIDE FS 6525MFP FS 6530MFP Ecosrs X KYOCERA Introduction Thank you for your purchase of FS 6525MFP FS 6530MFP This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly perform routine maintenance and take a simple troubleshooting action as necessary so that you can always use the machine in good condition Please read this Operation Guide before you start using the machine We recommend the use of our own brand supplies We will not be liable for any damage caused by the use of third party Supplies in this machine A label shown in the illustration assures that the supplies are our own brand Jaf NIOULCINO p DCERA kes ocena AKSO ce KYOCE Included Guides The following guides are supplied with the machine Refer to them as necessary The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice for the purpose of improvement of machine performance Quick Installation Guide Describes the procedures for installation of the machine frequently used operations routine maintenance and troubleshooting action Safety Guide Provides safety and cautionary information for the installation and use of the machine Be sure to read this guide before using the machine Safety Guide Describes the machine installation space cautionary space and other information Be FS 6525MFP FS 6530MFP sure to read this guide before using the machine DVD Product Library Operation G
117. OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Original SSLeay License Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA Ihash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the fol
118. On Bonjour Select whether or not to use Bonjour Value Off On Auto IP Select whether or not to use Auto IP Value Off On IP Address Set the IP addresses Value At HHH TAFE HHH Subnet Mask Set the IP subnet masks Value FHH THEE TAR AA Default Gateway Set the IP gateway addresses Value 4 HHH HHH HHH After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu IPv6 Settings Description Set up TCP IP IPv6 to connect to the network The IPv6 setting is available when selecting On for TCP IP IPv6 Sets whether to use IPv6 Value Off On Manual Setting Manually specify the IP address prefix length and gateway address of TCP IP IPv6 The manual setting is available when selecting On for IPv6 Value IP Address Manual numbers 128 bit in total separated by colons Prefix Length 0 to 128 Default Gateway HHH HHH HHT AHH NOTE Default Gateway is displayed when selecting Off for RA Stateless RA Stateless Select whether or not to use RA Stateless The RA Stateless settings are available when selecting On for IPv6 When selecting On IP Address 1 to 5 appears under IP Address Stateless Prefix Length Value Off On Select whether or not to use the DHCP IPv6 server The DHCP IPv6 Settings are available when selecting On f
119. P You will be unable to login if you forget your login user name or login password In this event login with administrator privileges and change your login user name or login password Login Normal login Enter the login user name 10 10 Input 4 Limit 64 Login User Name EE rd Login Password likey board If this screen is displayed during operations press Keyboard to enter the login user name The name can also be entered using the numeric keypad GB0723_00 GB0057_00 Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters Enter the login password Input 4 Limit 64 2500 Input 4 Limit 64 GB0057_00 GB0057_01 Cancel Password Press Password to enter the login password Common Operations gt Login Logout Simple Login Logout Log in 10 10 Login User Name i 2500 Keyboard Login Password KK Keyboard NOTE If Network Authentication is selected as the user authentication method either Local or Network can be selected as the authentication destination ne N N gt n D lt GB0023_00 If this screen is displayed during operations select a user and log in NOTE If a user password is required an input screen will be displayed Refer to Simple Login on page 9 41 N To logout from the machine press the Logout key to return to the login user name password entry
120. Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 9 62 N GB0478_01 3 Register the account System Menu Counter 10 10 Account Name Section 01 Account ID 00000001 Print Total off Scan Others off Cancel GB0478_00 To delete System Menu Counter Q fit Sales department 00000001 L gt GB0473_00 Select the account name you wish to delete and press Delete the trash can icon 9 61 GB0474_00 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Restricting the Use of the Machine This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of pages available Set when Adding an Account see page 9 58 or Editing and Deleting Accounts see page 9 60 The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether Individual or Total is selected for Copier Printer Count on page 9 67 Restriction Items Individual selected for Copier Printer Count Copy Total Limits the total number of pages used for copying Printer Total Limits the total number of pages used for printing Scan Others Limits the number of pages scanned excludes copying FAX Transmission Limits the number of pages sent by fax This item is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed Total selected for Copier Printer Count Print Total Limits the total number of pages used for copying and printing Scan Othe
121. Simple Login Off ee bY 1 1 2 GB0711_00 GB0710_00 e Register a User Register users to use simple login Up to 20 users can be registered The table below explains the user information to be registered Name Set the user name to display on the Simple Login screen User Select which registered users can use simple login Password Login Set whether to require entry of a login password at login Icon Select the icon to display on the Simple Login screen 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 29 display the screen 9 41 Setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration N System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 2 a User Login Simple Login Local Authentication GBO710_01 A Local User List 1 Simple Login Setup 1 1 1 1 Simple login settings gt System Menu Counter _ 3 04None 05 None Local User Authorization Off GB0435_00 1 3 07 None 08 None 09 None lt GB0712_00 Select a key with no registered user and press 2 Enter the user information 1 Select the type of user 10 10 Local User Network User gt GB0640_00 J 2 Select a user Local user 10 10 sis Q Searches by user name p amp DeviceAdmin 2500 T U 1111 12222 3333 GB0726_00 Allows you to search for a Displays details for i
122. TENTION CLASE 3B RAYONNEMENT LASER EN CAS D OUVERTURE EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU VORSICHT KLASSE 3B LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNE NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN ATTENZIONE CLASSE 3B RADIAZIONE LASER IN CASO DI APERTURA EVITARE L ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO PRECAUCION CLASSE 3B RADIACIONE LASER CUANDO SE ABRE EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYO VARO e AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA LUOKAN 3B LASERSATEILYLLE ALA KATSO SATEESEEN 2S Ar mAB m FART RRAS ARARE EmA BRA Em mT ee awe EA RESI e CLASS 3B 74 HOHA AM HIANS CCeR lt CEFTSAIBL Y HEMCET E L2BRARO BMNIIUTC IEU 4 Maintenance For safety of the service personnel follow the maintenance instructions in the other section of this manual 5 Safety switch The power to the laser unit is cut off when the front cover is opened 1 5 Preface gt Notice Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power Caution The power plug is the main isolation device Other switches on the equipment are only functional switches and are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source Attention Le de branchement de la fiche secteur est le seul moyen de mettre l appareil hors tension Les interrupteurs sur l appareil ne sont que des interrupteurs de fonctionnement ils ne mettent pas l appareil hors tension WARNING This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of
123. TX Resolution refer to Fax Operation Guide Zoom page 9 72 Margin page 9 72 Continuous Scan page 9 72 Auto Image Rotation page 9 72 File Name Entry page 9 72 E mail Subject Body page 9 72 FTP Encrypted TX page 9 73 JPEG TIFF Print page 9 73 XPS Fit to Page page 9 73 Detail Settings page 9 Image Quality page 9 73 13 PDF A page 9 73 Paper Output page 9 Copy Document Box page 9 73 13 Printer page 9 73 FAX refer to Fax Operation Guide Preset Limit page 9 73 Error Handling page 9 14 Duplexing Error page 9 14 Finishing Error page 9 74 No Staple Error page 9 14 Stapling Limit Error page 9 14 Paper Mismatch Error page 9 14 Measurement page 9 74 Inserted Paper Mismatch page 9 74 Keyboard Layout page 9 74 USB Keyboard Type page 9 75 Offset One Page Documents page 9 75 XVI Copy page 9 75 Auto Paper Selection page 9 75 Auto Priority page 9 75 Reserve Next Priority page 9 15 Auto Image Rotation Action page 9 75 Send page 9 75 Dest Check before Send page 9 75 Entry Check for New Dest page 9 75 Send and Forward Forward page 9 16 page 9 76 Destination page 9 76 Color TIFF Compression page 9 76 Default Screen page 9 76 Document Box Sub Address Box refer to Fax O
124. Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book E mail Folder FAX Vv GB0055_00 If Program mode is selected set the copy function send function FAX function option and destinations to be registered lf Wizard mode is selected go to step 2 2 Display the screen 10 10 Favorites eT i m f a e A EJ y EJ Ww Ap plication ID Card Copy Paper Saving Copy Scan to PC Address Entry k 2 4 E vs p u a a Scan to PC Scan to E mail Scan to E mail SS Address Book Address Entry Address Book GB0056_00 2 Add Edit Close GB0779_00 3 14 Common Operations gt Favorites NOTE Press Favorites in the Application screen to return to the Favorites screen hra p GB0977_00 3 Select the job type 10 10 10 10 Cancel lt Back Next gt GB0764_00 gt Ee EZ gt 7 ES 3 J When inci diaas select the wizard mode 10 10 Select the functions 10 10 3 Ext Address Book gt __ Original Size Auto 1 2 gt 1 6 One Touch Key gt Original Orientation Top Edge on Top Address Entry E mail gt EV e Mixed Size Originals gt V GB0767_00 GB0769_00 Eeg gt Select the function Checked items will be shown as part of the wizard NOTE When the job type is Copy the Destination Recall Method screen will not be displayed A i a Use V or AN to scroll up and down 4 Enter a name
125. Tray Settings on page 9 8 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Press Paper Selection Ready to copy 10 10 Copies E eee Paper B Zoom all Density Selection 5 amii i 100 Normal 0 a es a A Duplex Combine gz Collate LF ws _ Offset 1 sided gt gt 1 sided Off Collate vv Favorites GBO0001_01 2 Select the paper source 10 10 GB0004_00 w Cancel If Auto is selected the paper matching the size of the original is selected automatically 2 Cassette 2 and 3 Cassette 3 are displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed M indicates the MP tray When selecting MP tray specify the paper size and the media type The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below Paper Size Metric Select from A3 A4 R A4 A5 R A6 R B4 B5 R B5 B6 R Folio or 216 x 340 mm Inch Select from Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement R Executive or Oficio Il others Select from 8K 16K R 16K ISO B5 Envelope 10 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope C4 Hagaki Oufukuhagaki Youkei 4 Youkei 2 or Custom Size Entry Enter a size not displayed in the standard sizes Inch models X 5 83 to 17 in 0 01 increments Y 3 86 to 11 69 in 0 01 increments Metric models X 148 to 432 mm in 1 mm increments Y 98 to
126. U OA AO are E E EE E avd E ETE E E EE E 6 42 Eana UDe BOO ooren E E E E i a 6 43 BU EGO TA aree i EE E EE TENE warned EEE E E EES 6 44 WV SCAM a E E E A E EE E E E 6 45 Scanning USI TVALI spe cecctrsacatatrtcterceare enisi a DETE e Eaa AEE EE EEEE aN E Eaa aa iE ES 6 48 6 1 Sending gt Basic Operation Basic Operation This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment to an E mail message or to a PC linked to the network In order to do this it is necessary to register the sender and destination recipient address on the network A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required in order to send e mail It is recommended that a Local Area Network LAN be used to assist with transmission speed and security issues To use the transmission function verify the following e Program the settings including the E mail setting on the machine e Use Command Center RX the internal HTML web page to register the IP address the host name of the SMTP server and the recipient e Register the destination in the Address Book or One Touch keys e Create a share folder in the destination computer when a folder SMB FTP is selected as the destination Consult your network administrator concerning destination folder sharing settings Basic Sending Send as E mail Sends a scanned original image as an E mail attachment page 6 20 Send to Folder SMB Stores a scanned original image in
127. USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the USB memory without having to use a computer The following file types can be printed e PDF file Version 1 5 TIFF file TIFF V6 TTN2 format e JPEG file e XPS file e Encrypted PDF file PDF files you wish to print should have an extension pdf Files to be printed should be saved no further down than the top 3 folder levels Use USB memory properly formatted by this machine Plug the USB memory directly into the USB memory slot A1 We do not guarantee that USB memory printing is error free if a USB hub is used 1 Plug the USB memory C0 0 Oe oe TB W d Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot A1 When the message Removable Memory is recognized Displaying files Are you sure is displayed press Yes Q IMPORTANT Use USB memory formatted by this machine If a USB memory formatted by any other device is used The removable memory is not formatted may appear Refer to Check of Device Status on page 8 11 Document Box gt Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory 2 Display the screen 10 10 10 10 m i _ S 11 3 3 JPG a gt B 7 9 2 3PG GB0089_03 Menu Cancel 1 When the machine reads the USB memory Removable Memory screen may appear NOTE If the screen does not appear press the Document Box key and then Removable
128. Vertical 2 to 11 69 in 0 01 increments Metric models Horizontal 50 to 432 mm in 1 mm increments Vertical 50 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments For instructions on how to specify the custom original size refer to Custom Original Size on page 9 9 If you select Off for Custom Original Size this does not appear NOTE Be sure to always specify the original size when using custom size originals 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Original Size Ready to copy 10 10 Ready to copy 10 10 Copies J a 2 Say SSS Original Size mi Auto _ Paper B Zoom all Density Selection C sammi m F T E ia U az Original Orientation 2 Auto 100 Normal 0 i Top Edge on Top M es ey A ir p Mixed Size Originals i Duplex F Combine Collate S a Offset Paper Output 1 sided gt 1 sided Off Collate Inner tray GBO0001_01 GB0002_00 Close Add Edi L Shortcut J Use V or A to scroll up and down 2 Select the original size Auto Ready to copy 10 10 gt Inch gt Others gt Size Entry gt GB0025_00 a l e 3 32 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Metric Inch or Others 10 10 10 10 Auto Metric gt Inch gt a gt Others gt Size Entry Cancel nr L e GB0025_00 Use V
129. XXXXXXXXXX MACHINE No XXXXXXXXXX MANUFACTURED MANUFACTURED NOTE You ll need the equipment s serial number when contacting your Service Representative Please check the number before contacting your Service Representative 3 10 Common Operations gt Checking the Counter Checking the Counter Check the number of pages printed and scanned 1 Display the screen 10 10 bi en eget e n S EB ane Setup TEIR lt gt System Menu Counter oar a 1 5 Report 2 Be _ _ 1 GB0054_00 Use WV or AN to scroll up and down 2 Check the counter 10 10 Printed Pages Scanned Pages GB0584_00 Select the job you wish to check Printed Pages 10 10 Copy Total 111 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Printer Total 222 Copy Print Total 333 GB0585_00 Scroll the screen to check the number of pages Pressing Count by Paper Size and then Black amp White allows you to check the number of pages by paper size Scanned Pages GB0589_00 Common Operations gt Login Logout Login Logout If you are setting a function that requires administrator rights or if user login administration is enabled you must enter your login user name and login password NOTE The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below Model Name FS 6525MFP Login User Name Login Password FS 6530MF
130. a shared folder of any PC page 6 27 Send to Folder FTP Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server page 6 27 Image Data Scanning with TWAIN WIA Scan the document using a TWAIN or WIA compatible application program page 6 48 NOTE Different sending options can be specified in combination Refer to Sending to Different Types of Destinations Multi Sending on page 6 26 The fax function can be used when the optional fax kit has been installed For details about this function refer to the FAX Operation Guide 6 2 Sending gt Basic Operation 1 Press the Send key Send NOTE If the touch panel is turned off press the Energy Saver key or the Power key and wait for the machine to warm up 2 Place the originals O For details refer to Loading Originals on page 3 7 3 Specifying destination xarn Select the destination to which to send an image Rea LE For details refer to Specifying Destination on page 6 17 Se ae N One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book ue _ i Folder FAX M Functions a Favorites GB0055_00 4 Selecting the functions ne s 7 y Press Functions to display the sending functions to use _ BBB bbb abe com eww Ek _ For details refer to Sending Functions on page 6 39 N One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book i l A SS Folder FAX a aa Vv GB0055_02 Sending gt Ba
131. aGsase sane E EE RE E 9 41 Group AUthOriZatON sitensaceszaetucnnndujed douse vercubexudiedeaciendeceseeceendeetedleendiebeendasesaelacteredetess 9 47 Obtain Network User Property ccccccccsceceeeeceeeceeeceseceeeecueesaueceueeaueesaeecseessaeeeas 9 51 OC II aster wars bets ert wre eee E Scarica EEE E E ese inclestes 9 53 IFSL JOD ACCOUNUNG SOUD wssescasccsecdenscicasennsehaccedadenecaene snseterediseacteens snanneancedoncevedese 9 53 Job ACCOUNTING Settings 00 cccccseccseeeseeeaececaeeceueceuececesaeecaeecsueceueesueesaeesseesaees 9 55 Enabling Disabling Job ACCOUNTING ccccecccceeccceeeeceeeeceeeeceeceseeeeeseeseeeeseeeesaeeesaes 9 56 LOJA LOGOUT Secs cise tctrear sccm ernest ease cearneeete sition duce yastoemcecrasinesteeaeeusteeseraasisesmn saree caemeecenes 9 57 POUNT NACC OUN sir e E E E 9 58 Editing and Deleting Accounts ccccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeene eee eeseeeseeseeeseeeseeeeeeneeeseees 9 60 Restricting the Use of the Machine cccccecccseeceeeceeeeeeecceeeeeeeeseseseeesaeesaueesaeess 9 62 Counting the Number of Pages Printed cccccccccecccseceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeas 9 64 Printing an ACCOUNTING Report ccccccceecceecceeceeceeeceecaeeceeeaeecaueseesaueseeeseeseeeseees 9 66 Job Accounting Default Setting 2 0 ccccceccceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeseeeseeeeaeeeseeeaees 9 67 Unknown Login User Name Job ccccccccccecceccseecesceececeeceeecsee
132. ace e Perforated paper 11 13 Appendix gt Paper Special Paper This section describes printing onto special paper and print media The following paper and media can be used e Transparencies e Preprinted paper e Bond paper e Recycled paper e Thin paper from 45 g m to 59 g m or less e Letterhead e Colored paper e Prepunched paper e Envelopes e Cardstocks Hagaki e Thick paper from 106 g m to 256 g m or less e Labels e High quality paper When using these paper and media choose that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers such as laser printers Use the multi purpose tray for transparencies thick paper envelopes cardstocks and labels Choosing Special Paper Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine print quality will vary considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper Thus special paper is more likely than regular paper to cause printing problems Before purchasing special paper in volume try testing a sample to ensure the print quality is satisfactory General precautions when printing onto special paper are given below Note that we are not responsible for any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by moisture or specifications of special paper Select a cassette or multi purpose tray for special paper Transparencies Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing Transparen
133. achine name When using SSL select the checkbox beside SSL Unit Account ID Inch Set units of measurement When user login administration is enabled select the checkbox beside Authentication and enter Login User Name up to 321 characters and Password up to 64 characters When job accounting is enabled select the checkbox beside Account ID and enter the account ID as many as eight digits 2 21 Preparation before Use gt Energy Saver function Energy Saver function Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode Energy Saver Power amp Vie Low Power Mode To activate Low Power Mode press the Energy Saver key Touch panel and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to save power except the Energy Saver Power and Main Power indicators This status is referred to as Low Power Mode If print data is received during Low Power Mode the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing Also when fax data arrives while the machine is in Low Power Mode when using the optional fax the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing To resume perform one of the following actions The machine will be ready to operate within 10 seconds e Press any key on the operation panel e Open the document processor e Place originals in the document processor Note that ambient environmental conditions such as ventilation may cause the machine to respond more slowly Auto Low
134. ademarks or registered trademarks of ACCESS CO LTD in the United States Japan and NetFront Browser other countries e 2011 ACCESS CO LTD All rights reserved e Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and or its affiliates Java POWERED All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks designations and will not be used in this Operation Guide GPL LGPL This product contains GPL http www gnu org licenses gpl html and or LGPL http www gnu org licenses IgpI html software as part of its firmware You can get the source code and you are permitted to copy redistribute and modify it under the terms of GPL LGPL For further information including availability of the source code visit http www kyoceradocumentsolutions com gpl 1 9 Preface gt Legal and Safety Information Open SSL License Copyright c 1998 2006 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning feature
135. administration 10 10 ser Login Local Authentication ee User List login settings Hoe US EE eect if User Authorization GB0435_00 2 Add a user System Menu Counter Q A lt ea DeviceAdmin 2500 GB0440_00 Menu 3 Log out Logout The registered user logs in for operations Enter login user name and password 10 10 Login User Name Login Password Keyboard GB0723_00 amp 9 28 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration User Login Settings 4 Display the screen Use V or AN to scroll up and down r lt gt System Menu Counter Bp mene p Book One Touch oom P oe ___ nie System Menu Counter 10 10 L CtisS User Login Settings Job ie Settings Unknown ID Job Reject GB0054_03 GB0434_00 NOTE You can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below 10 10 Login User Name o Neme Login Login User Name Password Login Password Keyboard FS 6525MEP FS 6530MFP oO oO oO N N CY a 0 2 Configure the function System Menu Counter 10 10 a ff User List GB0435_02 Enabling Disabling User Login Administration gt page 9 30 N Adding a User gt page 9 32 Local User Authorization gt page 9 36 Editing and Deleting Users gt page 9 38 Si
136. aeeeeaeeseeeseesaeeeseeesagees 1 2 AALE D LEL EPESA EIA E EAA E EN E AE IA I EEA 1 3 Procautons Tor S ea cece eysce iin n on E r E te oats AE S 1 3 Legal Restriction ON Copying Scanning ccccecccsecesececeeeceeeceeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeesseeeseeeaaes 1 8 Legal and Safety Information cccccccsscccseeceeecceecceeeceeceeeeaeesueesaeeeeaeeseeesaeeseeeesenssaeesaess 1 9 Legal I IONMIAMION sainn iae AAEE E AEEA ARE AEAEE 1 9 Energy Saving Control Function cccccceccescecseeceeeeceeecueeceeeeeeeeseeesaeessesaueesaeens 1 12 Automatic 2 Sided Copy Function cccccccccsccceeeceeeeceeeseeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeeaeeees 1 12 Resource Saving Paper scccy sce tetoncecdcanedeess aeeatveddepacutcaanoeenauckobacnsoeesangusuescties dasceees 1 12 Environmental benefits of Power Management ccceccceeeceeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeees 1 12 Energy Star ENERGY STAR Program ccccccccceececeeceeeeceeeeeeeaeeeseeeseeeesaeeeeaes 1 13 About this Operation Guide cccccccceccceecceeeceeeceececeecaeecaeecuesaueceueesaeesauessuesueeeeeeseeenas 1 14 CONVENTIONS in This GUIdE ges cedecterce gecssicne ca seeseceicsienesuixndianadaitencebaeeeavbesodsieeeneecawcnsaechoest 1 14 Originals ANd Paper SIZES ccccsecceccceeeceeeccececeeeceecaueeceeecaeecsuecsueesueeseeecseessueeeas 1 16 2 Preparation before Use xrpiccicteee ssc ccetescsecatesenesavnececanesnsasseresscapanavoassaseenesaeeres 2 1 A
137. ail from clients to their servers 11 25 Appendix gt Glossary Status Page The page lists machine conditions such as the memory capacity total number of prints and scans and paper source settings Subnet Mask The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address A subnet mask represents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0 The number of bits in the prefix indicates the length of the network address The term prefix refers to something added to the beginning and in this context indicates the first section of the IP address When an IP address is written the length of the network address is indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash For example 24 in the address 133 210 2 0 24 In this way 133 210 2 0 24 denotes the IP address 133 210 2 0 with a 24 bit prefix network section This new network address section originally part of the host address made possible by the subnet mask is referred to as the subnet address When you enter the subnet mask be sure to set the DHCP setting to Off TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each other over a network TCP IP IPv6 TCP IP IPv6 is based on the current Internet protocol TCP IP IPv4 IPv6 is the next generation Internet protocol and expands the available address space wh
138. al Table 15 Cleaning Cloth Compartment 16 Original Loaded Indicator 17 Toner Container Stopper 18 Toner Container 19 Waste Toner Box 20 Paper Width Guide 21 Paper Length Guide 22 Multi Purpose Tray 23 Paper Width Guide 2 3 Preparation before Use gt Part Names 24 24 Option Interface Slot 2 25 Network Interface Connector 26 USB Interface Connector A2 27 USB Port B1 28 Option Interface Slot 1 29 Scanner Lock 30 Main Power Switch 31 Handles 32 Cassette Heater Switch 2 4 Preparation before Use gt Part Names 33 Top Cover 34 Tray Extension 35 Document Finisher Tray 36 Staple Cover 37 Staple Cartridge Holder 38 Bridge Unit Cover 2 5 Preparation before Use gt Part Names Operation Panel amp System Menu Counter Displays the System Menu Counter Displays the Interrupt Copy e screen screen Status Displays the Status Job Displays the Copy Ends operation logs out Job Cancel Cancel screen Copy screen on the Administration screen Puts the machine into Low Favorites Displays the Favorites Displays the screen for Power Mode Application Application screen sending x Puts the machine into Sleep Mode Recovers from Sleep Document Displays the Document Displays the FAX screen if in Sleep Mode Box Box screen s Lit when the machine s a main power is on
139. all images Follow Image Size The image is rotated if the rotated image fits on the paper NOTE This function is only enabled when Auto Image Rotation on page 4 16 is set to On If you want to enable the changed defaults immediately move to the function screen and press the Reset key Send Configures settings for sending functions Description Dest Check before Send When performing sending jobs display the confirmation screen of destinations after pressing the Start key Value Off On Entry Check for New Dest When adding new destination display the entry check screen to check the entered destination Value Off On Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Send and Forward Description Set whether to send the original to another destination and store it when sending images Forward Set the rule to send the original Multiple rules can be selected Value Forward Off On Rule FAX E mail Folder SMB Folder FTP NOTE FAX is displayed when the optional FAX kit is installed Destination Set the destination to use when storing originals Select the destination using either of the following methods e Address Book e Ext Address Book e Address Entry E mail e Address Entry Folder Color TIFF Compression Select the compression method for TIFF images handled on this machine Value TIFF V6 TTN2 Default Screen Use this procedure to
140. ally available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence Monotype Imaging License Agreement 1 Software shall mean the digitally encoded machine readable scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as well as the UFST Software 2 You agree to accept a non exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights styles and versions of letters numerals characters and symbols Typefaces solely for your own customary business or personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging Under the terms of this License Agreement you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three printers If you need to have access to the fonts on more than three printers you need to acquire a multiuser license agreement which can be obtained from Monotype Imaging Monotype Imaging retains all rights title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights are granted to you other than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement 3 To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging you agree to maintain the Software and other proprietary information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access to and use of the Software and Typefaces 4 You agree not to duplicate or copy the Sof
141. alue Short Perform Auto Drum Refresh as Short maximum 180 seconds Normal Perform Auto Drum Refresh as Standard maximum 360 seconds Long Perform Auto Drum Refresh as Long maximum 450 seconds NOTE When an error state such as condensation is detected Normal and Long may take a maximum of 630 seconds DP Adjustment Adjust scan action of the document processor Place the adjustment original in the document processor Press Start and adjustment begins NOTE This adjustment is for DP Leading edge and DP center adjust Use this adjustment when the copy is skewed when using the Document Processor or when advised by a Service Technician Call Service to obtain the adjustment original If you want to enable the changed defaults immediately move to the function screen and press the Reset key 9 27 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration User Login Administration User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine Enter correct login user name and password for user authentication to login Access are in three levels User Administrator and Machine Administrator The security levels can be modified only by the machine administrator First User Login Administration Follow these steps for the first user login administration For details about the configuration method refer to User Login Settings on page 9 29 1 Enable user login
142. and their descriptions are as follows 01 Connect a removable memory that can be written to 10 19 An error occurred in the removable memory The job stopped Press End The possible error codes and their descriptions are as follows 01 The amount of data that can be saved at once has been exceeded Restart the system or turn the power OFF ON If the error still occurs the removable memory is not compatible with the machine Use the removable memory formatted by this machine If the removable memory cannot be formatted it is damaged Connect a compatible removable memory Troubleshooting gt Responding to Messages Message Removable Memory is full Checkpoints Corrective Actions Job is canceled Press End Insufficient free space in the removable memory Delete unnecessary files Reference Page Remove originals in the document processor Are there any originals left in the document processor Remove originals from the document processor Replace all originals and press Continue Remove originals from the document processor put them back in their original order and place them again Press Continue to resume printing Press Cancel to cancel the job Replace MK S Message Scanner memory is full Send error Set cassette Checkpoints Have the paper width guide and paper length guide been loaded properly 10 20
143. any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Radio Tag Technology In some countries the radio tag technology used in this equipment to identify the toner container may be subject to authorization and the use of this equipment may consequently be restricted Other precautions for users in California the United States Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dftsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate 1 6 Preface gt Notice Warranty the United States FS 6525MFP FS 6530MFP MULTIFUNCTIONAL PRODUCT LIMITED WARRANTY KYOCERA Document Solutions America Inc and KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada Ltd both referred to as Kyocera warrant the Customer s new Multifunctional Product referred to as MFP and the new accessories installed with the initial installation of the MFP against any defects in material and workmanship for a period of one 1 year or 300 000 copies prints from date of installation whichever first occurs In the event the MFP or an accessory is found to be defective within the warranty period Kyocera s only obligation and the Customer s exclusive remedy shall be replacement of any defective parts Kyocera shall have no obligation to furnish labor This warranty covers Maintenance Kits and the components of Maintenance Kits included with the original MFP for a period of one year or 300 000 copies prints whichever first occurs Maintenance
144. aper Load Direction E Cassette Paper Load Direction o Original Orientation Original Orientation Top Edge Back Edge Left Top Edge Left top corner Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Staple Ready to copy 10 10 10 10 Op n n Copies 1 EO S41 s Staple Paper Zoom J Density off x Selection ESN joy UNYINal dye Auto 100 Normal 0 cay Text Photo gt he Duplex Combine Collate orr Y 4 oS Offset lt Sharpness GB0001_01 Close Add Edi Shortcut GB0002_05 Use VV or A to scroll up and down 3 49 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions 2 Select the staple position 1 staple or 2 staples Ready to copy 10 10 0i 1 staple 2 staples Others 2 staples e e GB0032_00 Others 1 Ready to copy 10 10 1 staple 2 staples Off 2 staples Others Cancel 014 amp 2 Select the staple position gt GB0032_00 Ready to copy 2 Off Z 1 staple Top Left iy 1 staple Top Right P 2 staples Left Cancel a a GB0033_00 Use V or AN to scroll up and down 3 Select the original orientation 10 10 10 10 Staple al 1 staples Right AJ Top Edge on Top Original Orientation Top Edge on Top E Top Edge
145. appears If user login administration is enabled the screen to enter the login user name and password appears Enter a login user name and password to login Refer to Login Logout on page 3 12 If the user has already registered the account information the account ID entry would be skipped Refer to Adding a User on page 9 32 Logout When the operations are complete press the Logout key to return to the account ID entry screen Logout 9 57 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Adding an Account This section explains how to add a new account The following entries are required Account Name Enter the account name up to 32 characters Account ID Enter the account ID as many as eight digits between 0 and 99999999 Restriction This Prohibits printing scanning or restricts the number of sheets to load Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 9 62 NOTE Any account ID that has already registered cannot be used Enter any other account ID 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9 55 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter E Cy i 2 i 2 Accounting List AN l DeTauIT Settung gt 1 1 m Qa oO oO N fo a GB0461_01 e Use V or AN to scroll up and down 2 Enter the account information Account Name Limit 32 Input 9 mw 1 N yj N lo Oo
146. aracters Host Name Host name or IP address of FTP server Up to 64 characters Path Path to the receiving folder Up to 128 characters For example User ScanData Otherwise the data will be saved in the home directory Login User Name FTP server login user name Up to 64 characters Login Password FTP server login password Up to 64 characters Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters N 6 23 sending gt Specifying Destination 5 Confirm the information Check the information Change the information as needed by pressing the item in question 10 10 Host Name Use V or A to scroll up and down pc001 scannerdata Login User Name abcdnet james smith Cancel GB0128_00 When specifying a computer or server port number as the destination press Port and enter the port number You can enter a number from 1 to 65 535 with a maximum of 5 digits Confirm the connection status 10 10 a 10 10 Host Name PC001 Connection Test Path pc001 scannerdata Next Destination 2 Port 139 Add to Address Book Login User Name abcdnet james smith Menu Cancel Connected appears when connection to the destination is correctly established If Cannot connect appears review the entry GB0020_00 Close GB0128_00 To enter multiple destinations press Next Destination and enter the next destination You can specify a combined total o
147. as their current status 2 Configure the function Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen The values for each category must be set separately If restrictions have been set for Command Center RX enter a password to access pages other than the startup page 2 25 Preparation before Use gt Command Center RX Settings for E mail Sending E mail Specifying the SMTP settings allows you to send images loaded onto this machine as E mail attachments To use this function this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol Before sending images loaded onto this machine as E mail attachments check the following e The network environment used to connect this machine to the mail server A full time connection via a LAN is recommended e SMTP Settings Use Command Center RX to register the IP address or host name of the SMTP server e If limits have been set on the size of E mail messages it may not be possible to send very large E mails The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below 1 Display the screen Click Settings gt Advanced gt SMTP gt General KYOCERA Command Center EX Start Basic Printer Scanner A Home v Advanced SMTP Login Menu L General E mail Recipient 1 E mail Recipient 2 E mail Recipient 3 SMTP Protocol on off SMTP Port Number 25 SMTP Server Name SMTP Server Timeout i0 seconds Au
148. ation Value Month Day Year Day Month Year Year Month Day Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT Choose the nearest listed location from the list Auto Panel Reset If no jobs are run for a certain period of time automatically reset settings and return to the default setting Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not Value Off On NOTE The time allowed to elapse before the panel is reset is set with the Panel Reset m Timer Panel Reset Timer If you select On for Auto Panel Reset set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel Reset Value 5 to 495 seconds every five seconds NOTE If you select Off for Auto Panel Reset the time display does not appear Low Power Timer Set amount of time before entering the Low Power mode Value 1 to 240 minutes 1 minute increments Auto Sleep Set Auto Sleep to automatically enter Sleep Mode after a period of inactivity Value Off On Vu NOTE Refer to Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2 23 for Sleep f The time allowed to elapse until the auto sleep function is activated is set with the Sleep Timer 9 24 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Item Description Sleep Level Detailed settings Select the Sleep level Set the Energy Saver mode to reduce power consumption even more than normal Sleep mode Value Quick Recovery Energy Saver NOTE If the optional Gigabit Ethernet Board is installed Energy Saver cannot be sp
149. ation of staple depletion will be indicated on the touch panel Leave the machine on and follow the instruction to replace the staple case Press Continue to print without stapling Press Cancel to cancel the job Reference Page Staple jam If a staple jam occurs the machine will stop and the location of the jam will be indicated on the touch panel Leave the machine on and follow the instruction to remove the jammed staple System error System error has occurred Follow the instructions on the touch panel When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses T Message The cover is open Checkpoints Is there any cover which is open Corrective Actions Close the cover indicated on the touch panel Reference Page The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for damage caused by a non genuine toner Is the installed toner container our own brand We will not be liable for any damage caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine If you want to continue press Next The phone receiver is off the hook Put down the receiver The print system connected to the current port is not supported by the printer driver Use a printer driver for this port that matches the print system Is the printer driver for this product used Check the product name of the machine and reinstall the print
150. ay 100 sheets 80 g m7 Letter A4 or less 25 sheets 80 g m more than Letter A4 Output Tray Inner Tray 250 sheets 80 g m Capacity Job Separator 50 sheets 80 g m Main Memory Standard 1 GB Maximum 2 GB Interface Standard USB Interface Connector 1 USB Hi Speed USB memory slot 2 USB Hi Speed Network interface 1 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX 1000 BASE T Option eKUIO 2 Operating Temperature 10 to 32 5 C 50 to 90 5 F Environment Humidity 15 to 80 Altitude 2 500 m 8 202 ft maximum Brightness 1 500 lux maximum Warm up Time Power on 20 seconds or less 22 C 71 6 F 60 Sleep 20 seconds or less 11 18 Appendix gt Specifications Dimension W x D x H FS 6525MFP 23 1 4x23 1 4x27 5 16 590x590x694 mm Description FS 6530MFP 23 1 4x23 1 4x27 5 16 590x590x694 mm Weight with toner container Space Required W x D Approx 114 84 Ib Approx 52 2 kg Approx 114 84 Ib Approx 52 2 kg 34 9 16 23 1 4 878x590 mm Using multi purpose tray Power Source 120 V Specification Model 120 V 60 Hz 10 9 A 230 V Specification Model 220 to 240V 50 Hz 60 Hz 5 8 A Options Copy functions Max Copy Speed Paper feeder single cassette Paper feeder double cassette Document finisher FAX kit Expansion memory Gigabit Ethernet Board Card Authentication Kit USB keyboard FS 6525MFP Letter A4 25 sheets min
151. be liable for lost profits lost data or any other incidental or consequential damages or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and Typefaces 9 Massachusetts U S A law governs this Agreement 10 You shall not sublicense sell lease or otherwise transfer the Software and or Typefaces without the prior written consent of Monotype Imaging 11 Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at FAR 252 227 7013 subdivision b 3 ii or subparagraph c 1 ii as appropriate Further use duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52 227 19 c 2 Preface gt Legal and Safety Information 12 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement understand it and agree to be bound by its terms and conditions Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this Agreement No change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized representatives of each party By opening this diskette package you agree to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement Energy Saving Control Function The device comes equipped with a Low Power Mode where energy consumption is reduced after a certain amount of time elapses since the device was last used as well as a Sleep where printer and fax functions
152. ceesaeesueeneesaseseeeneees 9 69 10 FrouUDIESNOOUNG seisine Er aE 10 1 Toner Container Replacement cccsscccecccseeceeeceueeceeeceeeceaeecaeecseecueeceeesueesaeessueseeeseas 10 2 Waste Toner Box Replacement ccccccceccseeceeceeeeceeceecceecaeecaeeceesaeeseeeseeseeeseeeseeseeeseees 10 4 PRODIA GING SADOS ierra a a sane deeea cases EAE T E 10 5 CEAN ser e E EE E E E E EE EE EE E EEE E E E 10 6 Original Cover Glass Platen sscsses02cdedecsnescossd sca sciadsrassnentpsesiehandeadsen nladeeabonibiesneamedusoedas 10 6 Document FroceSSOT Sapiesesaavecenne haddentue acu nawedepunticsiaiuentraes sietamenasiuns sucivaisen tein kein E EREE 10 6 SONNO IMIANMIIC ONS e2asccdenceuavceencnsccscsedancdeaeseaansence EE EE a E E EATA i TEA 10 8 Responding to Messages cccceccecccececeeceeeceeseecueeceesaueceueseeseuesaeeneesausseeeseeseeesseeaeees 10 13 ceang at 91 gt eg irine a a ene eE nee er ee EE eee 10 25 Jdam Lo ati n IIGIC ALORS sersissstirsieticotuaycarnceisdnatiun tee noriai aeaa EEEE 10 25 VICI UNDO SGC EAN scia EE E E 10 26 Inside the Right Cover 1 cccccccecccssecescceeeeceeeceeeceeeecaeesaeeseeesaseeaueesaeesaeessueseeseees 10 26 SSN seasons A ae oe acca e OE E E 10 27 inside the Right COV CFS ssnciiezsearecaeisane den emeaeeeerseldetnsdebeumneuetyientasxvaeedbounisseenesetesees 10 27 OM reese ct E E E taste 10 28 Optional Document Finisher cece cc eeecceeeceeeeeeeeseeeceeeeseee
153. ch One Touch Key j Address Book E mail at on Scan to USB Ready to store in Box ext Address Book I 1 2 w ivy R Iv vv Favorites 10 10 File T Format Book 2 sided Resolution PDF 1 sided File N Entry M Density ab 300x300dpi ame Normal 0 doc Cancel Select the type of original 2 sided or Book Ready to send 2 sided Others 1 Ready to send 10 10 d Others 10 10 Bg 2 sided Book d 3 38 Readytosend 000 O O to send 10 10 2 sided Book Original Mee cial 1 Mee cial AN Sending Size Gk Same as Original Size Za File Separation gt FI Scan Resolution UUSII Shortcu Use V or AN to scroll up and down GB0055_00 GB0081_01 GB0096_00 GB0013_00 GB0013_00 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions 2 Select the type of original Ready to send IReady to send 000 O ine Readytosend 000 O 10 10 Tg 1 1 sided Ey 2 sided Binding Left Right 2 ty 2 sided Binding Top Book Binding Left Cancel 3 8 8 Use VV or AN to scroll up and down 3 Select the original orientation 10 10 Ready to send 10 10 II gt sicieci 00k Original T 1 Top Edge on Left ee gt m 8 8 8 3 39 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Continuous Scan ony sona fen USB Scan a large number o
154. cies must meet the following conditions Heat resistance Must withstand at least 190 C Thickness 0 100 to 0 110 mm Material Polyester Dimensional accuracy 0 7 mm Squareness of corners 90 0 2 To avoid problems use the multi purpose tray for transparencies and load transparencies with the long side facing the machine If transparencies jam frequently at output try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected 11 14 Appendix gt Paper Label Be sure to feed labels from the multi purpose tray For selecting labels use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the machine and that the labels are not easily peeled from the carrier sheet Adhesives that stick to the drum or rollers and peeled labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure When printing onto labels you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble Top sheet Carrier sheet Labels consist of three layers as shown in the illustration The adhesive layer contains materials that are easily affected by the force applied in the machine The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is used This composition of labels may cause more problems The label surface must be covered completely with the top sheet Gaps between labels may cause peeling of labels resulting in a serious failure Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet When using such
155. ct a function 10 10 FAX Setup Energy Saver Setup Network Setup GB0840_00 3 Configure the function 10 10 1 Dialing RX Mode 2 Local FAX Info Sta rting Setup 3 Sound Volume 4 Rings This wizard will help you set 5 Output the basic settings to use the fax 6 Redial el Start the wizard Follow the instructions on the screen to configure settings 10 10 1 Dialing RX Mode Local FAX Info Sound Volume 4 Rings GB0841_00 Add the transmit terminal identification N W UI Output 6 Redial p GB0846_00 a NOTE If you experience difficulty configuring the settings refer to Help Screen on page 3 28 End Exits the wizard Settings configured so far are applied lt lt Previous Returns to the previous item Skip gt gt Advances to the next item without setting the current item Next gt Advances to the next screen lt Back Returns to the previous screen Complete Register the settings and exit the wizard 3 27 Common Operations gt Help Screen Help Screen If you have difficulty operating the machine you can check how to operate it using the touch panel When the help is displayed on the touch panel you can press it to display the Help screen How to read the screen Help titles Displays information about functions and machine operation Closes the Help screen and returns to the original screen Ready
156. d Security and Allow a program through Windows Firewall Control Panel Home Action Center System and Security Network and Internet Windows Firewg Check firewall status Hardware and Sound Programs System User Accounts and Family Allow remote access Appearance and Personalization Windows Update Turn automatic updating on or off Clock Language and Region NOTE Review your computer s status and resolve issues Troubleshoot common computer problems Safety View amount of RAM and processor speed See the name of this computer Change User Account Control settings Restore your computer to an earlier time Check the Windows Experience Index W Device Manager Check for updates View installed updates lf the User Account Control dialog box appears click the Continue button sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC P Windows Firewall Allowed Programs x Search Control Panel P Allow programs to communicate through Windows Firewall To add change or remove allowed programs and ports click Change settings What are the risks of allowing a program to communicate Py Change settings 1 Allowed programs and features Name Home Work Private Public O BranchCache Content Retrieval Uses HTTP O BranchCache Hosted Cache Client Uses HTTPS O BranchCache Hosted Cache Server Uses HTTPS O BranchCache Peer Discovery Uses WS
157. d Store 3 57 Index 5 Index 6 QUALITY CERTIFICATE This machine has passed all quality controls and final inspection F KYOCERA Document Solutions Europe B V Bloemlaan 4 2132 NP Hoofddorp The Netherlands Phone 31 20 654 0000 Fax 31 20 653 1256 KYOCERA Document Solutions Nederland B V Beechavenue 25 1119 RA Schiphol Rijk The Netherlands Phone 31 20 5877200 Fax 31 20 5877260 KYOCERA Document Solutions U K Limited 8 Beacontree Plaza Gillette Way Reading Berkshire RG2 OBS United Kingdom Phone 44 118 931 1500 Fax 44 118 931 1108 KYOCERA Document Solutions Italia S p A Via Verdi 89 91 20063 Cernusco s N MI Italy Phone 39 02 921791 Fax 39 02 92179 600 KYOCERA Document Solutions Belgium N V Sint Martinusweg 199 201 1930 Zaventem Belgium Phone 32 2 7209270 Fax 32 2 7208748 KYOCERA Document Solutions France S A S Espace Technologique de St Aubin Route de l Orme 91195 Gif sur Yvette CEDEX France Phone 33 1 69852600 Fax 33 1 69853409 KYOCERA Document Solutions Espana S A Edificio Kyocera Avda de Manacor No 2 28290 Las Matas Madrid Spain Phone 34 91 6318392 Fax 34 91 6318219 KYOCERA Document Solutions Finland Oy Atomitie 5C 00370 Helsinki Finland Phone 358 9 47805200 Fax 358 9 47805390 KYOCERA Document Solutions Europe B V Amsterdam NL Z rich Branch Hohlstrasse 614 8048 Z rich Switzerland Phon
158. d as well as virgin paper certified under environmental stewardship initiatives or carrying recognised ecolabels which meet EN 12281 2002 or an equivalent quality standard be used This machine also supports printing on 64 g m paper Using such paper containing less raw materials can lead to further saving of forest resources 1 EN12281 2002 Printing and business paper Requirements for copy paper for dry toner imaging processes Your sales or service representative can provide information about recommended paper types Environmental benefits of Power Management To reduce power consumption when idle this machine is equipped with a power management function that automatically activates energy saving mode when the machine is idle for a certain period of time Although it takes the machine a slight amount of time to return to READY mode when in energy saving mode a significant reduction in energy consumption is possible It is recommended that the machine be used with the activation time for energy saving mode set to the default setting Preface gt Legal and Safety Information Energy Star ENERGY STAR Program We have determined as a participating company in the International Energy Star Program that this product is compliant with the standards laid out in the International Energy Star Program ENERGY STAR is a voluntary energy efficiency program with the goal of developing and promoting the use of products with high energy
159. d memory down and into the machine 4 Reinstall the covers Removing the Memory Module To remove a memory module remove the right cover and the memory slot cover from the machine Then carefully push out the two socket clamps Ease the memory module out of the socket to remove Verifying the Expanded Memory To verify that the memory module is working properly test it by printing a status page Refer to Report on page 9 5 N Card Authentication Kit B User login administration can be performed using IC cards To do so it is necessary to register IC card information on the previously registered local user list For more information about how to register this information refer to the IC Card Authentication Kit Operation Guide Appendix gt Optional Equipment IB 50 Gigabit Ethernet Board The Gigabit Ethernet Board provides a high speed connection for the Gigabit per second interface Since the kit was designed to work with TCP IP and NetBEUI protocols in the same way as the main unit it fulfills the network printing demands on Windows Macintosh and UNIX environments This expansion kit is also compatible with ThinPrint USB Keyboard A USB keyboard can be used to enter information into the text fields on the operation panel Please contact your dealer or service representative for information on keyboards that are compatible with your MFP before you purchase one Optional Function You can use the optional applications
160. deddsnsteddcaeeees 6 17 Choosing from the Address Book cccccccceccceeceeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeeeeseeeseeseueeaueeseeeees 6 17 Choosing by One Touch Key cccccccceccceecceeecaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeseueseeeeseeeseeeseeeseeesaeeeaes 6 19 Entering a New E mail Address cccccccsecceccceceaeeceeceeesaeesaeeceeeeeesaeecueeueesasseeeess 6 20 Specifying a New PC Folder ccccceccceccceeeceeecceeeseecaueceueecueecaueceueecueeseeesseessueeaas 6 21 Checking and Editing Destinations cece cece ceccceecee cess esse eeseeeseeeceeeeseeeseeesaeeeas 6 25 Sending to Different Types of Destinations Multi Sending cecceeeseeeeee ees 6 26 Registering Destinations in the Address BOOK ccccccceccseeceeeeeeeneeceeeeeeeaeeseeeseeeaeeeaeeeaes 6 27 Adnoga O70 9 2 6 eeeeneren ee ee eee een E aS ee eee ee eee 6 27 PUN GOO ea E E E ARa A A O E 6 31 Editing and Deleting Address Book Entries ccccccccsecceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeneees 6 34 Adding a Destination on One Touch Key sannannennsnnnnnnnnnenrerrsrrsnnnnrnnrnrrnnrrnrrnnrnrrnnrnnrenenne 6 36 Adding a Destination sess casicn incre teem ansncinecciansp tou piconandanedaceoat use danuatouneoanetetestanandengaser 6 36 Editing and Deleting One TOUCH Key ccc cecccceecce cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeseesaeess 6 38 Sending FUNCUONS ee ccetrecerecnctieaceatacmcteuseneeieceeaencacteabeacnaretsaaeselousce sear A E a a
161. dnet com PC001 is the computer name PC001 abcdnet com is the full computer name After checking the computer name click the Close button to close the System Properties screen In Windows XP after checking the computer name click the Cancel button to close the System Properties screen 6 5 sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC Making a note of the user name and domain name Check the domain name and user name for logging onto Windows 1 Display the window From the Start menu select All Programs or Programs Accessories and then Command Prompt The Command Prompt window appears 2 Check the domain name and user name At the Command Prompt enter net config workstation and then press Enter G E fe Command Prompt os a Microsoft Windows Version 6 1 7600 Copyright lt c gt 2669 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved C Users james smith gt net config workstation Computer name Full Computer name User name Workstation active on NetBT_Tcpip_ XXXXRXXR RRRR RRAK XRRR RARRRRRARRRRA eititititititititatatats Pe Software version Jindoys 7 Ultimate Workstation domain ABCDNET Logon domain ABCDNET COM Open Timeout Csec gt A COM Send Count Chyte gt COM Send Timeout msec The command completed successfully C Users james smith gt e Check the user name and domain name Screen example user name james smith and domain name ABCDNET sendin
162. dvanced search by type of registered destination E ada a gt mail Folder SMB FTP FAX or Group 003 Support department 0234567 c gt 004 Support department BOX gt V Use V or A to scroll up and down Displays details for individual destinations GB0429_00 Select one destination contact or group from the Address Book You can specify a destination by address number by pressing the Quick No Search key 6 36 Sending gt Adding a Destination on One Touch Key 5 You can also press Menu to perform a more detailed search Select the address 10 10 E 10 10 Address Book All YQ 001 pm Sales department 1 0123456 ce Marron Dawn Search Name 002 Sales department 1 abc ee gt 1 2 lt 003 Support department 0234567 c gt Search No 004 Support department BOX Geo Vv Sort Name ae es S 8 l l O S E 8 1 Use V or A to scroll up and down Narrow Down Advanced search by type of registered destination E mail Folder SMB FTP FAX or Group Search Name and Search No Searches by destination name or address number Sort Name and Sort No Sorts the list by destination name or address number Enter the One Touch Key name Select the address 10 10 Address Book All IYK Sales department 1 Input 18 Limit 24 001 pm Sales department 1 0123456 002 Sales department 1 abc c gt 1 2 gt 004 Supp
163. e 41 44 9084949 Fax 41 44 9084950 KYOCERA Document Solutions Deutschland GmbH Otto Hahn Strasse 12 40670 Meerbusch Germany Phone 49 2159 9180 Fax 49 2159 918100 m H T KYOCERA Document Solutions Austria GmbH Eduard Kittenberger Gasse 95 1230 Vienna Austria Phone 43 1 863380 Fax 43 1 86338 400 KYOCERA Document Solutions Nordic AB Esbogatan 16B 164 75 Kista Sweden Phone 46 8 546 550 00 Fax 46 8 546 550 10 KYOCERA Document Solutions Norge NUF Postboks 150 Oppsal 0619 Oslo Norway Phone 47 22 62 73 00 Fax 47 22 62 72 00 KYOCERA Document Solutions Danmark A S Ejby Industrivej 60 DK 2600 Glostrup Denmark Phone 45 70223880 Fax 45 45765850 KYOCERA Document Solutions Portugal Lda Rua do Centro Cultural 41 Alvalade 1700 106 Lisboa Portugal Phone 351 21 843 6780 Fax 351 21 849 3312 KYOCERA Document Solutions South Africa Pty Ltd 49 Kyalami Boulevard Kyalami Business Park 1685 Midrand South Africa Phone 27 11 540 2600 Fax 27 11 466 3050 KYOCERA Document Solutions Russia LLC Botanichesky pereulok 5 Moscow 129090 Russia Phone 7 495 741 0004 Fax 7 495 741 0018 KYOCERA Document Solutions Middle East Dubai Internet City Bldg 17 Office 157 P O Box 500817 Dubai United Arab Emirates Phone 971 04 433 0412 KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc 2 28 1 chome Tamatsukuri Chuo ku Osaka 540 8585 Japan Phone 81 6 676
164. e QWERTY QWERTZ AZERTY Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu USB Keyboard Type Item Description USB Keyboard Type Select the type of USB keyboard that you want to use Value US English US English with Euro French German Offset One Page Documents Description Offset One Page Documents Set whether one page documents are sorted Value Off On NOTE This setting is displayed when an optional document finisher is installed Copy Configures settings for copying functions Description Auto Paper Selection If Auto is selected for Paper Selection set the paper size selection method when the zoom changes Value Most Suitable Size Select paper based on the current zoom and the size of the original Same as Original Size Select paper that matches the size of the original regardless the zoom Auto Priority When a paper source of different size from the original is selected select whether automatic zoom reduce zoom is performed Value Off On Reserve Next Priority Once the scan of the original is complete the basic screen will be displayed and you can proceed to the next operation Value Off On Auto Image Rotation Action Set whether the image is rotated when the orientation of the document to be printed is different from the orientation of the paper Value Unrotated Manual Copy If a paper source or zoom ratio is specified the image is not rotated Apply All Rotates
165. e 4 2 display the screen Ready to copy 10 10 iii COPES ff B _ Paper A Zoom ll Density LE vE Selection Auto 100 E a Duplex errr Collate 1 sided gt gt 1 sided Collate GBO0001_01 2 Select the function 2 in 1 or 4 in 1 10 10 Others GB0016_00 Others Ready to copy 10 10 Ge z 2in1 4in1 Others v E 2 Select the desired Combine option 10 10 10 10 Combine 2 Off t GB0016_00 2K 2 in 1 Lto R T to B 1 2 2in 1 R to L B to T Z 4 in 1 Right then Down GB0017_00 GB0018_00 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Copying gt Copying Functions 3 Sets the boundary line type Ready to copy 10 10 10 10 None Combine 2 in 1 L to R T to B Border Line 1 None 1 1 Original Orientation Top Edge on Top _ Solid Line 4 Dotted Line Positioning Mark 4 Select the original orientation Ready to copy 10 10 Ready to copy 10 10 Combine 2 in 1 Lto R T to B Border Line GB0017_01 mn G A Top Edge on Top None ey Top Edge on Left Original Orientation Top Edge on Top 1 1 GB0017_01 a If the original is placed on the platen replace the original and press the Start key After scanning all originals press Finish Scan to start copyin
166. e a e E 9 53 First JOD ACCOUN S CUUP csisscsueadsubessncadssasrunanunneuebiatissteasisnbinvindiad bash a Re eE rbe aA rE iD 9 53 JODMACCOUNMMG SENOS Sassi oiaacas tueatindenas stmineenumcadanmseuis a a as E eaae 9 55 Enabling Disabling Job Accounting ccccceccccseeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeseeeeesaeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeseeseesaeeeeeas 9 56 EOI OOO saersi Erne E EE EEEE A E E E E E seems aeseseunoaaeed 9 57 PAGGIING an ACO OUE anaE S E E EE 9 58 Editing and Deleng ACCOUNTS siisrrsisrnengena a a Disaannsuasisuerasuasaeudanssatauansuiaans 9 60 Restricting the Use of the Machine cccccesccsssccceececeeseceuseceuceceusensesensusesaesensuseseesesusenseseneeeesaseens 9 62 Counting the Number of Pages Printed ccccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeaeeesaaeeseaeeesaeessaeesseeesaaeeeseeesseseeeaes 9 64 Prning aM ACCOUNTING REDOT ae ciciscsdausandensdsasindadaconsesataddanvidubcaduniiauenadismesanndbinidaatiedarunbinas srsaxtdasnaneabadiails 9 66 JOD ACCOUNTING DGTAUIL SeN waiscimanaiacasadnstenisonsnaiaiasewnnadanasuninnctacudainuind ai angaa aieiai 9 67 Unknown Login User Name Job cccccccccsscccssscceeeecsesecneeceeaeseeasecsaueeeaueesaasesseeesaesenseecseeensusenseesenaess 9 69 9 1 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu System Menu Configure settings related to overall machine operation Operation Method The system menu is operated as follows 1 Display the screen
167. e different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered Copier Printer Count Format When Total is selected for Copier Print Total Total number of pages used for copying and printing Printer Count When Individual is selected for Copier Total number of pages used for copying Printer Count Total number of pages used for printing Shared statistics Total number of pages scanned Total number of pages scanned for copying Total number of pages faxed Total number of other pages scanned Total number of pages received Total number of pages sent Total duration of fax transmissions Total number of duplex pages printed Total number of 1 sided pages printed Total number of combine 2 in 1 pages Total number of combine 4 in 1 pages Total number of non combine pages printed For count by paper size page counts will be printed by paper size under Paper Count 4 Prepare paper Check that Letter or A4 paper is loaded in the cassette 2 Display the screen Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9 55 display the screen 3 Print reports 10 10 Job Accounting Print Accounting Report 1 2 lotal Job Accounting Each Job Accounting GB0461_02 9 66 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Job Accounting Default Setting Sets default settings related to job accounting Display the scre
168. e machine is network connected and WSD Scan page 9 22 is set to On in the network settings For information on operating the computer refer to the computer s help or the operation guide of your software Installing Driver Software for Windows 7 4 Display the window From the Start menu select Network 2 Install the driver Right click the machine s icon Kyocera XXX XXX and then click Install NOTE lf the User Account Control window appears click Continue If the Found New Hardware window appears click Cancel During the installation double click the icon shown on the task bar to display the Driver Software Installation screen When Your devices are ready to use is displayed on the screen the installation is completed Using WSD 1 Press the Send key Send 2 Place the originals For details refer to Loading Originals on page 3 7 N 6 45 Sending gt WSD Scan 3 Display the screen Ready to send 10 10 Ready to send 10 10 n S z Dest 0 l oni Dest Q Recall haded eT Check ee oy One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book WSD Scan ip 2 2 E mail Folder GB0055_00 GBO0055_ 01 4 Scan the originals Procedure using this machine Ready to send 10 10 E From Computer From Operation Panel gt 1 1 L G GB0648_00 2 Select the destination computer 10 10 Reload Cancel GB0649_00 Updates the list D
169. e the destination To edit the destination 1 __ EE gt E a 10 10 10 10 Address Book All Iva 2 019 4 Sales department 1 002 i Support department Add 001 G SYSTEM DEP 003 fp Sales department 1 Member 2 Menu Cancel Next gt GB0396_01 GB0785_00 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Select the destination contacts or group to edit You can specify a destination by address number by pressing the Quick No Search key e 10 10 Sales department 1 Use V or A to scroll up and down Cancel GB0786_00 Change the information as needed by pressing the item in question 6 34 Sending gt Registering Destinations in the Address Book SS 10 10 Name Sales department 1 E mail Address GB0786_00 Vv e To delete a member group To delete a member from a group select the destination you wish to delete and press Delete the trash can icon e 10 10 mw ooo i 3 Name Support department 2 a Sales department 1 0123456 Member Memberf 2 Support department 0234567 Address Number Auto 1 1 End GB0787_00 GB0114_04 e it 10 10 gt Support department 0234567 am Name Support department Member Member 1 1 1 gt Address Number Auto 5 S iE S o oO To delete y 10 10 Address Book All Add Edit D 019 4 Sales department 1 ea 002 he S
170. ecified Set whether to use the Energy Saver mode for the following functions individually Network USB Cable Card Reader RAM Disk FAX Application Value Off On NOTE When the machine enters Energy Saver the data stored in the RAM disk will be deleted In addition the machine does not wake from sleep mode when it receives print data from a PC connected by USB cable Also the ID card cannot be recognized Sleep Timer Set amount of time before entering Sleep Value 1 to 240 minutes 1 minute increments NOTE If you select Off for Auto Sleep the time display does not appear Auto Error Clear Error Clear Timer If an error occurs during processing processing stops to wait for the next step to be taken by the user In the Auto Error Clear mode automatically clear the error after a set amount of time elapses For details refer to Responding to Messages on page 10 13 Value Off On If you select On for Auto Error Clear set the amount of time to wait before automatically clearing errors Value 5 to 495 seconds every five seconds NOTE If you select Off for Auto Error Clear the time display does not appear Interrupt Clear Timer Set the period after which the machine reverts to Normal mode when it has been set to Interrupt Copy mode and then left unused Value 5 to 495 seconds every five seconds 9 25 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Adjustmen
171. ee eee eee ee es 11 23 DV Ntsc E td se era ns eit eee ace dren eco eed sada hansen aanleauneetetane en Index 1 Vi Qu ick Guide Be sure to read Precautions for Use before using this machine To make copies P It copies Simply press the Start key to make copies You can also fine tune the copy settings by changing the 7 s paper size adjusting the density etc To print m It prints You can print via a network or print a PDF file directly from USB memory Call Printing p rint over What you want Copying with Aen i Print via a the USB to do specific settings Removable USB network connection Memory Install the printer driver on your computer 2 14 Loading Paper 3 2 Loading Originals 3 7 Printing Documents Operation Copying 4 2 Stored in Printing from Applications 5 2 Removable USB Memory 7 3 Vil To send documents Ta It sends You can send scanned images via a network Or you can also store scanned images in USB memory Administrator tasks Saving eee you want Send as E mail anh poet Documents to o do USB Memory Connecting Cables Plug the USB memory Network Setup LAN Cable Connection Create a shared folder on the destination computer 6 7 Editing Destination Address Book Adding One Touch Keys 6 17 Loading Originals 3 7 wep om ow ow o Saving Documents Operation Sending 6 2 to USB Memory Scan to USB 7 6 If the destination is not
172. eeeesaeeeseeeeseeeeseeeesseeeesaees 2 15 Uninstalling the SOMWANS savssdsicscsnse ansnxanciaasauannsianbaavindvasenianwdyasdusxedsvaneniansedDhesaasonasansin scan aieousndthanarasonanane 2 17 Installing Printer Driver in Macintosh ccecccseecceeececeeeecae cece eeeeeeeseeeeseneesseeeseeeseeeeseuseseeeesueesseneeneees 2 18 Seng TWAIN DIVOT ssshtcrtecctisiveapecsadoarsudinssaasemndsuhnsuummeibsraueatsnbanuudaeangacousigadssduaanabhnsbiebnjauteetatbuouoncessien 2 20 SCING WIA DAVOT masenna E E E ae E nas 2 21 Enar Saver IUNCHONE orriren erna EESE Er E E ES EEEE EEEE EErEE 2 22 Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode cccccceececeeeeeeeeeceeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeesseeesseseneneens 2 22 Sleep and UO scant ha teases certs espe pred Saenz ndognpecas degdeseeadsaxdatosd ededen cede sates eeneaate 2 23 Macnine SOLID VVIZ AIO spernere oier a EOE E E EE E E 2 24 Command Center RX Settings for E mail ccccccccsseecceececceeeeceeeceesaeeeeseueeessaeeeeseueeesaueeeseeeesseeeessaueeessags 2 25 SANO E A are EA E E E E 2 26 2 1 Preparation before Use gt Part Names Part Names Machine Document Processor Platen Original Size Indicator Plates Slit Glass Operation Panel Inner Tray Front Cover Cassette 1 USB Memory Slot A1 10 Right Cover 1 11 Handles 12 Job Separator Tray oO ON O Oo A WO N Preparation before Use gt Part Names 13 Original Width Guides 14 Origin
173. ees 6 39 SARAN IZO aa E EE ee AEE E REO 6 40 File Separa UON imoer an a a i n AA EE O AET EEA 6 42 E mail Subject BOdyY tenedondanccsssninindcandindannciasssinywedeunnaleddwesilsnalldemdsannciceseduatinddwantueancadieass 6 43 A EMCI OO TA ie a E E A 6 44 WRO ee E ne EE E E E 6 45 Scanning using TWAIN aasainnnnsennennnnnsnnsnnnennnrnsnnsnrsrnnnrnrrrsnrsnrnnrnnrnnrrsnrsrrnrennrnnrrnnrenrnrrnnrnnrnenn 6 48 DOCUMEN BOX s aE ee cece cece ee 7 1 What is Document BOX ecccncisseniotsnaiesaicncscicet ance Sete aaadndddedceannsoaedbunbededesteiendieicesuecdiade niotededaemess 1 2 Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory cccccceccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeenes 1 3 Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB cc eccccceeccecseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeeesees 7 6 Removing USB Memory soca ccnccnsetecccteencdunatanaieroncsiopsnedaainyaincahebasonacendawencoues momaueneietammdnaaseasedendaeus 7 9 Functions for Document BOX secccecccecctensccesisenancatecueds ean decade tacsdsideadedacidensddeandsweeadnseedencesneusseteeds 7 10 DUDI Greene eee eee ent et en neers erat ae mn ne Teme m Ear nen nr Sane MN nr ere mes era er eae ey Tee 7 11 Encrypted PDF Password sacsicitissaiatniadndt vane ptecareutic decease sieaslsanuentiainuniuesiiie amneabbeiedadtubientnte 7 12 JPEG A co a ca 3 oa E E E E eee ee eee eee ees ae 7 13 ARo PILO a gt 0 gt ee eee ee eee ee eee ee ene eee oer 7 14 108 9 818 kee 74 ee ne ee eee ee eee eee 7 1
174. efficiency in order to help prevent global warming By purchasing SNAR ENERGY STAR qualified products customers can help reduce emissions of greenhouse gases during product use and cut energy related costs 1 13 Preface gt About this Operation Guide About this Operation Guide This Operation Guide contains the following chapters Chapter Contents Preface Includes information about operating precautions trademarks and this manual Preparation before Use Provides information about part names connecting cables and setting up and configuring the machine Common Operations Explains overall machine operation including loading paper and originals and logging in and out Copying Describes the functions you can use when copying Printing Provides information about functionality that is available when using the machine as a printer Sending Describes the functions you can use when sending originals Document Box Provides a basic guide to using document boxes Status Job Cancel Explains how to check the job status and job history and how to cancel jobs being printed or waiting to print Also explains how to check the remaining paper and device status and how to cancel fax transmission Setup Registration and User Explains system menu functionality related to overall machine operation job Management accounting and user management Troubleshooting Explains how to respond to error indication
175. en 1 Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9 55 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 Apply Limit Subsequently Individual 1 1 Accounting List Default Setting gt Count by Paper Size gt GB0461_01 GB0481_00 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Setting Items Description Apply Limit This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction Value Immediately Job stops when the counter reaches its limit Subsequently Printing scanning of the job continues but the subsequent job will be rejected Alert Only Job continues while displaying an alert message Copier Printer Count You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown either the total of both or each of copying and printing individually The selection may influence restriction on the count and count method Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 9 62 Counting the Number of A Pages Printed on page 9 64 and Printing an Accounting Report on page 9 66 for details Value Total Individual Default Counter Limit When you add a new account you can change the default restrictions on the number of pages used Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 9 62 X Value 1 to 9 999 999 in 1 sheet increments 9 67 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Count by Paper Size Desc
176. en aS MECESSANY ef fe copies operation messages paper Zoom BB density Selection e coal Auto 100 Normal 0 Displays available functions ee ee a ee ee Mr Duplex Combine ow erri COllate 3 J oS gt Offset 3 1 sided gt gt 1 sided Off Collate a E ere lt lt Functions Shortcut 1 Shortcut 2 sy Favorites om ZE J i Configures more advanced function Displays Favorites settings Displays shortcuts Displays the status of the e operation messages Auto Original Orientation Displays available functions and Lie asee Scrolls up and down when the list of 14 1 l ae settings S values cannot be displayed in its g ontrety on a single screen Inner tray Return to the previous screen AORERE Registers functions as shortcuts ortcu 2 Preparation before Use gt Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables Check the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network and prepare the necessary cables for your environment Connection Example Determine the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network by referring to the illustration below Connecting a scanner to your PC network with a network cable 1000BASE T 100BASE TX or 10BASE T Command Center RX Network settings Scanner Network Send E mail default settings User and Sends the image data of scanned destination registration Originals to the des
177. er Select whether or not to reject usage of copy functions Select whether or not to reject usage of the send functions FAX Transmission Select whether or not to reject usage of the FAX transmissions Storing in Box Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the document boxes Storing in Memory Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the removable memory 9 47 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration For Group ID specify PrimaryGroupID assigned by ActiveDirectory of Windows If you are using Windows Server 2008 check At tribute Editor tab of user properties If you are using Windows Server 2000 2003 check ADSIEdit ADSIEdit is a support tool in cluded on the installation CD or DVD for Windows Server OS under SUPPORT TOOLS This item is displayed when the optional fax is installed Kk 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 29 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 Group Authorization 2 On User Login Network Authentication Local User List Simple login settings 1 1 System Menu Counter j IIT geperserense Group Authorization Set gt Nn se ro Q fe Q a 0 1 1 GB0452_00 2 Enter the group information Group ID 10 10 1 4294967295 1 2 Group Name GB0458_00 Input 7 ae 1 Limit 128 G
178. er driver The slit glass requires cleaning Clean the slit glass using the cleaning cloth supplied with the document processor This memory is not formatted Is the removable memory formatted by this machine Perform Format on this machine Toner container not installed Install the toner container Toner is empty Toner is running out 10 21 Replace the toner container It is almost time to replace the toner container Obtain a new toner container Troubleshooting gt Responding to Messages U Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Unknown Toner Installed Is the installed toner container We will not be liable for any damage our own brand caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine Unknown Toner Installed PC Does the installed toner Install the specified container container s regional specification match the machine s Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Warning low memory F Cannot start the job Try again later Responding to Send Error FoTo Error Corrective Actions Reference Page 1101 Failed to send the e mail Check the host name of the SMTP server on the Command 2 26 Center RX Failed to send via FTP Check the host name of FTP 6 23 Failed to send via SMB Check the host name of SMB 6 23 1102 Failed to send via SMB Check the SMB settings 6 24 e Login user name and logi
179. er driver 3 Click the Printing Preferences button on the General tab 4 Select the default settings and click the OK button For the settings refer to Printer driver User Guide Printer Driver Help The printer driver includes Help To learn more about print settings display the printer driver print settings screen and display Help using either of the methods explained below F Properties Quick Print Basic Layout Finishing Imaging Publishing Job Advanced i pele i Cola i Orientation rint on both Multiple pages EcoPrint sides per sheet e Click the button in the upper right corner of the screen and then click the item you want to know about e Click the item you want to know about and press the F1 key on your keyboard 5 4 Printing gt Printing Data Saved on the Printer Printing Data Saved on the Printer Print data can be saved in the machine s Job Box and printed when needed Private Print Private Print stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver as a Private Print Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Private Print using the printer driver NOTE RAM disk mode must be enabled For details refer to RAM Disk Setting on page 9 23 X 1 Display the screen 10 10 Document Box Removable Memory Document Box 10 10 Sub Address Box A Proof and Hold 3 gt
180. er when printing This is recommended for test copies where faded printing is not a problem Value Off On Override A4 Letter Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter which are similar in size as the same size when printing Value Off A4 and Letter are not regarded as the same in size On A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in size The machine will use whichever size is in the paper source Select binding orientation for duplex mode Value 1 sided 2 sided Bind LongEdge 2 sided Bind ShortEdge Orientation Set the default number of copies from 1 to 999 Value 1 to 999 copies Set the default orientation Portrait or Landscape Value Portrait Landscape Wide A4 Turn this to on to increase the maximum number of characters that can be printed in a line for an A4 page 80 characters at 10 pitch and Letter size page 80 characters at 10 pitch This setting is only effective in PCL 6 emulation Value Off On Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Form Feed TimeOut LF Action Description Receiving print data from the computer the machine may sometimes wait if there is no information signaling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed When the preset timeout passes the machine automatically prints paper The options are between 5 and 495 seconds Value 5 to 495 seconds Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code
181. ered destination E 001 L Sales department 1 ab l ee eraren abe mail Folder SMB FTP or FAX Y 002 Support department 0234567 cm __ 002 Support department BOX a vy Use Vv or A to scroll up and down d Displays details for individual destinations GB0428_01 You can specify a destination by address number by pressing the Quick No Search key sending gt Registering Destinations in the Address Book You can also press Menu to perform a more detailed search 10 10 SSS SSS Ss 10 10 Address Book All IYK j 001 pla Sales department 1 0123456 c Pa Search Name E 001 E Sales department 1 abc cm 1 1 2 002 Support department 0234567 aw Search No E 002 Support department NM Sort Name A O 8 Ena a 7 A F 8 9 oO Use V or AN to scroll up and down Narrow Down Advanced search by type of registered destination E mail Folder SMB FTP or FAX Search Name and Search No Searches by destination name or address number Sort Name and Sort No Sorts the list by destination name or address number NOTE To cancel a selection press the corresponding checkbox to clear the check mark 6 Accept the members 10 10 re 10 Address Book All Fre ce Q ty V 001 fia Sales department 1 0123456 B Sales department 1 0123456 ce E 001 5 Sales department 1 abc Support department 0234567 am 1 2 1 1 v 002 Sup
182. ers Selecting media type at multi purpose tray the name after change will be displayed Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Function Defaults Item File Format Original Orientation Description Select the default type of the files to be sent Value PDF TIFF JPEG XPS Set the original orientation defaults Value Top Edge Top Top Edge Left Collate Offset Set the defaults for Collate Offset Value Off Collate Only Offset Each Page Offset Each Set File Separation Select the default file separation setting Value Off Each Page Scan Resolution Select the default scanning resolution Value 600x600dpi 400x400dpi Ultra Fine 300x300dpi 200x400dpi Super Fine 200x200dpi Fine 200x100dpi Normal Color Selection Select the default color mode for scanning documents Value Auto Color Gray Auto Color Color B amp W Full Color Grayscale Black amp White Original Image Set the default original document type Value Text Photo Photo Text Graphic Map Text for OCR Printer Output Background Density Adj Select the default value for background density adjustment Value Off Auto Manual Darker 5 EcoPrint Select the EcoPrint default Value Off On Prevent Bleed through Set the default value for preventing bleed through Value Off On Zoom Select the enlarged reduced default when paper size sending size changed after the original
183. estination from the list The selected destinations are indicated by a checkmark in the check box 6 17 sending gt Specifying Destination Destination Search 10 10 DA Address Book All Q Searches by destination name V 001 ie Sales depart nent 1 123456 C Advanced search by type of registered destination E Support department 123 456789 co Hoo2 55 Support department 12304567890 E mail Folder SMB FTP FAX or Group 003 Sales department 1 12345 com uw 004 Support department 11111 com ew Ew Eee Gos el GB0426_00 Displays details for individual destinations You can specify a destination by address number by pressing the Quick No Search key You can also press Menu to perform a more detailed search 10 10 ee R 10 10 Address Book All ly E Vi 001 i Sales department 1 123456 T Narrow Down 002 Support department 123 456789 co Gal Search Name 1 1 003 Sales department 1 12345 com c Search No _ 004 46 Support department 11111 com cm Sort Name GB0426_00 tia GB0396_00 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Narrow Down Advanced search by type of registered destination E mail Folder SMB FTP FAX or Group Search Name and Search No Searches by destination name or address number Sort Name and Sort No Sorts the list by destination name or address number NOTE You may choose mul
184. f _ Collate J GB0001_01 4 Entering the copy quantity 0 Cl NOTE O O Press the Clear key to change the copy quantity O O O Q O Q 4 2 Copying gt Basic Operation 5 Start copying Sta rt Press the Start key to start copying Copying gt Copying Functions Copying Functions Copy screen shows the commonly used functions By pressing Functions other selectable functions will be shown as a list Use V or A to select the function What do you want to do Specify the paper size and type Reference Page Paper Selection gt page 3 42 Reduce or enlarge the original Zoom gt page 4 5 Adjust the density Density gt page 3 51 Copy on both sides of the paper Duplex gt page 4 8 Combine 2 or 4 originals into 1 sheet Combine gt page 4 12 Collate the output documents in page order Offset the output documents by set Collate Offset page 3 44 Specify the original size Specify the original orientation to scan in the correct direction Original Size gt page 3 32 Original Orientation gt page 3 34 Copy mixed size originals Mixed Size Originals gt page 3 35 Change the paper output Staple in the output documents Paper Output gt page 3 43 Staple gt page 3 49 Select original image type for best results Original Image gt page 3 53 Save toner when printing EcoPrint gt page 4 15
185. f originals in separate batches and then produce as one job Originals will be scanned continuously until you press Finish Scan 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Continuous Scan Ready to copy 10 10 Ready to copy 10 10 Copies fnd Er El SSS SEES 2 Prevent Bleed through TA Paper mn Zoom al Density N Selection gt mes w Margin Auto 100 Normal 0 Duplex 2 Combine g Collate a 4 E Baa J Offset AUTO T Kotation 1 sided gt 1 sided Off Collate GB0001_ 01 maaala GB0002_02 Add Edit Shortcu im Use VV or AN to scroll up and down 2 Select the function 10 10 GB0043_00 lt 3 Scan the originals the vo and press the Start key to start scanning Once the original has been scanned load the next original and press the Start key Use the same procedure to scan any remaining originals 3 40 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions 4 Finish scanning Cancel Finish Scan 4 Start copying sending or storing 3 41 GB0222_00 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Paper Selection Cony USB Select the cassette or multi purpose tray that contains the required paper size NOTE Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette refer to Cassette MP
186. f up to 5 FTP and SMB destination folders You can register the entered information in the Address Book by pressing Menu and then Add to Address Book 6 Accept the destinations 10 10 Host Name PC001 Path pc001 scannerdata Port 139 Login User Name abcdnet james smith Menu Cancel Destinations can be changed later Refer to Checking and Editing Destinations on page 6 25 GB0128_00 6 24 sending gt Specifying Destination Checking and Editing Destinations Check and edit a selected destination 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Specifying Destination on page 6 17 specify the destination Ready to send 10 10 es ee pm R n i BBB bbb abc com a One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book _ Vv E mail Folder GB0055_02 2 Check and edit the destination Deletes the selected destination 10 10 o Adds a new destination BBB bbb abc com Scrolls up and down when the list of destinations cannot be displayed in its entirety on a single screen GB0105_00 Displays details for the destinations New E mail addresses and PC folders can be edited if they have been specified 6 25 sending gt Specifying Destination Sending to Different Types of Destinations Multi Sending You can specify destinations that combine e mail addresses folders SMB or FTP and fax numbers This is referred to as Multi Sending This is useful for sending t
187. fer files on the TCP IP network whether the Internet or an intranet Along with HTTP and SMTP POP FTP is now frequently used on the Internet Grayscale A computer color expression Displayed images of this sort are typically composed of shades of gray varying from black at the weakest intensity to white at the strongest without any other colors Gray levels are displayed in numerical levels that is white and black only for 1 bit 256 gray levels including white and black for 8 bits and 65 536 gray levels for 16 bits Help A Help key is provided on this machine s operation panel If you are unsure of how to operate the machine would like more information on its functions or are having problems getting the machine to work properly press the Help key to view a detailed explanation on the touch panel IP Address An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the network The format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots e g 192 168 110 171 Each number should be between 0 and 255 IPP IPP Internet Printing Protocol is a standard that uses TCP IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs to be sent between remote computers and printers IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view websites and enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations It also supports the HTTP authentication mechanisms along w
188. ff press the Energy Saver key or the Power key and wait for the machine to warm up Select the functions to use Press Functions to display all the functions Refer to Common Functionality on page 3 31 3 30 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Common Functionality Functionality related to originals What do you want to do Specify the original size Specify the original orientation to scan in the correct direction Reference Page Original Size gt page 3 32 Original Orientation gt page 3 34 Scan mixed size originals Mixed Size Originals page 3 35 Automatically scan 2 sided originals 2 sided Book Original gt page 3 37 Scan a large number of originals separately and then produce as one job Functionality related to document quality What do you want to do Specify the paper size and type Continuous Scan gt page 3 40 Reference Page Paper Selection gt page 3 42 Change the paper output Paper Output gt page 3 43 Collate the output documents in page order Offset the output documents by set Collate Offset gt page 3 44 Add margins white space Margin gt page 3 46 Staple in the output documents Staple gt page 3 49 Adjust the density Density gt page 3 51 Set the resolution at which to scan originals Scan Resolution gt page 3 52 Select original image type for best results
189. finished copies may also be stapled FAX System U FAX Kit By installing the FAX kit fax send receive is enabled Also it is possible to use it as a network fax by using it with a computer For further details refer to Fax Kit Operation Guide Expansion Memory To expand the printer memory for more complex print jobs and faster print soeed you can plug in optional memory module dual in line memory module in the memory slot provided on the main controller board You can select additional memory module from 256 512 or 1024 MB The maximum memory size is 2048 MB Precautions for Handling the Memory Module L Correct Incorrect To protect electronic parts discharge static electricity from your body by touching a water pipe faucet or other large metal object before handling the memory module Or wear an antistatic wrist strap if possible when you install the memory module Installing the Memory Module 1 Power off Turn off the machine and disconnect the power cord and interface cable 11 3 Appendix gt Optional Equipment 3 Install the memory module 1 Remove the memory module from its package 2 With the memory connection terminal pointing toward the socket align the cut out part with the socket terminal and insert directly in at an angle Q IMPORTANT Before inserting a memory module in the machine make sure that the machine is switched off 3 Carefully press the inserte
190. ftware application An image can be acquired O using a WIA compliant software application which is convenient when a TWAIN compliant software application is not installed in the computer Network FAX FAX This makes it possible to send a document created in a O driver computer software application as a fax via the machine 7 File Management Utility This makes it possible to send and save a scanned O Utility document to a specified network folder 7 KYOCERA Net This makes it possible to print a PDF file without starting O Direct Print Adobe Acrobat Reader _ KYOCERA Net This is a utility that enables monitoring of the machine on O Viewer the network Font These are display fonts that enable the machine s built in o fonts to be used in a software application e Standard installation o Allows selection of the components to be installed Selected by default 2 14 Preparation before Use gt Installing Software NOTE Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges Plug and Play is disabled on this device when in Sleep Wake the device from Low Power Mode or Sleep before continuing Refer to Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode on page 2 22 and Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2 23 The optional Fax Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality WIA driver cannot be installed on Windows XP Installing Printer Driver in Windows If you are connecting t
191. function Reference Page 4 8 Cannot offset the following paper Did you select a paper size media type that cannot be offset Press Paper Selection to select the available paper Press Continue to print without using Offset function 3 44 Cannot print the specified number of copies Only one copy is available Press Continue to continue printing Press Cancel to cancel the job The machine may reproduce the same Originals by arranging the following settings Uncheck RAM Disk in the Device Settings tab of the printer s properties NOTE If you unchecked the RAM Disk check the RAM Disk again after the printing is completed If not print soeed may be reduced Do you want to print the data stored in the USB memory Only one copy is available Press Continue to continue printing Press Cancel to cancel the job The machine may reproduce the same originals by arranging the following settings Reduce the number of copies to be printed at once Furthermore the machine may reproduce the same originals by arranging the following settings Select Copy Priority of Optional Memory in System Menu NOTE Before changing the Optional Memory setting contact your administrator 9 24 Cannot process this job This job is canceled because it is restricted by User Authorization or Job Accounting Press End Cannot staple at the specified po
192. g GB0019_00 GB0015_04 Copying gt Copying Functions EcoPrint Use EcoPrint to save toner when printing Use this function for test copies or any other occasion when high quality print is not required 1 Display the screen gt 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 4 2 display the screen Ready to copy 10 10 Ce l l 7 a Copies 1 i E SSS SSeS Paper B Zoom H Density N Selection i arni Auto 100 Normal 0 ee ee ro Duplex y Combine 7 Collate be os L Offset 1 sided gt 1 sided Off Collate 2 Select the function Ready to copy vy Favorites a d GBO0001_01 GB0045_00 Ready to copy 10 10 j Original Image a A EcoPrint o Sharpness Text Photo An Background Density Adj GB0002_01 Close Add Edi Shortcut Use VV or A to scroll up and down Copying gt Copying Functions Auto Image Rotation When original and paper source size are the same but their orientation is different rotate image 90 degrees 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 4 2 display the screen Ready to copy 10 10 Copies _ Paper i Zoom Density Selection L mee Auto 100 Normal 0 ee i ee ir Duplex y Combine er COllate 4 DS P Offset 1 sided gt 1 sided Off Collate 2 Select the function off 10 10 o e Ready to copy 10
193. g gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC Creating a Shared Folder Making a Note of a Shared Folder Create a shared folder to receive the document in the destination computer NOTE lf there is a workgroup in System Properties configure the settings below to limit folder access to a specific user or group 1 From the Start menu select Control Panel Appearance and Personalization and then Folder Options Ease oT Access Center W Accommodate low vision Usescreenreader Turn on easy access keys Turn High Contrast on or off Fonts N Preview delete or show and hide fonts Change Font Settings Adjust ClearType text k NVIDIA Control Panel mck to open Show hidden files and folders Windows XP click My Computer and select Folder Options in Tools 2 E Folder Options te Folder views You can apply the view such as Details or Icons that you are using for this folder to all folders of this type Advanced settings E E Launch folder windows in a separate process Restore previous folder windows at logon V Show drive letters Show encrypted or compressed NTFS files in color V Show pop up description for folder and desktop items Z Show preview handlers in preview pane Use Sharing Wizard Recommended Automatically type into the Search Box Select the typed item in the view Restore Defaults
194. g has been suspended due to priority override or interrupt copy operation Close Closes the Print Job Status screen Status Job Cancel gt Checking Job Status Send Job Status screen Status Job Cancel 10 10 0005 pass 0123456 GB0183_00 Display Key Detail Icons that indicate the job type B Sending Job FAX m Sending Job Folder SMB FTP lt 4 Sending Job E mail Sending Job Application oes Sending Job Mixed Multiple Menu Pressing this key displays Priority Override This function allows you to give a particular fax job priority Select the fax job you wish to send immediately and then press Menu followed by Priority Override Cancel Select the job you want to cancel from the list and press this key Press for the job for which you wish to display detailed information Status of job 5 Sending S Sending Waiting A job for which immediate transmission was specified is waiting for transmission to start wD Pausing the job or error Canceling the job F The status before starting sending such as during scanning originals Close Closes the Send Job Status screen This function is displayed when the optional fax is installed Status Job Cancel gt Checking Job Status Store Job Status screen Status Job Cancel 10 10 0016 docd000162010082913 Storing GB0184_00 Display Key Details Icons
195. ged on with administrator privileges When printing from a Macintosh computer set the machine s emulation to KPDL or KPDL Auto For details about the configuration method refer to Printer on page 9 17 If connecting by Bonjour enable Bonjour in the machine s network settings For details refer to Network on page 9 19 In the Authenticate screen enter the name and password used to log in to the operating system 1 Insert the DVD Double click the Kyocera icon 2 Display the screen a00 Kyocera a00 OS X 10 5 or higher Lo Q Gaje a E a DEVICES DEVICES SHARED a PLACES Ea SEARCH FOR SHARED rc cc T Common files A OS X 10 4 Only Double click Double click R 6 items Zero KB available CO R 2 items Zero KB available po Double click either OS X 10 2 and 10 3 Only OS X 10 4 Only or OS X 10 5 or higher depending on your Mac OS version 3 Install Printer Driver AOC w Install Po ell Ti elcome to the Me 2 2 2 ET Installer KYOCERA Introduction Read Me You will be guided through the steps necessary to install this software Summary Install the printer driver as directed by the instructions in the installation software This completes the printer driver installation Next specify the print settings If an IP connection is used the settings below are required If a USB connection is used the machine is a
196. gnature is 512 characters Domain Restriction 3 Click Submit Enter the domain names that can be permitted or rejected The maximum length of the domain name is 32 characters You can also specify E mail addresses 2 2 Preparation before Use gt Command Center RX Settings for E mail 2 28 3 Common Operations This chapter explains the following topics LO AGING AIDCM oer uesarsncuasus lotscmas seat hioesimwaterasaapancuasseyeletedand E E 3 2 Belgro Loading Paper sete csciersemteasedatte neue ieee enn NE E ETENEE rare E SOE E Ea E SEEEN 3 2 Loading Paper in the CaSSCUCS ascssirnrssnreisinciaie caan a aiea Aae nikae aaiae 3 3 Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray ccc ceccccccccecceeeece eee eeeeeeceeeeseeeeseeeseeesaeeeseeeseeeseeesseeseeeseseeseeeses 3 5 POAC COMMAS cee sass seer sete se ccc E E E A O E E E E 3 7 Placing Originals on the Platen sxcicaussauie dice decudchicoeetuasnenssxduasusedsedwasurensvunuakanwandtaseanteatuhwapesinnduivs Giniauseewsunatuaceds 3 7 Loading Originals in the Document Processor cccccccseeeeceeeeceeeceeeeceeeeceeeeeseeeseeeeseeeeseeeseeessneeseeeess 3 8 Checking the Equipment s Serial Number ccccc cece ceececececeeeceeeese cess eeceeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeseueseeesaeeeseeeeseeeaeeess 3 10 CMCC Ie TINS COUMO rosea css nania eE EEE a runec cues asec ane sean sacasnoemuesd A E e 3 11 LOA LOGOUT aeeneeee inter ene reenter ee ee ee ee eee ee 3 12 FAV
197. han plain paper Such as recycled or colored paper always specify the media type setting Refer to Cassette MP Tray Settings on page 9 8 If you are using a paper weight of 106 g m or more set the media type to Thick The capacity of the multi purpose tray is as follows e A4 or smaller plain paper 80 g m recycled paper or color paper 100 sheets e B4or larger plain paper 80 g m7 recycled paper or color paper 25 sheets e Hagaki 20 sheet e Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 Monarch Youkei 4 Youkei 2 5 sheets e Heavy paper 106 to 256 g m 10 sheets when using heavy paper with a weight of 164 g m or greater only A4 Letter or smaller sheets can be loaded NOTE When you load custom size paper enter the paper size by referring to Paper Size on page 9 8 When you use special paper such as thick paper select the media type by referring to Media Type on page 9 8 1 Adjust the multi purpose tray size ev dv ard When loading paper sizes from A3 to B4 and Ledger to Legal extend the support tray section of the multi purpose tray 3 5 Common Operations gt Loading Paper 2 Load paper Insert the paper along the paper width guides into the tray until it stops Q IMPORTANT Load the paper with the print side facing down Curled paper must be uncurled before use Straighten the top edge if it is curled When loading paper into
198. he USB memory is securely plugged into the machine When displaying an image Have you selected 200x100dpi Normal Select a scan resolution other than 3 52 sent from the machine on the PC an image size is shrunk vertically or horizontally or 200x400dpi Super for the scan resolution 10 10 200x100dpi Normal or 200x400dpi Super when sending an image Troubleshooting gt Solving Malfunctions Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Re ference Page Printouts have vertical lines Is the slit glass dirty Clean the slit glass 10 6 ABC 123 Dirt on the top edge or back Check the machine interior Open the right cover If the machine of the paper interior is dirty with toner clean it using Part of the image is Have the developer unit and drum unit Load the developer unit and drum unit periodically faint or shows been loaded properly properly white lines Open and then close the right cover Run Drum Refresh 1 9 27 If you experience frequent problems 2 4 turn the cassette heater switch on White dots appear on the Run Drum Refresh 2 9 27 image Print on the back of the sheet Set Prevent Bleed through to On 3 56 is visible on the front ABC 123 Part of the image is Run Drum Refresh 1 9 27 periodically faint or blurred 10 11 Troubleshooting gt Solving Malfunctions
199. he function 10 10 Paper Selection Cancel lt Back GB0792_00 i Select the function screen to display with the shortcut 5 Enter the shortcut name Input 10 ws 1 Limit 24 aed GB0057_04 e 7 Up to 24 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters 6 Register the shortcut Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Number Shortcut 1 Name Shortcut 1 GB0793_00 S Confirm the settings and press Save 3 23 Common Operations gt Shortcuts Editing and Deleting Shortcuts Change shortcut number name or delete shortcut 1 Display the screen Ready to copy 10 10 Ready to copy 10 10 Copies a o g Original Size Paper Ba Zoom all Density poll Auto NS Selection Ji az Original Orientation Auto 100 Normal 0 Top Edge on Top a ee pe gt eg Mixed Size Originals Duplex Combine om e COllate da 1 Bere Oliset Paper Output i 1 sidedf gt 1 sided Off Collate a Ne Shortcut 1 Shortcut 2 sy Favorites GB0001_04 GB0002_00 2 Press Functions on the Copy Send or Document Box screen and then Add Edit Shortcut 2 Edit or delete a shortcut To edit a shortcut 1 Select the shortcut type and number you wish to edit all 10 10 10 10 2 Private Shortcut 1 Private Shortcut 2 F 1 1 Shared Shortcut 1 Shared Shortcut 2
200. here can be applied simply by logging in Network users are not displayed Group Name When group authorization is enabled displays the name shown in the group list Group ID When group authorization is enabled displays the ID shown in the group list Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Cassette MP Tray Settings Select paper size and media type for Cassette 1 to 3 and multi purpose tray Cassette to 3 Paper Size Description Set the paper size to load in Cassette 1 and optional paper feeders Cassette 2 and 3 Value Auto Automatically detect paper size Select Metric or Inch for paper size Metric Select from A3 A4 R A4 A5 R B4 B5 R B5 Folio or 216 x 340 mm Inch Select from Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement R or Oficio II others Select from 8K 16K R or 16K Q IMPORTANT Specify the paper size as follows for the cassette that you want to use for fax reception Inch models Press Auto and then Inch Metric models Press Auto and then Metric Media Type Multi Purpose Tray Paper Size Set the media type to load in Cassette 1 and optional paper feeders Cassette 2 and 3 Value Plain 105 g m or less Rough Vellum 59 g m or less Recycled Preprinted Bond Color Prepunched Letterhead Thick 106 g m and more High Quality Custom 1 8 NOTE To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead refer to Special Paper Act
201. hers 3 eh qiwie r t y u i o p V 2 Confirm the settings and start the job Copies 1 Copies Paper Selection Auto Zoom 100 10 10 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Density Normal 0 A GB0820_00 NOTE To edit the settings press lt Back and make changes as desired When using the program mode Sta rt Select a favorite to call up registered settings Press the Start key to start the job Common Operations gt Application Application The functionality of the machine can be expanded by installing applications Applications that help you perform your daily more efficiently such as a scan feature and an authentication feature are available For details consult your sales representative or dealer For application settings refer to Favorites Application on page 9 16 X 1 Display the screen 10 10 Favorites a Application oS ie GS les S Paper Saving Copy Scan to PC ID Card Copy i Address Entry EJ WwW EJ Ve EJ wr Scan to PC Scan to E mail Scan to E mail 1 Address Book Address Entry Address Book 1 1 GB0056_00 2 Select the application 3 21 Common Operations gt Shortcuts Shortcuts Frequently used function screens can be registered as shortcuts so that they can be called up easily Registering Shortcuts You can register up to 2 shortcuts for copying functions sending functions and functi
202. hether the original is color or black and white during Auto Color Mode Setting a lower value will result in more originals being identified as color while a larger value will tend to increase the number of originals being identified as black and white Value 5 B amp W 4 3 2 1 Color Correcting Black Line Correct fine lines streaks caused by contamination which may appear on the image when the document processor is used Value Off No correction performed On Low Correction performed The reproduction of fine lines on the original may become lighter than when using Off On High Select this item if a streak remains after using On Low The reproduction of fine lines on the original may become lighter than when using On Low Display Brightness Set the brightness of the touch panel Value 1 Darker 2 3 4 Lighter 9 26 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Tone Curve Adjustment Description After prolonged use or from the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity the hue of printed color output may shift or color drift may occur Use this function to correct color settings when the color of a finished copy does not match the original NOTE To perform tone curve adjustment verify that either Letter or A4 paper is loaded into a cassette Procedure a N AB Press Start and print the first pattern As shown in the illustration place the printed side do
203. his machine to a Windows PC follow the next steps to install the printer driver The example shows you how to connect your machine to a Windows 7 PC NOTE Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges If the Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box displays select Cancel If the autorun screen is displayed click Run Setup exe If the user account management window appears click Allow You can use either Express Mode or Custom Mode to install the software Express Mode automatically detects connected machines and installs the required software Use Custom Mode if you want to specify the printer port and select the software to be installed For details refer to Custom Installation in the Printer Driver User Guide on the DVD 1 Insert the DVD 2 Display the screen O Kyocera Product Libra bclan Kyocera Product Library KYOCERA THE NEW VALUE FRONTIER KYOCERA THE NEW VALUE FRONTIER f Notice Install Software By using or installing the device drivers Ff and software included in this package Advanc ols you agree to become bound by the terms and conditions of this License Agreement Hardware Documentation Software Documentation Software Release Notes AAG Install drivers and utilities C 2012 KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc Click View License Agreement and read the License Agreement 2 15 Preparation before Use gt Ins
204. i Send 2C ra E gt One Touch Key mem Address Book E mail Fi 1 Address Book All IYE WH 001 BB Sales department 1 123456 cm GB0055_00 10 10 001 77 Support department 123 456789 co up 1 1 a 901 12345 com uw 1001 Support department 11111 com GB0426_01 2 Adds a new destination Sort No Use V or A to scroll up and down Add Edit GB0396_01 3 Select the registration method Select the address type 10 10 Group gt 1 41 GB0419_01 e 6 27 Sending gt Registering Destinations in the Address Book 4 Enter the destination name Sales department 1 Input 18 cI 1 Limit 32 a GB0057_11 e z Up to 32 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters 5 Enter the destination Select the item that you want to change 10 10 10 10 Sales department 1 FTP AN Address Number Cancel GB0078_02 GB0078_03 e Use V or AN to scroll up and down Select the type of destination to register Q For details on FAX refer to FAX Operation Guide E mail Address Input 11 a 1 Limit 128 es GB0057_13 Enter the E mail address Up to 128 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters The Folder SMB Address 1 Enter Host Name Path Port Login User Name and L
205. ic Host Configuration Protocol Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP that automatically resolves IP addresses subnet masks and gateway addresses on a TCP IP network DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a large number of client computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being assigned DHCP IPv6 DHCP IPv6 is the next generation of the Internet s Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol and supports IPv6 It extends the BOOTP startup protocol that defines the protocols used for transferring configuration information to hosts on the network DHCP IPv6 permits the DHCP server to use its expanded functionality to send configuration parameters to an IPv6 node Because the network addresses that can be used are allocated automatically the IPv6 node management workload is reduced in systems where the administrator has to exercise close control over IP address allocation 11 23 Appendix gt Glossary dpi dots per inch A unit for resolution representing the number of dots printed per inch 25 4 mm EcoPrint Mode A printing mode that helps save toner Copies made in this mode are thus lighter than normal Enhanced WSD Kyocera s proprietary web services Emulation The function to interpret and execute other printers page description languages The machine emulates operation of PCL6 KPDL and KPDL automatic FTP File Transfer Protocol A protocol to trans
206. ich resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under IPv4 while also introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data transmission TWAIN Technology Without Any Interested Name A technical specification for connecting scanners digital cameras and other image equipment to the computers The TWAIN compatible devices enable you to process image data on any relevant application software TWAIN is adopted on a large amount of graphic software e g Adobe Photoshop and OCR software USB Universal Serial Bus 2 0 A USB interface standard for Hi Speed USB 2 0 The maximum transfer rate is 480 Mbps This machine is equipped with USB 2 0 for high speed data transfer WIA Windows Imaging Acquisition A function to import images supported after Windows Me XP from digital cameras and other peripheral devices This function replaces what TWAIN used to do the feature is provided as a part of Windows functions and improves ease of operation so that you import images directly to My Computer without using any application 11 26 Index Numerics 2 sided Book Original 3 37 A Address Book Adding a Contact 6 27 Adding a Group 6 31 Editing and Deleting 6 34 Adjustment Maintenance Auto Color Correction 9 26 Auto Drum Refresh 9 27 Background Density Adj 9 26 Correcting Black Line 9 26 Density Adjustment 9 26 Display Brightness 9 26 DP Adjustment 9 27 Drum Refresh 1 9 27 Drum Refre
207. iginal Size Auto 2 2 1 6 Top Edge on Top lt Function Type Wizard _ Mixed Size Originals Off fo oO oO N N a GB0766_02 a If you selected wizard mode check the function and make changes as necessary 3 16 Common Operations gt Favorites Function Type Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Destination Address Book 2 Functions Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Name Sending Job E mail Job Type Multi Sending Number Auto 3 17 an e GB0766_02 GB0775_00 GB0766_00 Common Operations gt Favorites Editing and Deleting Favorites This section describes how to edit name and permission of the registered favorites and how to delete favorites 1 Display the screen 10 10 Favorites vorites aa Application m G ie G len pp 55 lm 53 Cs ID Card Copy Paper Saving Copy Scan to PC i Address Entry Scan to PC Scan to E mail Scan to E mail Address Book Address Entry Address Book 2 Edit or delete a favorite GB0056_00 To edit a favorite 1 Select the favorite you wish to edit _ Se 10 10 10 10 01 B Sending Job E mail 15 G ID Card Copy 16 fee Paper Saving Copy 17 Scan to PC Addreess Entry S o E m oO Input 6 Limit 32 Admin S a 0 Number e 10 1
208. ing Size Auto S Imaging Preview i Scan Color Settings Full Color Resolution 400dpi Image Quality Text Photo E lu Close 4 TT gt The settings that appear in the TWAIN dialog box are as follows Detail Original Size This setting sets the size of the scan area Feed Method This setting specifies the feed method of the original Select the feed method from the list Original Orientation This setting specifies the orientation of the original Sending Size This setting specifies the image size 6 48 sending gt Scanning using TWAIN Imaging Color Settings Detail This setting specifies the type of color for the image Resolution This setting specifies the dpi dots per inch or sharpness for the image Image Quality This setting specifies the overall image quality Make sure your selection matches the original that you are scanning Exposure Level This setting specifies the sharpness and clarity of the image If the Auto check box is selected then the slider bar and edit box are unavailable and the exposure level is automatically set to the default setting Contrast This setting specifies the contrast between light and dark areas of the image This feature cannot be used when Black amp White is selected in the Color Settings Advanced Reverse Image This setting prints images like a photo negative reversing the black and white a
209. installed on this machine Overview of the Applications The applications listed below are installed on this machine You can use these applications for a limited period on a trial basis UG 33 ThinPrint This application can only be activated in Europe This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver NOTE Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ depending on the application Starting Application Use Use the procedure below to start using an application NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below Enter login user name and password 10 10 Login User Name oe Mode Neme Login Login User Name Password Login Password kevoaea FS 6525MFP FS 6530MFP oO oO oO N N fo a 0 i 1 Display the screen Use VV or A to scroll up and down System Menu Counter di lt gt System Menu Counter Ep sistem N Q m Date Timer 2 5 5 1 T Adjustment Maintenance System Menu Counter 10 10 RAM Disk Setting gt gt Optional Memory 3 Optional Function gt GB0054_04 2 2 GB0511_01 Appendix gt Optional Equipment 2 Start usi
210. ion is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Enter login user name and password 10 10 Login User Name Login Password Keyboard GB0723_00 La 2 Configure the function 10 10 Send Log History Auto Sending off Destination E mail 1 1 Job Log Subject Refer to Setting the Destination on page 8 8 Automatic Log History Transmission on page 8 9 N Manual Log History Transmission on page 8 9 and Setting E mail Subject on page 8 10 GB0578_00 Status Job Cancel gt Sending the Log History Setting the Destination Set the destination to which log histories are sent 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Sending the Log History on page 8 7 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter si Send Log History 2 Auto Sending 1 1 a l 4 Destination D E mail JUV LUY JUVJELL GB0578_00 GB0581_00 2 Select the destination Select from the Address Book Searches by destination name System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 Q J Address Book 2 AAA aaa abc com Ext Address Book 1 a BBB bbb abc com 1 1 gt Address Entry gt ccc ccc abc com ddd abc com el Cancel GB0583_00 GB0398_01 Enter a new e mail address System Menu Counter 10 10 Input 11 i Limit 128 Address Book Ext
211. ion on page 9 10 To change to a media type other than Plain refer to Media Type Setting on page 9 10 When the paper weight settings shown below are selected the media indicated for each setting cannot be selected Rough Heavy 3 Bond Heavy 3 Thick Heavy 3 or Extra Heavy Custom 1 to 8 Heavy3 or Extra Heavy Refer to Media Type Setting on page 9 10 for selecting Custom 1 8 Description Set the paper size for multi purpose tray Value Metric Select from A3 A4 R A4 A5 R A6 R B4 B5 R B5 B6 R Folio or 216 x 340 mm Inch Select from Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement R Executive or Oficio Il others Select from 8K 16K R 16K ISO B5 Envelope 10 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope C4 Hagaki Oufukuhagaki Youkei 4 Youkei 2 or Custom Size Entry Enter a size not displayed in the standard sizes Inch models X 5 83 to 17 in 0 01 increments Y 3 86 to 11 69 in 0 01 increments Metric models X 148 to 432 mm in 1 mm increments Y 98 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments NOTE For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size refer to Custom Paper m Size on page 9 10 Media Type Set the media type for multi purpose tray Value Plain 105 g m or less Transparency Rough Vellum 59 g m or less Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Envelope Thick 106 g m and more High Quality C
212. ions Scan Resolution Select fineness of scanning resolution The selectable resolution is 200x100dpi Normal 200x200dpi Fine 200x400dpi Super 300x300dpi 400x400dpi Ultra or 600x600dpil NOTE The larger the number the better the image resolution However better resolution also means larger file sizes and longer send times 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen Send 10 10 10 10 Dest 0 Check 2 sided Book Original Recall Eh 1 sided One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book a a 1 2 E mail Folder FAX VW Ss A OU O l yg Favorites B a Scan to USB 10 10 7 O T U File 2 sided Scan L CoS Format L Book Resolution PDF 1 sided 300x300dpi ma all Density be File Name aati fab Entry Normal 0 dc z Sj 2 2 Select the resolution Ready to send 10 10 600x600dpi 400x400dpi Ultra 300x300dpi 200x400dpi Super 200x200dpi Fine 200x100dpi Normal Js l ow Cancel B a 3 52 gt J EASA rX Sending Size File Separation re 2 Same as Original Size Scan Resolution a dpi 300x300dpi i V Add Edit Shortcu Use V or AN to scroll up and down GB0081_01 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Original Image ony sena egas USB Select original image type for best results Text Photo Be
213. ired recipient as a file attached to an E mail C message Administrator s PC gt 6 20 Printing Send SMB Saves the scanned image as a data file on your PC gt 6 21 Network FAX apron Send FTP Network Network Sends the scanned image as a data file on the FTP gt 6 21 FAX Option A Network TWAIN Scanning WIA Scanning TWAIN and WIA are standardized interface for communication between software applications and image acquisition devices Network Preparation before Use gt Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables Preparing Necessary Cables Prepare the necessary cables according to the interface you use Connection Environment Function Connect a LAN cable to the machine Printer Scanner Scanner TWAIN WIA Connect a USB cable to the machine Printer Necessary Cable LAN 10Base T 100Base TX or 1000BASE T Shielded USB2 0 compatible cable Hi Speed USB compliant Max 5 0 m Shielded Preparation before Use gt Connecting Cables Connecting Cables Connecting LAN Cable The equipment can be connected with a network cable and used as a network printer or network scanner 4 Power Off Check that the indicators are off 2 Connect the machine 1 Connect the LAN cable to the network interface located on left side of the body ele Woy l 4 J 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the hub 3 Set up the machine Config
214. isplayed press OK and remove the USB memory NOTE USB memory can also be removed after checking the status of the device For details refer to Check of Device Status on page 8 117 N GB0107_01 Document Box gt Functions for Document Box Functions for Document Box Print or Store file screen in Document Box shows the commonly used functions By pressing Functions other selectable functions will be shown as a list Use V or A to select the function When printing from USB memory What do you want to do Specify the paper size and type Reference Page Paper Selection gt page 3 42 Collate the output documents in page order Offset the output documents by set Collate Offset page 3 44 Print on both sides of the paper Duplex gt page 7 11 Change the paper output Paper Output gt page 3 43 Staple in the output documents Staple gt page 3 49 Add margins white space Margin gt page 3 46 Send notice by e mail when a job is complete Suspend the current job and override it to give a new job top priority Job Finish Notice gt page 3 61 Priority Override gt page 3 64 Password protect a PDF file Encrypted PDF Password page 7 12 Set the image size resolution when printing a JPEG or TIFF file JPEG TIFF Print gt page 7 13 Print an XPS file so that it fits the paper size XPS Fit to Page gt page 7 14 When storing a d
215. isplays information for individual destination computers 3 Press the Start key Start sending begins and the software installed on the computer is activated 6 46 Sending gt WSD Scan Procedure from Your Computer Ready to send From Computer 10 10 From Operation Panel gt 1 1 e 2 Use the software installed on the computer to send the images GB0648_00 6 47 sending gt Scanning using TWAIN Scanning using TWAIN This section explains how to scan an original using TWAIN The procedure for scanning using the TWAIN driver is explained as an example The WIA driver is used in the same way 1 Display the window 1 Activate the TWAIN compatible application software 2 Select the machine using the application software and display the TWAIN dialog box NOTE For selecting the machine see the Operation Guide or Help for each application software 2 Configure the function Select scanning settings in the TWAIN dialog box that opens a io v prm meer nos 4 Basic Imaging Advanced Sth 04 mowy nee e ee SS ow Original Size Isan A4 did 5 gt Sese ma Feed Method ane ana caa Platen Original Orientation A HE i Item Detail a j j Name Onee Sending Size Basic Auto Original Size 44 Feed Method Platen Original Orient Portrait Top Edge on Top Send
216. it is installed 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9 55 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 Job Accounting On Print Accounting Report Total Job Accounting Each Job Accounting GB0461_02 To count the number of pages for all account select Total Job Accounting To count the number of pages by account select Each Job Accounting Searches by account name System Menu Counter 10 10 Q s ii Sales department 00000001 i Others GB0469_00 L G Allows you to search for an account name and sorts results To count the number of pages by account name press for the account name whose usage you wish to view 9 64 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting 2 View the number of pages System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 Printed Pages Copy Total 111 Scanned Pages Printer Total 222 FAX TX Pages o Copy Print Total 333 FAX TX Time 0 00 00 Counter End i Reset GB0463_00 GB0464_00 Use V or AN to scroll up and down To reset the counter System Menu Counter 10 10 Printed Pages Scanned Pages 1 1 FAX TX Pages o Counter Reset GB0463_00 9 65 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Printing an Accounting Report Total pages counted at all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report Reports hav
217. iteasaaechaamonacunsacieatuutedstmatonetids 11 5 Character Entry Method es isciccecscacecicencssneteeeccannedenddsadendseeidnsastedednonadanie diana devdedaseetddesancaadeugecen 11 7 ENUY O COONS eer E EE E E EEE OEE E EEE E 11 7 Entering gis 2 61 fone een nee eee 11 9 FAI ai a tecnica a occ etch dean et A icin cenaead ine genteanb aeons 11 10 Basic Paper Specifications ccccccccseccceeccececeeeceeeceueceueesaeecueesseeseueeaeeeseeeseeeseeees 11 11 Choosing the Appropriate Paper ccccccceccceeceeeeceeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeaeesseeseeeseeeseeees 11 11 SPECIAL PAPET scerna ie E A Beis sala veda AEE tees 11 14 SPEEA TONS ger E E e E EE E E E E EA E E 11 18 COMINON TUNCUONS secr irirpi adin nET E EAR T RE E 11 18 GODY TUNCUONS sinise EE eS ee ee ee OEE 11 19 Printer IUNCUONS suerciiasieniean aac a adenine E eee ee 11 20 SA ee E E E ee eee ee e eee 11 20 Document Processor sescrsa tindactocetes cecawue jedagoa dicey naancemntitmnelsudaaaencebecimdedetuadmmidivaaienetuaes 11 21 Paper Feeder single cassette Option cccceccccceeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeeaeeeesaeeeessaeees 11 21 Paper Feeder double cassette Option ccccecceseeeecceeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeesaeeeeeaeeeesaass 11 21 Document Finisher Option ccsccccsececcseeeeceeeeeceeeeecseeeecceueeesegsesseuseesseseesseees 11 22 Environmental Specifications cccccccccceccceeece cess eeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeseeesaeeseeeseeeseeess 11 22 OSSY
218. item that you want to change E mail Address Access Level My Panel Local Authorization Input 11 Limit 128 GB0446_01 System Menu Counter 10 10 Administrator User GB0446_01 System Menu Counter 10 10 Language English Default Screen Shortcut Shared Shortcut GB0446_01 O For details on My Panel refer to My Panel on page 9 37 N Local Authorization Select the item that you want to change 10 10 E mail Address Access Level User My Panel Local Authorization Cancel ave Change the limitations as needed 4 Register the user Select the item that you want to change 10 10 User Name User A Login User Name user A Login Password pA Ae EEXE Account Name Others Cancel 9 35 System Menu Counter 10 10 Printer Copy Send FAX Transmission Cancel GB0446_01 Use V or AN to scroll up and down GB0446_00 GB0057_ 30 GB0443_00 GB0749_00 GB0839_00 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Local User Authorization Enables local user authorization Job use can be prohibited for specific users Set when adding a user see page 9 32 or editing and deleting users see page 9 38 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 29 display the screen 2 Select Local Authentication for the authentication method as explained in E
219. ith SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption KPDL Kyocera Page Description Language Kyocera s PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3 11 24 Appendix gt Glossary Multi Purpose MP Tray The paper supply tray on the right side of the machine Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto envelopes Hagaki transparencies or labels NetBEUI NetBIOS Extended User Interface An interface developed by IBM in 1985 as an update from NetBIOS It enables more advanced functions on smaller networks than other protocols such as TCP IP etc It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of routing capabilities to choose the most appropriate routes NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS 2 and Microsoft for its Windows as a standard protocol for file sharing and printing services PDF A This is ISO 19005 1 Document management Electronic document file format for long term preservation Part 1 Use of PDF PDF A and is a file format based on PDF 1 4 It has been standardized as ISO 19005 1 and is a specialization of PDF which has been mainly used for printing for long term storage A new part ISO 19005 2 PDF A 2 is currently being prepared POP3 Post Office Protocol 3 A standard protocol to receive E mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet PostScript A page description language developed by Adobe System
220. itioned 3 7 Is the paper of the supported type Is it Remove the paper turn it over and 3 2 in good condition reload it Is the paper curled folded or wrinkled Replace the paper with new paper 3 2 Are there any loose scraps or jammed Remove any jammed paper 10 25 paper in the machine 2 or more sheets are Load the paper correctly 3 2 overlaps when ejected multi feed Printouts are wrinkled Turn the orientation 180 degrees 3 2 around in which the paper is ABC positioned 123 Is the paper damp Replace the paper with new paper 3 2 If you experience frequent problems 2 4 turn the cassette heater switch on Printouts are curled Turn the orientation 180 degrees 3 2 around in which the paper is ABQ positioned 1 2 Is the paper damp Replace the paper with new paper 3 2 If you experience frequent problems 2 4 as turn the cassette heater switch on Cannot print Is the machine plugged in Plug the power cord into an AC outlet 2 11 Is the machine powered on Turn on the main power switch 2 12 Are the printer cable and network Connect the correct printer cable and 2 10 cable connected network cable securely Was the machine powered on before Power on the machine after 2 10 the printer cable was connected connecting the printer cable Is the print job paused Resume printing 8 3 Cannot print with USB Is the USB host blocked Select Unblock in the USB host 9 23 memory settings See eae eee once Check that t
221. ity adjustment range when selecting the file format with which to send and store images Value 1 Low High Comp 2 3 4 5 High Low Comp Set the default value for PDF A when selecting the file format with which to send and store images Value Off PDF A 1a PDF A 1b If you want to enable the changed defaults immediately move to the function screen and press the Reset key Paper Output Description Paper Output Select output tray respectively for copy jobs print jobs from Job Box computers and FAX RX data Value Inner Tray Finisher Tray Job Separator Tray NOTE If the optional document finisher has been installed Inner Tray will change to Finisher Tray Ifyou want to enable the changed defaults immediately move to the function screen and press the Reset key Preset Limit Item Description Preset Limit Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time Value 1 to 999 copies Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Error Handling Item Description Duplexing Error Select what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper size and media type Value 1 sided Printed in 1 sided Display Error Message to cancel printing is displayed Finishing Error Select alternative actions when finishing stapling or offsetting is not available for the selected paper size or media type Value Ignore The setting is ignored and the
222. ivcenssanediseadacseasies Ssexecvienidsawessicadahat aAA ENAA ENERE aaa 9 8 COMMON ENS piene E EE E EE 9 9 GOPI aeie E E E 9 15 S e E E E A E E S 9 15 Favontes A ppIcCatONn scrutini ane EEEE ETARA DO EE DIRETE Aaa NEENA EAEE 9 16 OIE TA E EE EI AE A E E I E E E E E E AE N E E E E E TE 9 17 PO aaae EE A EE 9 17 SV a E E E E E A sah auedesaene uae nnusgounsaneteumesaraaunenuinacs 9 19 BEE aaa E PAE EA EE A E OTE E AEE AE 9 24 Adjustment Maintenance secaccciaseneocscecccedeecnasausiesecelbexnscdwuessaudaid dasuneeddandeaenddhesukiodsesccuuued danninanaseneewinaseeees 9 26 user Logn AON MMI SUV ANON soesoenan enen ino E a EEEE A E E 9 28 First User LOGIN AGIMINISWAUON ssiaviscxuisuadesdansavans weatcratines saa vsauais wanaubadasiaxeundaeaunleanandawatelsuanansinbaneieauieqnientanns 9 28 SCF OOM SCUINGS A E A OEE E AEE OA sein idiots 9 29 Enabling Disabling User Login Administration cccccccccseeeccseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeseeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeseeeeeaeeeeeeas 9 30 Addmno aA EE eerie aE EEE E E E D A E EE 9 32 LOCal USEF AUINONZ ATION esise a e EEE 9 36 AE aE EET EE A E EEEE E EA AAEE E EE 9 37 Edi ng and Deleting USGS ss zissanuadfeatesncsarieeimaseeneiancaiainsianninensrannninatiaavedminneansaudwheiT Taa pingeid 9 38 SPE LO aean E T EE 9 41 GUP AUO AUO apei EEE E EE EE E EE 9 47 Obtain Network User Property cccccssscccceseecceececceeceecseeseceseeccueeeeceeesseaeeessugeessgeeessueeesageeessgeessags 9 51 JODA CONUN sieren a E E
223. ize and type To print on special paper such as envelope or thick paper place it on the multi purpose tray and select MP Tray 6 Select paper orientation either Portrait or Landscape to match the orientation of the document Selecting Rotate will print the document rotated 180 7 Click OK button to return to the Print dialog box 5 3 Printing gt Printing from Applications 3 Start printing a Print Printer Name Uy Properties Status Error 1 documents waiting Comments and Forms Type Document and Markups v Print Range Preview Composite 9 All Current view Subset All pages in range Reverse pages Page Handling Copies 1 B Collate 297 01 Page Scaling Shrink to Printable Area v Auto Rotate and Center Choose paper source by PDF page size eae Units mm Zoom 96 Print to file 1 1 Click OK button NOTE Click the tabs on the print settings screen and configure the print settings as necessary For more information refer to the Printer Driver User Guide Changing the default printer driver settings Windows 7 The default printer driver settings can be changed By selecting frequently used settings you can omit steps when printing The procedure is as follows 1 Click the start button and then click Devices and Printers 2 Right click the printer driver icon of the machine and click the Printer properties menu of the print
224. j 1 Limit 32 Ex GB0057_11 EE z Up to 32 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters N sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC 5 Enter the destination 10 10 Name Sales department 1 E mail Address sve Vv Cancel lt Back Select SMB GB0078_02 4 Enter the destination information SSS 10 10 Input 3 2 Limit 64 Host Name 6 Login User Name GB0705_02 GB0057_15 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Enter the next information Once you have entered one item press Next to advance to the next item Item Data to be entered Max characters Host Name The computer name that you made a note of Up to 64 characters For example PC001 The share name that you made a note of Up to 128 characters For example scannerdata If saving in a folder in the shared folder share name folder name in shared folder Port Normally 139 1 65535 In Windows Vista 7 if 139 is not used set to 445 Login User Name If the computer name and domain name that Up to 64 characters you made a note of are the same The user name that you made a note of For example james smith If the computer name and domain name that you made a note of are different Domain name that you made a note of User name that you made a note of For example abcdnet james smith Login Password Windows logon passwo
225. l Storing in Memory Off 4 Register the group e Change the restrictions as needed Select the item that you want to change Group ID 1234567890 Group Name Access Level Group 01 Administrator Cancel 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 Reject Usage GB0456_00 l GB0460_00 Use V or AN to scroll up and down GB0460_01 GB0460_02 GB0460_00 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Obtain Network User Property Set the required information to obtain the network user property from the LDAP server NOTE To obtain the network user property from the LDAP server Network Authentication must be selected for the authentication method and NTLM or Kerberos must be selected as the server type in Enabling Disabling User Login Administration on page 9 30 Server Name Enter the LDAP server name or the IP address up to 64 characters Port Set the LDAP port number or use the default port 389 Name 1 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed from the LDAP server up to 32 characters Name 2 E mail Address Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the e mail address from the LDAP server up to 128 characters Search Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time out in seconds from 5 to 255 seconds If using Active Directory of Windows the server name may be same as the se
226. l size indicator plates with the back left corner as the reference point SS i E Put the scanning side facedown Open the document processor and place the original A CAUTION Do not leave the document processor open as there is a danger of personal injury Q IMPORTANT Do not push the document processor forcefully when you close it Excessive pressure may crack the platen glass When placing books or magazines on the machine do so with the document processor in the open position 3 Common Operations gt Loading Originals Loading Originals in the Document Processor The document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals Both sides of two sided originals are scanned Originals Supported by the Document Processor Weight 45 to 160 g m duplex 50 to 120 g m Size Maximum A3 to Minimum A5 R Maximum Ledger to Minimum Statement R Capacity Plain paper 80 g m Colored paper Recycled paper High quality paper 50 sheets Mixed size originals 30 sheets Thick paper 157 g m7 25 sheets Thick paper 120 g m7 33 sheets Art paper 1 sheet Originals Not Supported by the Document Processor e Soft originals such as vinyl sheets e Transparencies such as OHP film e Carbon paper e Originals with very slippery surfaces e Originals with adhesive tape or glue e Wet originals e Originals with correction fluid which is not dried e irregularly shaped non rectangu
227. lar originals e Originals with cut out sections e Crumpled paper e Originals with folds Straighten the folds before loading Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam e Originals bound with clips or staples Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls wrinkles or creases before loading Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam How to Load Originals Q IMPORTANT e Do not make an impact on the document processor top cover such as aligning the originals on the top cover It may cause an error in the document processor e Before loading originals be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table Originals left on the original eject table may cause the new originals to jam 1 Adjust the original table size Common Operations gt Loading Originals 2 Load Originals With the side to be scanned face up insert the leading edge of the original all the way into the document processor If the original is two sided insert with the front side face up Original Loaded Indicator The original loaded indicator lights depending on how originals are placed e Green left indicator lit Original is placed properly 3 9 Common Operations gt Checking the Equipment s Serial Number Checking the Equipment s Serial Number The equipment s serial number is printed in the location shown in the figure XXX XXXXXXXXX MFP MFP 120V 6OHz 10 9A 220 240V _50 60Hz_5 8A MACHINE No
228. le size is smaller than Full Color or Grayscale Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Color Selection Ready to send 10 10 Ready to send 10 10 Dest Q n FN Check Density Recall i Normal 0 ga Color Selection Full Color 3 6 One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book Ea Orignal Image SS 1 2 2 Ea a es d Text Photo 4 a Sharpness E mail Folder FAX wy 42 vv Favorites Close Add Edi t L Shortcut GB0055_00 GB0081_02 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Select the color mode Ready to send 10 10 S Lf Auto Color Gray Auto Color B amp W Grayscale Black amp White QO i GB0022_01 3 60 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Job Finish Notice send e mail notice when a job is complete Scan to Print from User can be notified of the completion of a copy job while working at a remote desk saving the time spent waiting beside the machine for copying to finish NOTE PC should be configured in advance so that E mail can be used Email can be sent to a single destination 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Job Finish Notice Ready to copy 10 10 Ready to copy 10 10 Copies 1 a a l gt Job Fi
229. leep Mode Sleep Timer Sleep Mode Sleep Level 2 Low Power Mode Low Power Mode Low Power Timer Network Setup Configure network settings 1 Network Network Obtain IP Address Network IP Address Network Subnet Mask Network Default Gateway FAX Setup Configures basic fax settings 1 Dialing RX Mode Dialing RX Mode Dialing Mode Dialing RX Mode Reception Mode Dialing RX Mode Auto DRD 2 Local FAX Info Local FAX Info Local FAX Name Local FAX Info Local FAX Number Local FAX Info Local FAX ID Local FAX Info Print Position 3 Sound Volume Sound Volume Confirmation Speaker Volume Monitor Volume 4 Rings Rings Confirmation Answering Machine FAX TEL Switch 5 Output Output Paper Output Output Reduced RX Size 6 Redial Redial Retry Times This function is displayed when the optional fax is installed NOTE If the user authentication screen appears enter your login user name and login password and press Login The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below Model Name Login User Name FS 6525MFP Login Password FS 6530MFP 1 Display the screen lt gt System Menu Counter 1 System Menu Counter 10 10 g Language 2 1 5 E Report E Counter V4 GB0054_00 3 26 Common Operations gt Quick Setup Wizard 2 Sele
230. lowing disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 1 10 Preface gt Legal and Safety Information 4 If you include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The licence and distribution terms for any public
231. mple abcdnet com Select the user you entered Select the entered user select the Change and Read permissions In Windows XP go to step 6 NOTE Everyone gives sharing permission to everyone on the network To strengthen security it is recommended that you select Everyone and remove the Read permission checkmark 5 Click the OK button in the Advanced Sharing screen to close the screen 6 9 sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC 6 a scannerdata Properties 1 Object name C scannerdata Group or user names 2 O69 ewer 2 PCO391 PCO01 james smith To change permissions click Edit Permissions for SYSTEM Allow Deny Faill anntral Ga ay 3 Read execute USL IVIG CULES Read Write ai Advanced For special pemissions or advanced settings click Advanced Leam about access control and pemissions Select Security Select the user you entered Make sure that checkmarks appear for the Modify and Read amp execute permissions and click the Close button In Windows XP click the Security tab and then click the OK button Configuring Windows Firewall for Windows 7 Permit sharing of files and printers and set the port used for SMB transmission NOTE Log on to Windows with administrator privileges 1 Check file and printer sharing 1 From the Start menu select Control Panel System an
232. mple Login gt page 9 41 Group Authorization gt page 9 47 Obtain Network User Property page 9 51 9 29 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Enabling Disabling User Login Administration This enables user login administration Select one of the following authentication methods Local Authentication User authentication based on user properties on the local user list stored in the machine Network Authentication User authentication based on Authentication Server Use a user property stored in Authentication Server to access the network authentication login page 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 29 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 User Login LOCal User LIST GB0435_02 2 Select the authentication method 10 10 Local Authentication Network Authentication 4 When selecting Network Authentication GB0436_00 Select the server type 10 10 10 10 Server Type Kerberos Host Name Domain Name d E dJ E l O O Enter the host name 10 10 2 Input 3 Limit 64 l Server Type Kerberos Domain Name GB0437_00 GB0057_24 lt Up to 64 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters N 9 30 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Enter a domain name 10 10 2 Inp
233. multi purpose tray Value Cassette 1 to 3 Multi Purpose Tray Paper Selection Set the default paper selection Value Auto Automatically select the cassette containing paper in the same size as originals Default Paper Source Select paper source set by Default Paper Source Media for Auto B amp W Select a default media type for auto paper selection when Auto is selected of Paper Selection If Plain is selected the paper source with plain paper loaded in the specific size is selected Select All Media Types for the paper source with any kind of paper loaded in the specific size Value All Media Types Plain Transparency Rough Vellum Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Envelope Thick High Quality Custom 1 to 8 Special Paper Action When printing on Prepunched Preprint and Letterhead punch holes might not be aligned or the print direction might be upside down depending on how originals are set and the combination of copying functions In such a case select Adjust Print Direction to adjust the print direction When paper orientation is not important select Speed Priority Example copying on Letterhead P Original Paper Finished Cassette Multi Purpose Tray Original Paper Finished Cassette Multi Purpose Tray Value Adjust Print Direction Speed Priority 9 10 Setup Registration and User Management gt
234. n a directory exceeds 100 you will be unable to save additional documents 5 Select the functions Ready to store in Box 10 10 N p oe ee fr Te File 2 sided a Scan co Format L Book Resolution PDF 1 sided 300x300dpi i E Density be File Name EE SaaS abf Enty Normal 0 doc GB0096_00 Functions Cancel Select the function to use for Document Box Press Functions to display other functions For details refer to Functions for Document Box on page 7 10 N l 1 Document Box gt Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB B Start storing Start Press the Start key to start storing Remove the USB memory For details refer to Removing USB Memory on page 7 9 7 8 Document Box gt Removing USB Memory Removing USB Memory Certain operations must be performed on the screen before USB memory can be removed Q IMPORTANT Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory 1 Display the screen 10 10 Document Box Y ee Job Box Removable Memory zE Nic S 2 1 SS 1 1 _ Sub Address Box Polling Box GB0051_00 2 Select Remove Memory Use V or AN to scroll up and down 10 10 El BB asc ip DEF gt 1 25 gt B chi gt Sort Name Fe x1 gt Sort Date and Time 3 Remove the USB memory After Removable Memory can be safely removed is d
235. n password NOTE If the sender is a domain user specify the domain aa name e Host name e Path Failed to send the e mail Check the followings on the Command Center RX 2 26 e SMTP login user name and login password e POP3 login user name and login password Failed to send via FTP Check the FTP settings 6 24 e Login user name and login password NOTE If the sender is a domain user specify the domain name e Path e Folder share permissions of the recipient 1103 Failed to send via SMB Check the SMB settings 6 24 e Login user name and login password NOTE If the sender is a domain user specify the domain aa name e Path e Folder share permissions of the recipient Failed to send via FTP Check the FTP settings 6 24 e Path e Folder share permissions of the recipient 10 22 Troubleshooting gt Responding to Messages Error Corrective Actions Reference Page 1104 Failed to send the e mail Check the e mail address 6 20 NOTE If the address is rejected by the domain you cannot send the e mail 1105 Failed to send via SMB Select On of the SMB settings on the Command Center RX 2 26 Failed to send the e mail Select On of the SMTP settings on the Command Center RX Failed to send via FTP Select On of the FTP settings on the Command Center RX 1106 Failed to send the e mail Check the sender address of SMTP on the Command Center RX 2 26 1131 Failed to send via
236. nabling Disabling User Login Administration on page 9 30 System Menu Counter 10 10 User Login Local Authentication Local User List Simple login settings gt Local User Authorization Off GB0435_00 2 Select On 10 10 off booo e 1 1 E GB0908_00 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration My Panel Registers settings for individual users Settings registered here can be applied simply by logging in Set when Adding a User see page 9 32 or Editing and Deleting Users see page 9 38 Environments in which shortcut can be configured Language Select the language displayed on the touch panel Default Screen Set the screen appearing right after the user logs in default screen Shortcut Select either Shared Shortcut or Private Shortcut NOTE A shortcut must be registered ahead of time Refer to Registering Shortcuts on page 3 22 Language System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 Language English Default Screen Shortcut Shared Shortcut Cancel GB0749_00 GB0744_00 Use VV or A to scroll up and down Default Screen 10 10 10 10 Language English f Default Screen Copy 1 1 Shortcut Shared Shortcut Document Box Cancel GB0749_00 GB0745_00 Use V or AN to scroll up and down When Send or FAX has been selected sets which screen to use as the default screen 10 1
237. nd down 2 Enter the subject 3 4 Ready to send 10 10 i Input 7 e Ka Body 4 GB0088_00 GB0057_19 i Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters Enter the body Ready to send 10 10 Input 8 i Limit Subject Meeting 1 l 500 Body GB0088_01 GB0057_20 Cancel 0 4 t Press OK 6 43 sending gt Sending Functions FTP Encrypted TX Encrypt images when using FTP Encryption secures the document transmission NOTE To use FTP encryption set SSL to On in the Secure Protocol settings For details refer to Secure Protocol on page 9 22 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6 2 display the screen Ready to send i 10 10 Ready to send 10 10 enc zal Dest 0 Recall Peace esr Encrypted TX or IAN Sh TAA Velayeu IIdAHSHHSSUII a 2 Off One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book We 5 FAX Direct Transmission a of hoaa al FAX Polling RX E mail Folder Off IY iY vv Favorites GB0055_00 GB0081_05 Close Add Edi Shortcut Use V or AN to scroll up and down 2 Select the function 10 10 GB0091_00 L 6 44 Sending gt WSD Scan WSD Scan WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD compatible computer NOTE To use WSD Scan confirm that the computer used for WSD scanning and th
238. ndividual users user and sorts results 9 42 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Network user 10 10 Login User Name a scl Login Password Keyboard l System Menu Counter 10 10 E GB0704_00 Login User Name Login Password Keyboard 4l GB0704_01 Enter the Login User Name and Login Password Input 3 Limit 64 e e gt ABC A a KJ on wie r t y u i o p a s d fig h j k ALLL LCI m Input 3 Limit 64 z x clv o n m C OK System Menu Counter 10 10 Login User Name abc Login Password Keyboard KKK 3 Enter the login user name to use with simple login Limit 32 Input 6 a 1 GB0057_ 32 3 Check the settings Check the settings and change or add information as needed Name Select the item that you want to change e GB0645_00 9 43 Next gt aair 4 Input 6 Limit 32 GB0057_31 GBO0057_61 GB0704_02 GB0057_62 Setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration User Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Name User Password Login Icon Male 1 GB0645_00 System Menu Counter 10 10 Local User Network User GB0740_00 el Select the user to use for simple logins from Local User or Network User Pas
239. ng gt page 9 67 Unknown Login User Name Job page 9 69 9 55 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Enabling Disabling Job Accounting Enable job accounting 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9 55 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 Job Accounting Off Print ACCoUNtINg Keport Total Job Accounting Each Job Accounting GB0461_00 2 Enable job accounting 10 10 1 1 S e GB0462_00 NOTE When the display returns to the System Menu default screen logout is automatically executed and the screen to enter the Account ID appears To continue the operation enter the Account ID 9 56 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Login Logout If job accounting is enabled an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine Login 1 Enter the account ID 10 10 Enter the account ID Counter e a If this screen is displayed during operations enter the account ID NOTE lf you entered a wrong character press the Clear key and enter the account ID again If the entered account ID does not match the registered ID a warning beep will sound and login will fail Enter the correct account ID By pressing Check Counter you can refer to the number of pages printed and the number of pages scanned 2 Log in 10 10 Enter the account ID When the screen to enter the login user name and password
240. ng an application 1 Select the desired application and press Activate 10 10 IC CARD AUTHENTI GB0557_00 Displays details for individual applications 2 Select Official and enter the license key using the numeric keys 10 10 10 10 Trial 1 GB0608_00 GBO0609_00 el Some applications do not require you to enter a license key To use the application as a trial select Trial Q IMPORTANT If you change the date time while using the trial version of an application you will no longer be able to use the application Appendix gt Character Entry Method Character Entry Method To enter characters for a name use the on display keyboard in the touch panel following the steps as explained below NOTE QWERTY QWERTZ and AZERTY are available as keyboard layouts the same as a PC keyboard Press the System Menu Counter key Common Settings and then Keyboard Layout to choose desired layout QWERTY layout is used here as an example You may use another layout following the same steps Entry Screens Lower case Letter Entry Screen GB0057_E01 10 Display 5 6 7 Input 3 Limit 32 11 12 Description Displays entered characters Keyboard Press the character to enter ABC Symbol Select the characters that are entered To enter symbols or numbers select Symbol A a Press to switch between upper case and lower case
241. nish Notice e AN Paper _ Zoom all Density Selection al File Name Entry Auto 100 Normal 0 ra 2 doc a es ee ee p D E5 Priority Override Duplex Combine gz Collate Su vant Y _ Offset 1 sidedf gt 1 sided Of Collate GB0001_ 01 GB0002_03 Close Add Edi Shortcut Use V or AN to scroll up and down 2 Select the function 10 10 Ready to copy 4 e 4 Menu Cancel lt Back e Allows you to add edit or delete a destination GB0063_00 GB0938_00 3 Select the destination Select an e mail address from the address book Searches by destination name Ready to copy 10 10 Ready to copy 10 10 Q Py Ext Address Book 1 gt A BBB bbb abc com 1 1 1 1 S Address Entry gt 4 ccc ccc abc com My Address DDD ddd abc com 0e T Cancel GB0064_00 GB0398_00 Allows you to search for and sort destinations Displays details for individual destinations 3 61 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Select the e mail address from an external address book Ready to copy 10 10 WP Address Book C Ext Address Book Address Entry 2 My Address gt A For details on the External Address Book refer to Command Center RX User Guide GB0064_00 O X Enter the e mail address directly Ready to copy 10 10 A Ext Address Book gt Address Entry 2 In
242. nistrator When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses 10 18 9 23 9 24 Troubleshooting gt Responding to Messages P Message Paper is left Paper jam Checkpoints Corrective Actions Remove paper from the document finisher If a paper jam occurs the machine will stop and the location of the jam will be indicated on the touch panel Leave the machine on and follow the instruction to remove the jammed paper Reference Page Print overrun Message RAM disk error Checkpoints Warning Low printer memory The job was paused Press Continue to re start the job Corrective Actions An error has occurred on the RAM disk Job is canceled Press End The possible error codes and their descriptions are as follows 01 The amount of data that can be saved at once has been exceeded Restart the system or turn the power OFF ON If the error still occurs divide the file into smaller files 04 Insufficient space on the RAM disk Increase the RAM disk size by changing RAM Disk Setting in System Menu NOTE The range of RAM disk size can be increased by selecting Printer Priority in Optional Memory Reference Page 9 23 Removable memory error Is writing to a removable memory prohibited An error occurred in the removable memory The job stopped Press End The possible error codes
243. normal Sleep mode and allows Sleep Mode to be set separately for each function Printing from a computer connected with a USB cable is not available while the machine is asleep To use the machine press the Power key The time required for the machine to wake up from power save mode and resume normal operation will be longer than for normal Sleep Mode NOTE If the optional Gigabit Ethernet Board is installed Energy Saver cannot be specified For more information on Energy Saver Mode settings refer to Sleep Level on page 9 25 2 23 Preparation before Use gt Machine Setup Wizard Machine Setup Wizard The Machine Setup Wizard is launched when the equipment is turned on for the first time after being installed System Menu Counter 10 10 Welcome This wizard will help you set up your machine To continue press Next gt el Following the instructions on the screen to configure the following settings GB0889_00 Date Time settings Time Zone Summer Time Date Time Network settings Obtain IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway For details about settings refer to the help information displayed on the touch panel To make N changes after this initial configuration refer to Date Timer on page 9 24 and System on page 9 19 2 24 Preparation before Use gt Command Center RX Settings for E mail Command Center RX Settings for E mail Command Cen
244. nown 4 Display the screen Use WV or AN to scroll up and down i gt System Menu Counter rr Bp Adaress Book One Touch gt pi 1 e Printer System Menu Counter 10 10 E User Login Settings gt Job Accounting Settings Unknown ID Job Reject GB0054_03 GB0434_00 2 Select the function 10 10 Permit a e GB0491_00 9 69 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting 9 70 10 Troubleshooting This chapter explains the following topics Toner Container Replacement sasimcscscsmmdaerdedicasaesnceucn iedeenenaotacassdedinddescenapsquesceuuhadeed sausengacetmobvaseudeeniacessabanregases Waste Toner Box Replacement ccccccccsseceeecceeecuceseneceueceucecueeceueceessueeseesueesaueeeaeesaeecsuesausesaeessuessaesaeeeses PS SO DIACING Ole Sa sacamrsicyancs tate E ce scoencecesaar se 20s 0 ob oacnn see sont EE cia cess E A sce E E E OEN cece eccrine te cis sa RE EEE E arte etait E E O cicetcip E T E E EE E E E nginal Cover Glass Plater sipsniieeranan a in aa N OPE in Taa raer e i ra AUE SE DOCUMENT OCS SSO mererien Tena EESE O E a a EE E EEEE EEEE E EN SOLVING MANUNGTONS oarnein rE E eE Ea E E E E E E E Responding to Messages suicseviesudsuidsunniesastunsimsiris ond subebawisatensucuxenviehsiciiesn aieeuahesdvletuinausdeluebsausndebvensiestuisinbiesdseNeusvesies Ceding F ACSF GANAS xicccsdevetsncensmbanstesesme isaceatuo Weaseuswncesacecawoicdaed soot aa
245. ns File Separation Create several files by dividing scanned original data page by page and send the files e NOTE Three digit serial number such as abc_001 pdf abc_002 pdf 1 Display the screen is attached to the end of the file name 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6 2 display the screen 2 Ready to send 10 10 af Dest 0 i Check Recall One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book 1 T gt E mail Folder FAX W vv Favorites 2 Select the function 10 10 Ready to send 10 10 2 sided Book Original Eh 1 sided ex Sending Size eX D File Separation a3 Same as Oriainal Size Off fj Scan Resolution 2 dpi 300x300dpi Add Edit Shortcut GB0055_00 Use WV or AN to scroll up and down a e 6 42 GB0084_00 GB0081_01 sending gt Sending Functions E mail Subject Body Add subject and body when sending a document NOTE The subject can include up to 60 characters and the body can include up to 500 characters 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6 2 display the screen Ready to send 10 10 Ready to send 10 10 l Dest Recall Check ga Continuous Scan ai File Name Entry One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book 1 2 sss ka T E mail Folder FAX GB0055_00 GB0081_04 Use V or AN to scroll up a
246. ns that paper may be thin include frequent problems with paper jams or with several sheets being supplied at once Paper jams may also indicate that the paper is too thick The proper thickness is between 0 086 and 0 230 mm 11 12 Appendix gt Paper Moisture Content Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage Moisture affects how the paper is supplied the electrostatic changeability of the paper and how the toner adheres Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room High relative humidity causes paper to become damp making the edges expand so it appears wavy Low relative humidity causes paper to lose moisture making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied Try to keep the moisture content between 4 to 6 To maintain the right level of moisture content bear in mind the following considerations e Store paper in a cool well ventilated place e Store paper flat and unopened in the package Once the package is opened reseal it if the paper is not to be used for a while e Store paper sealed in the original package and box Put a pallet under the carton to keep it raised above the floor Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete floors e Before using paper that has been stored keep it at the proper moisture level for at least 48
247. o different types of destination e mail addresses folders etc in a single operation Requires the optional fax kit No of broadcast items E mail Up to 100 Folders SMP FTP Total of 5 SMB and FTP FAX Up to 100 Also depending on the settings you can send and print at the same time Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types Continue to enter E mail address or folder path so that they appear in the destination list Press the Start key to launch transmission to all destinations at one time NOTE If the destinations include a fax the images sent to all destinations will be black and white 6 26 Sending gt Registering Destinations in the Address Book Registering Destinations in the Address Book Add a new destination to the Address Book There are two registering methods contacts and groups When adding a group enter the group name and select group members from the Address Book Adding a Contact A maximum of 200 contact addresses can be registered Each address can include the information such as destination name E mail address FTP server folder path computer folder path and FAX No optional NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with administrator privileges Contact addresses can also be registered in the system menu 1 Display the screen 10 10 if l Dest 0
248. o you can take full advantage of them For information on your printer and its optional hardware check the documentation that came with it Paper Feeders Not Installed E Optional Disk Not Installed Eat 2 4 The selected machine is added 000 Print amp Fax Printers 192 168 47 21 Idle Last Used Adobe PDF 7 0 Paused iiiz Open Print Queue Options amp Supplies 192 168 47 21 Location Kind Pe nmi mills Status Idle Share this printer on the network Sharing Preferences Default printer Last Printer Used E Default paper size A4 E Pa Click the lock to prevent further changes 2 19 Preparation before Use gt Installing Software Setting TWAIN Driver Register this machine to the TWAIN Driver 1 2 3 Display the screen 1 Select Start button of the Windows display All Programs Kyocera and then TWAIN Driver Setting TWAIN Driver screen appears 2 Click Add EZ Kyocera TWAIN Driver ca x Scanner List Name Model If Ada Me eZ ie About Help Configure TWAIN Driver Enter the machine name Select this machine from the list Set units of measurement Enter the machine s IP address or host name When using SSL select the checkbox beside SSL ae SCE When user login administration is enabled M Authentication select the checkbox beside Authentication
249. oO a 0 Cancel Account ID 10 10 0 99999999 00000001 1 el GB0479_00 9 58 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting 3 Check the settings Check the settings and change or add information as needed Account Name Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Input 9 Limit 32 a Account Name Section 01 Account ID oo000 0 Print Total off Scan Others Off d Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters X Account ID Select the item that you want to change 10 10 10 10 GB0480_00 Account Name Section 01 j 0 99999999 Print Total off 2 Scan Others off OO oO oO ey p d l a Restrictions Select the item that you want to change 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 Oi Account Name Section 01 Account ID 00000001 1 Print Total Off Scan Others Off Cancel Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Counter Limit Reject Usage 2 GB0480_00 a el FAX Transmission off Use Vv or A to scroll up and down GB0480_01 For details refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 9 62 N 4 Register the account Select the item that you want to change 10 10 ff Scan Others O GB0480_00 9 59 GB0057_64 GB0476_00 Q oO lt N oO a Setup Registration and User
250. ocument to USB memory What do you want to do Select the file format for images being stored Reference Page File Format page 3 58 Automatically scan 2 sided originals 2 sided Book Original gt page 3 37 Set the resolution at which to scan originals Scan Resolution gt page 3 52 Adjust the density Density gt page 3 51 Add a file name to the scanned images File Name Entry gt page 3 63 Specify the original size Original Size gt page 3 32 Specify the original orientation to scan in the correct direction Original Orientation gt page 3 34 Scan mixed size originals Mixed Size Originals page 3 35 Change the size at which to store an image Storing Size gt page 7 15 Change the color mode for images being stored Select original image type for best results Color Selection gt page 3 60 Original Image page 3 53 Emphasize the outline of texts or lines Blur the image outline Sharpness page 3 54 Darken or lighten the background i e the area with no text or images of originals Prevent bleed through for 2 sided originals Background Density Adjust gt page 3 55 Prevent Bleed through gt page 3 56 Enlarge or shrink originals according to the storing size Zoom page 3 57 Scan a large number of originals separately and then produce as one job Continuous Scan page 3 40 Send notice by e mail when a job is com
251. ogin page 9 7 My Panel page 9 7 Group Name page 9 7 Group ID page 9 7 XIV Cassette MP Tray Settings page 9 8 Cassette 1 to 3 page Paper Size page 9 8 9 8 Media Type page 9 8 Multi Purpose Tray Paper Size page 9 8 page 9 8 Media Type page 9 8 Common Settings page 9 9 Default Screen page 9 9 Sound page 9 9 Buzzer page 9 9 Volume page 9 9 Key Confirmation page 9 9 Job Finish page 9 9 Ready page 9 9 Warning page 9 9 Key Confirmation USB Keyboard page 9 9 FAX Speaker Volume refer to Fax Operation Guide FAX Monitor Volume refer to Fax Operation Guide Original Settings page 9 9 Custom Original Size page 9 9 Original Auto Detect page 9 9 Paper Settings page 9 Custom Paper Size page 9 70 10 Media Type Settings page 9 70 Default Paper Source page 9 10 Paper Selection page 9 70 Media for Auto B amp W page 9 70 Special Paper Action page 9 10 XV Function Defaults page File Format page 9 72 9 12 Original Orientation page 9 72 Collate Offset page 9 12 File Separation page 9 12 Scan Resolution page 9 72 Color Selection page 9 72 Original Image page 9 72 Background Density Adj page 9 72 EcoPrint page 9 72 Prevent Bleed through page 9 72 FAX
252. ogin Password 10 10 Input 3 Limit 64 Host Name Login User Name GB0705_02 O fed 0O 2 as T GB0057_15 Use V or AN to scroll up and down For more information refer to Specifying a New PC Folder on page 6 27 N 6 28 Sending gt Registering Destinations in the Address Book 2 Confirm the connection status E 10 10 E 10 10 Host Name PCOO1 Path pc001 scannerdata 1 2 Port 139 Search Folder from Network Search Folder by Host Name 1 1 Connection Test Login User Name 1 _abcdnet james smith e GB0705_03 Connected appears when connection to the destination is correctly established If Cannot connect appears review the entry 3 R 10 10 Host Name PCO001 Path pc001 scannerdata Port 139 Login User Name _abcdnet james smith Cancel GB0705_03 The Folder FTP Address 1 Enter Host Name Path Port Login User Name and Login Password SSSSsa 10 10 Input 3 Limit 64 l Host Name Login User Name GB0709_02 Use V or A to scroll up and down For more information refer to Specifying a New PC Folder on page 6 21 2 Confirm the connection status Search Folder from Network Host Name Path Login User Name 1 GB0709_03 Connected appears when connection to the destination is correctly established If Cannot connect appears review the entry 6 29
253. ollate 3 vv Favorites iE Priority Override GB0001_01 GB0002_03 Add Edi Shortcut Use V or AN to scroll up and down 2 Select the function Ready to copy 10 10 GB0069_00 i 3 64 4 Copying This chapter explains the following topics BASIC WDSIAUIONL oa e e e E E E E ganic asestonshsannsodsnedees sds senteamaduaunatenecsacttare 4 2 CSO NG FUNGUO ere cette etre rE E r E E E T E EE 4 4 LOO e E E E E E E o seecenst sem 4 5 BUTE Co A E E E E E E EE E O E EA E E A T EE A E E ONE cleseceeeedoee c 4 8 COMMONS ereire EE a EEE EEEE E E ceccueem escantessoresenes 4 12 EGOR canina E EEE E E EE E EEEE E EE 4 15 AUO MoJe ROUD rea R E E A 4 16 MOUDE C ODY poeni ect E E E E E AE E EE E E EE E E E E T 4 17 4 1 Copying gt Basic Operation Basic Operation 1 Press the Copy key Copy NOTE If the touch panel is turned off press the Energy Saver key or the Power key and wait for the machine to warm up 2 Place the originals O For details refer to Loading Originals on page 3 7 j pg l ELL X 3 Selecting the functions een 12 Oty Geis fy Select the copier s functions to use Paper iON ae BB density Press Functions to display other functions lt Selection aan aie Eua pee O Refer to Copying Functions on page 4 4 a ee ee ee ir Duplex Combine gg Collate am oS _ Offset Tsided gt gt t sided Of
254. on When Other is selected for Authenticate the password set here will be used for authentication The maximum length of the login password is 64 characters SMTP Security Enables or disables the SMTP Security When this protocol is enabled either SSL TLS or STARTTLS must be selected To enable SMTP security the SMTP port may have to be changed according to the server settings Typically 465 for SSL TLS and 25 or 587 for STARTTLS are well known SMTP ports POP before SMTP Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time out in seconds when you have selected POP before SMTP as the Authentication Protocol Test Tests to confirm that the settings on this page are correct When the Test button is pressed this machine tries to connect to the SMTP server E mail Size Limit Enter the maximum size of E mail that can be sent in kilobytes When the value is 0 no maximum size is set Sender Address Enter the E mail address of the person responsible for the machine such as the machine administrator so that a reply or non delivery report will go to a person rather than to the machine The sender address must be entered correctly for SMTP authentication The maximum length of the sender address is 128 characters Signature Enter the signature The signature is free form text that will appear at the end of the E mail body It is often used for further identification of the machine The maximum length of the si
255. ons set for document box The following types of shortcuts are available Private Shortcut Private shortcuts are only available for use by the logged in user They can only be set while using user login administration Shared Shortcut Shared shortcuts can be used by all machine users When using user login administration shared shortcuts can only be set by users who have logged in as administrators 1 Display the screen Ready to copy 10 10 Ready to copy 10 10 l Copies 1 i ir a El Si remo ina Size Paper mS Zoom all Density pal Auto Selection az Original Orientation Auto 100 Normal 0 i Top Edge on Top a a A o gt Mixed Size Originals Duplex y Combine errr COllate nest 4 J H Offset Paper Output 2 1 sided gt 1 sided Off Collate Inner tray M GB0001_01 GB0002_00 nd any Add Edit Shortcut j Press Functions on the Copy Send or Document Box screen and then Add Edit Shortcut 2 Select Add ates eee ee 10 10 GB0790_00 3 Select the key 10 10 Private Shortcut 1 Private Shortcut 2 Shared Shortcut 1 Shared Shortcut 2 Cancel Next gt GB0791_00 i Select the key to which you wish to register the shortcut NOTE If you select a shortcut number already registered the currently registered shortcut can be replaced with a new one 3 22 Common Operations gt Shortcuts Select t
256. opying Printing Checking the Equipment s Serial Number ccceccecececeeeceeeceeeeseeeseeeseeeeseeeeeeseeesaaeeaes 3 10 Checking th COUNIEN sacgceccevisrwecatenscnusades venience wieigtunentsineadate esau aeia NEA E ANRA 3 11 Lo OOE era E E E A E 3 12 LOGI sea a E E E E E G E E E E E E A 3 12 LOGOUT sancie E E E E A 3 13 FAVO Secs tetera E names E EE E EE TEE A E TEE 3 14 Registering PAVOMCS sirisser nianna ai Ta EEEa EEA 3 14 Editing and Deleting Favorites 2 00 cceccccccsecceeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeseeeaeeseeeseeeaeeeeeaeeeas 3 18 SING AV OMICS aactctosiuasnetnautsaned taste cacanchorsdaastannmaivend mi nild OE E A at 3 20 ADDIO eee ene eee Cen er ee ee crn ee etre re eet ee en eer ae cer ee 3 21 OMG US aore E E EEE E 3 22 Registering Shortcuts ccccccccecccececeeeceneeceeecececeuececesseecseeseeeesaeesueeseeeeaeeeseessaness 3 22 Edit ng and Deleting SNOMCUIS xixsececeticdevecececswessedeaihdeveed iabevaneeeseublceaddoulsacweteceseeedeasns 3 24 EIS SON CLS E E E E E T E E N A S A E E 3 25 AUKO UO NIZ eee e E EEE 3 26 mE SEEE E EE P E S E N P EE E N E EE E A E A 3 28 CAN ENG JODS rrean aa E O EE E E AE EEE E 3 29 Using VARIOUS FUNCOMS ssiussmuntiatrananscumuvndencurmestulnsden aware pnanadiiudentsauuntdcaauacntaeadivbwandemwunasiantn 3 30 COMMON FUNGCUOMAIINY sassvesdevesscnnucsossaoasscncs aaa ance acasacenesenaasaeusecoenese 3 31 CGIAR NZS aceite ty A E E O E E E E E E T A N E O eg teeeeeeaadoets 3 32 O
257. or IPv6 Value Off On After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON 9 20 Item Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Description Protocol Detail The table below lists the network related function settings The network related functions are available when TCP IP is On NetBEUI Selects whether or not to receive documents using NetBEUI Value Off On LPD Select whether or not to receive documents using LPD as the network protocol Value Off On SMTP E mail TX Select whether or not to send e mail using SMTP Value Off On POP3 E mail RX Select whether or not to receive e mail using POP3 Value Off On FTP Client Transmission Select whether or not to send documents using FTP When selecting On set the FTP Port Number Use the FTP default port 21 Value Off On Port 1 65535 FTP Server Reception Select whether or not to receive documents using FTP Value Off On SMB Client Select whether or not to send documents using SMB When selecting On set the SMB default Transmission Port Number Use the SMB default port 139 For Windows Vista 7 use 445 Value Off On Port 1 65535 LDAP Select whether or not to use LDAP Value Off On SNMP Select whether or not to communicate using SNMP Value Off On SNMPv3 Select whether or not to communicate using SNMPv3 Value Off
258. or details on Job Accounting refer to Job Accounting on page 9 53 Printer Printing from computers settings are generally made on the application software screen However the following settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine System Configures machine system settings Network Configures network settings Interface Block Setting This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or optional interfaces Security Level The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by service personnel for maintenance work There is no need for customers to use this menu Restart the CPU without turning the main power switch off Use this to deal with any unstable operation by the machine Same as the computer restart RAM Disk Setting A RAM disk can be created and its size can be set Optional Memory When optional memory is installed select the memory allocation scheme based on the application in which you are using the equipment Optional Function You can use the optional applications installed on this machine Date Timer Configures settings related to the date and time Adjustment Maintenance Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Language Description Language Select the lang
259. or XPS format 1 Place the originals For details refer to Loading Originals on page 3 7 N 2 Plug the USB memory Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot A1 When the message Removable Memory is recognized Displaying files Are you sure is displayed press Yes Q IMPORTANT Use USB memory formatted by this machine If a USB memory formatted by any other device is used The removable memory is not formatted may appear Refer to Check of Device Status on page 8 11 7 6 Document Box gt Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB 3 Display the screen 10 10 EY B asc Ge DEF 1 25 BS cui gt A kL gt V Menu Cancel GB0089_00 When the machine reads the USB memory Removable Memory screen may appear NOTE If the screen does not appear press the Document Box key and then Removable Memory Select the folder IDocumentBox 2222 O Box 10 10 So i gt DEF 7 9 2 3PG e 1 1 EA Loa Document Box 2 Box 10 10 3 Store File Menu Cancel GB0089_03 i GB0089_00 Select All l GB0107_00 Select the folder where the file will be stored and press Menu and then Store File The machine will display the top 3 folder levels including the root folder To return to a higher level folder press lt Back NOTE Up to 100 documents and folders can be displayed for each directory If the number of documents and folders i
260. ort department BOX 1 a gt VV e Up to 24 characters can be entered 003 Support department 0234567 ew GB0057_18 s5 GB0429_00 Cancel lt Back Next gt O E Ee Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters N Register the destination Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Name Sales department 1 FAX Number 0123456 Sub Address TX Start Speed 33600bps GB0754_00 Sending gt Adding a Destination on One Touch Key Editing and Deleting One Touch Key Edit and delete the destinations you added to One Touch Key 1 Display the screen Use V or A to scroll up and down System Menu Counter a E Internet 2 AN LP Adoress Book One Touch 4 5 C User Login Job Accounting E Printer V4 System Menu Counter 10 10 lt gt System Menu Counter 0 1 oO fo lt D a 0 Address Book gt One Touch Key Address Book Defaults gt Print List gt GB0411_00 2 Edit or delete the destination To edit the destination 10 10 001 Sales 002 None 003 None i department 1 1 004 None 005 None 006 None 10 10 Delete 3 008 None 009 None 007 None 012 None 010 None 011 None tL J Select the One Touch Key you wish to edit and press Menu followed by Edit GB0422_01 GB0430_00 To delete System Menu
261. otation page 4 76 Job Finish Notice page 3 67 File Name Entry page 3 63 Priority Override page 3 64 Add Edit Shortcut page 3 22 Send One Touch Key page 6 79 Address Book page 6 17 Ext Address Book refer to Command Center RX User Guide E mail page 6 20 Folder page 6 27 FAX refer to Fax Operation Guide WSD Scan page 6 45 Functions File Format page 3 58 Original Size page 3 32 Original Orientation page 3 34 Mixed Size Originals page 3 35 2 sided Book Original page 3 37 Sending Size page 6 40 File Separation page 6 42 Scan Resolution page 3 52 Density page 3 57 Color Selection page 3 60 Original Image page 3 53 Sharpness page 3 54 Background Density Adj page 3 55 Prevent Bleed through page 3 56 FAX TX Resolution refer to Fax Operation Guide Zoom page 3 57 Continuous Scan page 3 40 File Name Entry page 3 63 E mail Subject Body page 6 43 Job Finish Notice page 3 67 FTP Encrypted TX page 6 44 FAX Delayed Transmission refer to Fax Operation Guide FAX Direct Transmission refer to Fax Operation Guide FAX Polling RX refer to Fax Operation Guide Add Edit Shortcut page 3 22 XI Document Job Box page 5 5 OX Removable Menu Store File File Format page 3 58 Memory
262. ount by Paper Size page 9 68 Unknown ID Job page 9 69 Printer page 9 17 Emulation page 9 17 EcoPrint page 9 77 Override A4 Letter page 9 17 Duplex page 9 17 Copies page 9 17 Orientation page 9 77 Wide A4 page 9 17 Form Feed TimeOut page 9 78 LF Action page 9 78 CR Action page 9 78 Job Name page 9 78 User Name page 9 78 Paper Feed Mode page 9 78 Resolution page 9 78 KIR page 9 78 XVIII System page 9 79 Network page 9 79 Host Name page 9 79 TCP IP page 9 19 TCP IP page 9 19 IPv4 Settings page 9 79 IPv6 Settings page 9 20 Protocol Detail page 9 27 WSD Scan page 9 22 WSD Print page 9 22 Enhanced WSD page 9 22 Enhanced WSD SSL page 9 22 IPSec page 9 22 Secure Protocol page SSL page 9 22 9 22 IPP Security page 9 22 HTTP Security page 9 22 LDAP Security Ext Address Book page 9 22 LDAP Security User Property page 9 22 SMTP Security page 9 23 POP3 Security User 1 page 9 23 POP3 Security User 2 page 9 23 POP3 Security User 3 page 9 23 LAN Interface page 9 23 Interface Block Setting page 9 23 USB Host page 9 23 USB Device page 9 23 USB Storage page 9 23 Optional Interface 1 page 9 23 Optional Interface 2 page 9 23
263. per Selection A function to automatically select paper in the same size as original at printing Auto Sleep A mode designed for electrical power saving activated when the machine is left unused or data transfer for a specific period In Sleep mode power consumption is kept to a minimum Bonjour Bonjour also known as zero configuration networking is a service that automatically detects computers devices and services on an IP network Bonjour because an industry standard IP protocol is used allows devices to automatically recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set Bonjour also sends and receives network packets by UDP port 5353 If a firewall is enabled the user must check that UDP port 5353 is left open so that Bonjour will run correctly Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only certain Bonjour packets If Bonjour does not run stably check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour is registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets are accepted If you install Bonjour on Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later the Windows firewall will be set up correctly for Bonjour Default Gateway This indicates the device such as a computer or router that serves as the entrance exit gateway for accessing computers outside the network that you are on When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP address data is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway DHCP Dynam
264. peration Guide Job Box page 5 5 Quick Copy Job Retention page 5 7 Deletion of Job Retention page 5 70 Polling Box refer to Fax Operation Guide FAX refer to Fax Operation Guide Favorites Application Default Screen page 9 76 Application page 9 16 Internet Proxy page 9 77 Address Book One Touch Address Book page 6 27 One Touch Key page 6 36 Address Book Defaults Sort Print List refer to Fax Operation Guide XVII User Login Job Accounting User Login Settings User Login page 9 30 page 9 28 Local User List page 9 32 Simple login settings page 9 47 Simple Login page 9 47 Simple Login Setup page 9 47 Group Authorization Set page 9 47 Local User Authorization page 9 36 Group Authorization page 9 47 Group List page 9 47 Obtain NW User Property page 9 57 Job Accounting Job Accounting page 9 56 Settings page 9 53 Print Accounting Report page 9 66 Total Job Accounting page 9 64 Printed Pages page 9 64 Scanned Pages page 9 64 FAX TX Pages page 9 64 FAX TX Time page 9 64 Counter Reset page 9 64 Each Job Accounting page 9 64 Accounting List page 9 58 Default Setting page 9 67 Apply Limit page 9 67 Copier Printer Count page 9 67 Default Counter Limit page 9 67 C
265. plete Job Finish Notice gt page 3 61 Document Box gt Functions for Document Box Duplex Print a document 1 sided or 2 sided Select the original binding orientation and desired final binding orientation 2 sided Print a 2 sided document so that the sheets are aligned properly for binding on the left or right 2 sided Print a 2 sided document so that the sheets are aligned properly for binding on the top 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory on page 7 3 display the screen Ready to print from Box 10 10 ies 1 _ Paper Collate Offset Collate amp Selection A4 D GB0097_00 2 Select the function 10 10 ka we 1 sided 2 sided 2 sided GB0065_00 Document Box gt Functions for Document Box Encrypted PDF Password Enter the preassigned password to print the PDF data 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory on page 7 3 display the screen 2 Ready to print from Box 10 10 Ready to print from Box 10 10 Copies ls g ii PDF Password _ Paper ge Collate Duplex w ms Selection _ Offset La a PEOTI Print A4 D Collate 1 sided dpi Paper Size D A XPS Fit to Page XP off Add Edi Shortcut GB0097_00 GBO0099_01 Cancel Use VV or AN to scroll up and down Input 0 Limit 256 z x el
266. port department 0234567 c _ 002 Support department EF iv V GB0428_01 GB0114_04 r Cancel E Jr 7 Enter the address number 10 10 ey 10 10 Name Support department Member Member 0 1 1 gt Address Number Auto J Press or numeric keys to enter a particular Address Number 1 250 000 250 GB0420_02 GB0217_01 Address Number is an ID for a destination You can select any available number out of 200 numbers for contacts and 50 numbers for groups If you set 000 as the address number the address is registered under the lowest available number 8 Register the group Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Name Support department Member Member 2 Address Number Auto GB0420_03 Cancel 6 33 Sending gt Registering Destinations in the Address Book Editing and Deleting Address Book Entries Edit and delete the destinations contacts you added to the Address Book 1 Display the screen 10 10 oes 0 Check S n 2 Recall gt One Touch Key Ext Address Book E mail Fi _ _ ___ s Functions GB0055_00 10 10 Address Book All ly TQ HH 001 BB Sales department 1 123456 cm al 001 Support department 123 456789 co Ga 1 1 _ 001 in 12345 com c 1001 w Support department 11111 com _ 3 a a Cancel Foon A of 2 Edit or delet
267. ports to which this rule applies Steps Does this rule apply to TCP or UDP Does this rule apply to all local ports or specific local ports Select Specific local ports and enter 139 a ee Action Specify the action to be taken when a connection matches the conditions specified in the rule Steps Rule Type What action should be taken when a connection matches the specified conditions Protocol and Ports 4 WO Allow tne connection i it 1s secure This includes only connections that have been authenticated by using IPsec Connections will be secured using the settings in IPsec properties and rules in the Connection Security Rule node Customize Block the connection 6 12 sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC r New Inbound Rule Wizard Profile Specify the profiles for which this rule applies Steps Rule Type When does this rule apply Protocol and Ports Action 1 v Domain Profle Applies when a computer is connected to its corporate domain Name v Private Applies when a computer is connected to a private network location v Public Applies when a computer is connected to a public network location Make sure all checkboxes are selected 9 F New Inbound Rule Wizard Name Specify the name and description of this rule Steps Rule Type Protocol and Ports Action Profile Name Scan
268. pplied with the developer unit Reference Page Drum unit is not installed Message Checkpoints Replace the drum unit f to our specified drum unit See the leaflet supplied with the drum unit for details Corrective Actions Reference Page Error occurred at cassette Remove the indicated cassette Press Next gt to follow the instructions 10 15 Troubleshooting gt Responding to Messages Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Failed to send the file information Is the machine and the PC to which the scanned image is to be sent connected to the network Check the network and SMB settings The network cable is connected The hub is not operating properly The server is not operating properly Host name and IP address Port number 2 8 Is the account information user ID password used to access the shared folder to which the scanned image is to be sent incorrect Check the following settings of the PC to which the scanned image is to be sent Host name Path Login user name rN NOTE If the sender is a domain e user specify the domain name Login User ID Domain Name Example sa720XXXX km Login password Folder share permissions of the recipient Failed to specify Job Accounting Failed to specify Job Accounting when processing the job externally The job is canceled Press End
269. put 11 Limit 128 T 2 My Address T Up to 128 characters can be entered e zixlclivlibinimi GB0064_00 Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters O N Uses the e mail address of the logged in user Ready to copy 10 10 T Address Book Py Ext Address Book gt 1 1 Address Entry gt 2 My Address GB0064_00 2 o gt x lt cr Vv Cancel T This setting is displayed when using user login administration 4 Accept the destinations Press OK O 2 GB0057_05 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions File Name Entry Add a file name Additional information such as Job No and Date and Time can also be set You can check a job history or job status using the job name date and time or job number specified here 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen Copy Send Ready to copy 10 10 Ready to copy 10 10 Copies 1 E SSS SSS Job Finish Notice Te P Z I Densi zai ee _ oom __ sm ensity Selection pij j File Name Entry Auto 100 Normal 0 M a i o at z l s gt pam Priority Override 2 Duplex Combine ern Collate A1 u L Offset 1 sided gt 1 sided Off Collate GB0001_01 GB0002_03 Add Edi Shortcu aid Use V or AN to scroll up and down ee
270. r Remove paper from the inner tray Printing then resumes Invalid configuration Are the originals loaded When placing originals on the platen correctly place them face down and align them with the original size indicator plates When placing originals in the optional document processor place them face up When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Job Accounting restriction Is the acceptable printing count The printing count exceeded the exceeded restricted by Job Accounting acceptable count restricted by Job exceeded Accounting Cannot print any more This job is canceled Press End Job separator tray is full of paper s the maximum capacity of the Follow the instruction indicated on the job separator tray exceeded machine and remove paper from the job separator tray When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses K Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page KPDL error PostScript error has occurred The job is canceled Press End When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses 10 17 Troubleshooting gt Responding to Messages Message Machine failure Checkpoints Corrective Actions Internal e
271. r Tray 2 2 Interface Block 9 23 Interrupt Copy 4 17 IP Address 11 24 Setup 9 19 IPP Protocol Detail 9 21 IPP over SSL Protocol Detail 9 21 IPP Security 9 22 IPSec Setup 9 22 Job Canceling 3 29 Checking History 8 6 Checking Status 8 2 Details of the Status Screens 8 3 Pause and Resumption 8 3 Sending the Log History 8 7 Job Accounting 9 53 Adding an Account 9 58 Counting the Number of Pages Printed 9 64 Default Setting 9 67 Editing and Deleting 9 60 Enabling Disabling 9 56 Login 9 57 Logout 9 57 Printing an Accounting Report 9 66 Restricting the Use of the Machine 9 62 Job Box 5 5 Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents 5 10 Private Print 5 5 Proof and Hold 5 7 Job Finish Notice 3 61 Job Separator 2 2 JPEG TIFF Print 7 13 K Keyboard Layout 9 14 KPDL 11 24 L Language 9 5 LAN Interface 9 23 LDAP Protocol Detail 9 21 LDAP Security 9 22 Legal Information 1 9 Legal Restriction on Copying 1 8 Legal Restriction on Scanning 1 8 Login 3 12 9 57 Index 2 Logout 3 13 9 57 Low Power Mode 2 22 LPD Protocol Detail 9 21 M Machine Setup Wizard 2 24 Main Power Switch 2 4 Manual Setting IPv6 9 20 Margin 3 46 Measurement 9 14 Mixed Size Originals 3 35 Monotype Imaging License Agreement 1 11 Multi Purpose Tray 2 3 11 25 Loading Paper 3 5 Paper Size and Media Type 9 8 Multi Sending 6 26 N NetBEUI 11 25 Protocol Detail 9 21 Network Preparing 2 8 Setup 2 24 9 19 Network Cable Connecting 2 1
272. r continue the job when error has occurred 9 14 Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions 9 14 Keyboard Layout Change the layout of the touch panel keyboard used to enter 9 14 characters USB Keyboard Type Select the type of USB keyboard that you want to use 9 15 Offset One Page Documents Set whether one page documents are sorted 9 15 Copy Configures settings for copying functions 9 15 Send Configures settings for sending functions 9 15 Document Box Configures settings related to the Job Box and Sub Address Box For details on Job Box refer to Printing on page 5 1 and for details on Sub Address Box refer to the Operation Guide for FAX kit FAX Configures settings for fax functions Refer to the Operation Guide for FAX kit Favorites Application Configure settings for Favorites Application Internet Set the proxy for connection to the Internet from an application Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Address Book One Touch Description Configures Address Book and One Touch Key settings For details on Address Book refer to Registering Destinations in the Address Book on page 6 27 and for details on One Touch Key refer to Adding a Destination on One Touch Key on page 6 36 Reference Page User Login Job Accounting Configures settings related to machine management For details on User Login refer to User Login Administration on page 9 28 and f
273. r the equipment Set the equipment domain server and domain server and data destination data destination computer to the same computer differ time Is the screen displaying Send error Refer to Responding to Send Error 10 22 You can also enter a full computer name as the host name for example pc001 abcdnet com You can also enter login user names in the following formats Domain_name user_name for example abcdnet james smith User_name domain_name for example james smith abcdnet 10 12 Troubleshooting gt Responding to Messages Responding to Messages If the touch panel or the computer displays any of these messages follow the corresponding procedure A Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Acceptable staple count Is the acceptable staple count Press Continue to print without exceeded exceeded For details refer to stapling Document Finisher option on Press Cancel to cancel the job page 11 22 Activation error Turn the main power switch off and on If the error exists contact administrator Add the following paper in Is the indicated cassette out of Load paper cassette paper Press Paper Selection to select the other paper source Press Continue to print on the paper in the currently selected paper source Add the following paper in the Is the paper of the selected size Load paper multi purpose tray loaded in the multi purpose
274. rd Up to 64 characters Not case sensitive NOTE lf you change the date time while using the trial version of an application you will no longer be able to use the application Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters N 6 15 sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC 2 Confirm the connection status Host Name PCOO1 Path pc001 scannerdata 1 2 Port 139 Login User Name 1 _abcdnet james smith 10 10 SSS 10 10 Search Folder from Network GB0705_03 GB0696_00 Cancel Connected appears when connection to the destination is correctly established If Cannot connect appears review the entry 3 R 10 10 Host Name PC001 Path pc001 scannerdata Port 139 Login User Name abcdnet james smith Cancel GB0705_03 amp Enter the address number Select the item that you want to change 10 10 000 250 Address Number Auto re Cancel 3 ae ae J Press or numeric keys to enter a particular Address Number 1 250 J Use VV or A to scroll up and down GB0078_03 GB0217_01 Address Number is an ID for a destination You can select any available number out of 200 numbers for contacts and 50 numbers for groups If you set 000 as the address number the address is registered under the lowest available number 7 Register the destination 10 10 SMB Cancel GB0078_
275. rd Zoom 2 3 86 A3 gt gt B4 A4 gt gt B5 Zoom Entry gt 81 B4 gt gt A4 B5 gt gt A5 Cancel GB0005_00 G Use V or AN to scroll up and down Select the zoom level GBO0006_01 Copying gt Copying Functions Zoom Entry Ready to copy 10 10 100 Auto Standard Zoom Zoom Entry gt GB0005_00 S e Enter the magnification 10 10 Ready to copy 25 400 AEA OK e GB0007_00 Copying gt Copying Functions Duplex Print 1 sided or open book originals to 2 sided or 2 sided or open book originals to 1 sided Select the original binding orientation and desired final binding orientation 1 sided gt gt 1 sided Prints 1 sided to 1 sided 1 sided gt gt 2 sided Prints 1 sided to 2 sided 2 sided gt gt 1 sided Prints 2 sided to 1 sided 2 sided gt gt 2 sided Prints 2 sided to 2 sided Others Duplex 1 sided gt gt 1 sided Prints 1 sided to 1 sided 1 sided gt gt 2 sided Prints 1 sided to 2 sided 2 sided gt gt 1 sided Prints 2 sided to 1 sided 2 sided gt gt 2 sided Prints 2 sided to 2 sided Book gt gt 1 sided Prints open book originals to 1 sided Prints open book originals to 2 sided Binding in Original If you choose a 2 sided sheet original select the binding J gt edge of the originals E Binding in Finishing If you choose a 2 sided copy select the binding edge of the finished copies gt gt gt
276. reas of the image Prevent Bleed through This setting prevents the image on one side of the paper from showing through to the other side when printed Scan Profiles This is used to check current settings and store frequently used settings When the Configuration button is clicked a setting screen opens with buttons for Add Edit and Delete Add The current settings can be saved as a Scan Profile Edit The name and comments of the selected Scan Profile can be changed Delete 3 Place the originals 4 Scan the originals Delete saved Scan Profiles For details refer to Loading Originals on page 3 7 Click the Scan button The document data is scanned 6 49 Sending gt Scanning using TWAIN 6 50 T Document Box This chapter explains the following topics Anari Docume m BON pia a E a E E saceaedaon 7 2 Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory cccccccseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeseeeeesaueeesaeeeesaaees 7 3 Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB cecccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeseeeeesaeeeesaaeeeeeseeees 7 6 Removing USB MEMON xatuveicvecvetnsanctiesneswsatdvamseianguasdiensiistvassadsnduatuanwadcawalswsudbatuicustedveardaxusorsiesatvenddusdnivaiaddeauueins 7 9 FUNC WOMNS TOR LOCUS IO uaecaciaotesaeecemeicentec E e a O E sense nubousud E 7 10 PUDIG ete arte cco ere cc gs pe sche ssc erste ef EE E E E E E
277. red Login Password Enter the password to login up to 16 characters Account Name Add an account where the user belongs The user who registered his her account name can login without entering the account ID Refer to Job Accounting on page 9 53 E mail Address The user can register his her E mail address up to 128 characters The registered address will be automatically selected for subsequent operations that need any E mail function Access Level Select Administrator or User for user access privileges My Panel Registers settings for individual users Settings registered here can be applied simply by logging in Local Authorization Restricts the use of the machine by user Local user authorization must be enabled to use this function see page 9 36 The following restriction items are available Printer Select whether or not to reject usage of print functions for the printer Copy Select whether or not to reject usage of copy functions Send Select whether or not to reject usage of send functions other than faxing FAX Transmission Select whether or not to reject usage of the FAX transmissions Storing in Box Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the document boxes Storing in Memory Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the removable memory Mandatory at user registration NOTE By default one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator p
278. reface gt Notice Notice Safety Conventions in This Guide The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user other individuals and surrounding objects and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine The symbols and their meanings are indicated below WARNING Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient A attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points CAUTION Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from A insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points Symbols The A symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings Specific points of attention are indicated inside the symbol A N General warning A Warning of high temperature The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions Specifics of the prohibited action are indicated inside the symbol S Warning of prohibited action Q Disassembly prohibited The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed Specifics of the required action are indicated inside the symbol Q Alert of required action Z Remove the power plug from the outlet Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection Please contact your service representative to order a
279. remain in a waiting state but power consumption is still reduced to a minimum when there is no activity with the device within a set amount of time Sleep The device automatically enters Sleep when 1 minute has passed since the device was last used The amount of time of no activity that must pass before Sleep is activated may be lengthened For more information refer to Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2 23 Low Power Mode The device automatically enters Low Power Mode when 1 minute have passed since the device was last used The amount of time of no activity that must pass before Low Power Mode is activated may be lengthened For more information refer to Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode on page 2 22 By default Sleep overrides Low Power Mode Automatic 2 Sided Copy Function This device includes 2 sided copying as a standard function For example by copying two 1 sided originals onto a single sheet of paper as a 2 sided copy it is possible to lower the amount of paper used For more information refer to Duplex on page 4 8 Printing in duplex mode reduces paper consumption and contributes to the conservation of forest resources Duplex mode also reduces the amount of paper that must be purchased and thereby reduces cost It is recommended that machines capable of duplex printing be set to use duplex mode by default Resource Saving Paper For the preservation and sustainable use of forest resources it is recommended that recycle
280. replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide are illegible or if the guide itself is missing fee required NOTE An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases because this machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function 1 2 Preface gt Notice Environment The service environmental conditions are as follows e Temperature 50 to 90 5 F 10 to 32 5 C e Humidity 15 to 80 However adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality It is recommended to use the machine at a temperature around 60 8 to 80 6 F or less 16 to 27 C humidity around 36 to 65 In addition Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine e Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight e Avoid locations with vibrations e Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations e Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air e Avoid poorly ventilated locations If the floor is delicate against casters when this machine is moved after installation the floor material may be damaged During copying some ozone is released but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one s health If however the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of copies the smell may become unpleasant To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work it
281. riginal Image 9 12 Original Orientation 9 12 PDF A Setting 9 13 Prevent Bleed through 9 12 Scan Resolution 9 12 XPS Fit to Page 9 13 Zoom 9 12 Default Gateway 11 23 Setup 9 19 Default Screen 9 9 Density 3 51 Destination 6 17 Checking and Editing 6 25 Choosing by One Touch Key 6 19 Choosing from the Address Book 6 17 Dest Check before Send 9 15 Entering a New E mail Address 6 20 Entry Check for New Dest 9 15 Multi Sending 6 26 Specifying a New PC Folder 6 21 Index 1 Device Status 8 11 FAX 8 12 Printer 8 12 Removable Memory 8 12 Scanner 8 11 DHCP 11 23 Setup 9 19 DHCP IPv6 11 23 Setup 9 20 Document Box Job Box 7 2 Document Processor 2 2 dpi 11 24 Duplex 4 8 E EcoPrint 11 24 Copy 4 15 Printer 9 17 Emulation 11 24 selection 9 17 Encrypted PDF Password 7 12 Energy Saving Control Function 1 12 Enhanced WSD 9 22 11 24 Environment 1 3 Error Handling 9 14 Expansion Memory 11 3 F Favorites 3 14 Editing and Deleting 3 18 Registering 3 14 Using 3 20 FAX Kit 11 3 File Format 3 58 File Name Entry 3 63 File Separation 6 42 First Print Time 11 19 11 20 Front Cover 2 2 FTP 11 24 FTP Client Transmission Protocol Detail 9 21 FTP Encrypted TX 6 44 FTP Server Reception Protocol Detail 9 21 G Glossary 11 23 GPL LGPL 1 9 Grayscale 3 60 11 24 H Handles 2 2 2 4 Help 11 24 Help Screen 3 28 Host Name 9 19 HTTP Protocol Detail 9 21 HTTPS Protocol Detail 9 21 HTTP Security 9 22 Inne
282. rinter paper or any paper with a special surface coating Such paper may cause paper jams or other faults When using media types other than plain paper such as recycled or colored paper always specify the media type setting Refer to Media Type on page 9 8 The cassettes can hold paper with weights up to 163 g m If you are using a paper weight between 106 and 163 g m7 set the media type to Thick Do not load thick paper that is heavier than 163 g m in the cassettes Use the multi purpose tray for paper that is heavier than 163 g m If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag 1 Adjust the cassette size Adjust the cassette size to reflect the size of paper being loaded Paper sizes are marked on the cassette NOTE When using 11 x 17 3 3 Common Operations gt Loading Paper 2 Load paper 3 4 Common Operations gt Loading Paper Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray The multi purpose tray will hold up to 100 sheets of A4 or smaller plain paper 80 g m or up to 25 sheets of plain paper 80 g m lager than A4 The multi purpose tray accepts paper sizes from A3 to A6 and Hagaki and from Ledger to Statement R 8K 16K R and 16K Be sure to use the multi purpose tray when you print on any special paper Q IMPORTANT When using media types other t
283. rinters It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given in this appendix Be careful when choosing paper Paper unsuitable for the machine may cause jams or may be wrinkled Supported Paper Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers The printing quality will be affected by the quality of paper Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output Basic Paper Specifications The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine Refer to the subsequent sections for further details Criteria Specifications Weight Cassettes 45 to 163 g m Multi purpose tray 45 to 256 g m Thickness 0 086 to 0 230 mm Dimensional accuracy 0 7 mm Squareness of corners 90 0 2 Moisture content 4 to 6 Grain direction Long grain paper supply direction Pulp content 80 or more NOTE Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic Paper Specifications shown below such as moisture or pulp content For this reason we recommend purchasing a small amount of recycled paper as a sample for testing prior to use Choose recycled paper that gives the best printing results and contains low levels of paper dust We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our specifications Choosing the Appropriate Paper This section de
284. ription This counts the number of pages used for specific paper sizes for example count the number of pages printed using A4 paper You can specify five paper sizes 1 to 5 The number of pages used for the paper sizes specified here can be referenced under by Paper Size when counting page use This information can also be printed in accounting reports Q Refer to Counting the Number of Pages Printed on page 9 64 and Printing an x Accounting Report on page 9 66 You can also count page use by specifying paper size and media type for example count the number of pages printed in color using A4 paper If All Media Types is specified the number of pages printed using the specified paper size is counted regardless of media type Value Paper Size 1 to 5 Paper size A3 A4 A5 B4 B5 Folio Ledger Legal Letter Statement Media type All Media Types Plain Transparency Rough Vellum Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Envelope Thick 106 g m and more High Quality Custom 1 to 8 The next job will be prohibited in sending or in storing in the box 9 68 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Unknown Login User Name Job This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown login user names or User ID i e unsent IDs If the User Login is set to invalid and Job Accounting is set to valid follow the procedure when the Account ID is unk
285. rivileges is already stored Each user s properties are Machine Administrator e User Name DeviceAdmin e Login User Name FS 6525MFP 2500 FS 6530MFP 3000 e Login Password FS 6525MFP 2500 FS 6530MFP 3000 e Access Level Machine Administrator Administrator e User Name Admin e Login User Name Admin e Login Password Admin e Access Level Administrator Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished case sensitive It is recommended to periodically change the user name login user name and login password regularly for your security 9 32 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 29 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter j RIT gecerese Q ml 2 User Login Admin Admin Lacal Aithanticatinn om Local User List amp DeviceAdmin 2500 caw gt 1 1 Simple login settings Local User Authorization d GB0435_00 GB0440_00 2 Enter the user information User Name Input 6 Limit 32 i GB0057_51 Input 6 Limit 64 z xlelvlbjnim 6 5 m O Access Level Select the access level 10 10 Administrator User S E Select the user access privilege 9 33 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration 3 Check the settings Check the settings and change or add info
286. rmation as needed User Name Select the item that you want to change Input 6 Limit 32 e Login User Name GB0446_00 GB0057_26 Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Input 6 Limit 64 User Name User A Login User Name user A 1 2 Login Password Reese Account Name Others GB0446_00 GB0057_28 Login Password Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Input 3 Limit 64 User Name Login User Name user af Login Password PEEK KKK Account Name Others e Enter the same login password twice for confirmation purposes GB0446_00 GB0057_29 Accounting Name Searches by account name Select the item that you want to change 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 k Q 4 User Name User A 2 Ha Others Login User Name user A Login Password KKK K KKK 1 Account Name Others Cancel ave Cancel GB0446_00 GB0603_00 Allows you to search for an account name and sorts results Displays details for individual account names 9 34 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration E mail Address 10 10 a f Access Level User My Panel Local Authorization e Access Level Select the item that you want to change 10 10 E mail Address 1 Access Level User 2 2 My Panel Local Authorization select the user access privilege My Panel Select the
287. rocessor and the glass platen with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or mild detergent NOTE Do not use organic solvents or other strong chemicals Document Processor If black streaks or dirt appears in copies when using the document processor clean the slit glass with the supplied cleaning cloth NOTE Wipe the slit glasses with the dry accessory cloth Do not use water soap or solvents for cleaning 1 Wipe the slit glass 10 6 Troubleshooting gt Cleaning 2 Wipe the white guide 10 7 Troubleshooting gt Solving Malfunctions Solving Malfunctions The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving If a problem occurs with your machine look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following pages If the problem persists contact your Service Representative Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page An application does not start Is the Auto Panel Reset time short Set the Auto Panel Reset time to 30 9 24 seconds or more The screen does not respond Is the machine plugged in Plug the power cord into an AC outlet 2 11 when the main power switch is turned on Pressing the Start key does Is there a message on the screen Determine appropriate response to the 10 73 not produce printouts message and respond accordingly Is the machine in Sleep mode Press the Power key to recover the 2 23
288. rror has occurred Make a note of the error code displayed on the touch panel and contact your Service Representative Reference Page Maximum number of scanned pages Is the acceptable scanning count exceeded Only one copy of the scanned pages is available Press Continue to print send or store the scanned pages Press Cancel to cancel printing sending or storing Memory is full The process cannot be performed due to insufficient memory If only End is available press End The job will be canceled The machine may reproduce the same originals by arranging the following settings Decrease Image Quality of File Format Furthermore the machine may reproduce the same originals by arranging the following settings Select Normal of Optional Memory in System Menu NOTE Before changing the Optional Memory setting contact your administrator 3 52 9 24 Unable to continue the job as the memory is used up Press Continue to print the scanned pages The print job cannot be processed completely Press Cancel to cancel the job The machine may reproduce the same Originals by arranging the following settings Select On of RAM Disk Setting in System Menu and then decrease the RAM disk size Select Printer Priority of Optional Memory in System Menu NOTE Before changing the RAM Disk Setting or Optional Memory setting contact your admi
289. rs Limits the number of pages scanned excludes copying FAX Transmission Limits the number of pages sent by fax Only displayed when the optional fax kit is installed Applying Restriction Off No restriction given Counter Limit Restricts the print counter in one page increments up to 9 999 999 pages Reject Usage Restriction is applied For details on the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction refer to Apply Limit on page 9 67 N 9 62 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting 1 Select the item to limit Total selected for Copier Printer Count Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Account Name Section 01 Account ID 00000001 Print Total Off Scan Others Off Cancel FAX Transmission Off GB0480_01 e GB0480_00 Use V or A to scroll up and down Individual selected for Copier Printer Count Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Account Name Section 01 Account ID 00000001 Copy Total off Scan Others FAX Transmission Off Printer Total Off Cancel GB0480_03 GB0480_02 Use V or A to scroll up and down 2 Select a restriction method 10 10 az Counter Limit 1 1 Reject Usage o If Counter Limit is selected press
290. rs or malicious software from gaining access to your computer through Windows Firewall through the Internet or a network Change notification settings How does a firewall help protect my computer f Turn Windows Firewall on or What are network locations off Redare default m y Home or work private networks Connected 5 Qf Advanced settings Networks at home or work where you know and trust the people and devices on the network TIVUMITSIIUUL Hy network Windows Firewall state On Incoming connections Block all connections to programs that are not on the list of allowed programs 3 Windows Firewall with Advanced Security File Action View Help s 0G r7 h Advance E3 Inbound Rules Ea Connection Security Rules Monitoring Import Policy Export Policy Restore Default Policy Diagnose Repair W Windows Firewall is on Domain Profile View gt Inbound connections that do not match a rule are blocked z Refresh Outbound connections that do not match a rule are allowed m e BG Properties Private Profile is Active iv Windows Firewall is on Help 6 11 Sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC 4 File Action View Help e af Windows Firewall with Advance E3 Inbound Rules 3 Outbound Rules E g a Name Group be Connection Security Rules i
291. rver name entered in the network authentication If using Active Directory of Windows displayName of Attribute may be used as Name 1 Name 2 can be left out When you assign displayName in Name 1 and department in Name 2 and if the value of displayName is Mike Smith and the value of department is Sales in Active Directory of Windows the user name appears as Mike Smith Sales If using Active Directory of Windows mail of Attribute may be used as E mail Address 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 29 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 On gt 1 1 GB0691_00 GB0435_01 Ta Use V or A to scroll up and down 2 Configure the function Server Name 10 10 2 Input 3 Limit 64 i Port Name 1 displayName n e Up to 64 characters can be entered GB0692_00 GB0057_34 Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters 9 51 Setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Port 10 10 Server Name abc 1 389 displayName GB0692_02 Name 1 and Name 2 10 10 GB0692_02 Up to 32 characters can be entered E mail Address 10 10 A Search Timeout ise GB0692_01 ae a i Up to 128 characters can be entered Search Timeout 10 10 Search Timeout 60sec 2 2 GB0692_01
292. ry page 8 12 Toner Status page 8 13 Paper Status page 8 13 Staple page 8 14 xiii lt gt System Menu Counter v Quick Setup Wizard page 3 26 FAX Setup page 3 26 Energy Saver Setup page 3 26 Network Setup page 3 26 Language page 9 5 Report page 9 5 Report Print page 9 5 Status Page page 9 5 Font List page 9 5 Network Status page 9 5 Service Status page 9 6 Accounting Report page 9 6 Sub Address Box List refer to Fax Operation Guide FAX List Index refer to Fax Operation Guide FAX List No refer to Fax Operation Guide Outgoing FAX Report refer to Fax Operation Guide Incoming FAX Report refer to Fax Operation Guide Admin Report Settings refer to Fax Operation Guide Result Report Setting Send Result Report page 9 6 page 9 6 RX Result Report refer to Fax Operation Guide Job Finish Notice Setting page 9 6 Sending Log History Send Log History page 8 9 page 8 7 pag Auto Sending page 8 9 Destination page 8 8 Job Log Subject page 8 10 Counter Printed Pages page 3 11 Scanned Pages page 3 11 User Property page 9 7 User Name page 9 7 Login User Name page 9 7 Login Password page 9 7 Access Level page 9 7 Account Name page 9 7 E mail Address page 9 7 Simple L
293. s It enables flexible font functions and highly functional graphics allowing higher quality printing The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985 followed by Level 2 that enabled color printing and two byte languages e g Japanese in 1990 In 1996 Level 3 was released as an update for the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in implementation technologies PPM prints per minute This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute Printer Driver The software to enable you to print data created on any application software The printer driver for the machine is contained in the DVD enclosed in the package Install the printer driver on the computer connected to the machine RA Stateless The IPv6 router communicates transmits information such as the global address prefix using ICMPv6 This information is the Router Advertisement RA ICMPv6 stands for Internet Control Message Protocol and is a IPv6 standard defined in the RFC 2463 Internet Control Message Protocol ICMPv6 for the Internet Protocol Version 6 IPv6 Specification Send as E mail A function to send the image data stored in the machine as an E mail attachment E mail addresses can be selected from the list or entered at each time SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol A protocol for E mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet It is used for transferring mail between mail servers as well as for sending m
294. s set Value 100 Auto Margin Set the default margin Value Left Right 18 to 18 Top Bottom 18 to 18 Left Right 0 75 to 0 75 Top Bottom 0 75 to 0 75 Continuous Scan Set the continuous scan defaults Value Off On Auto Image Rotation Select the default Auto Image Rotation setting Value Off On File Name Entry Set an automatically entered name default for jobs Additional information such as Date and Time and Job No can also be set Value File Name Up to 32 characters can be entered Additional Info None Date and Time Job No Job No amp Date and Time Date and Time amp Job No E mail Subject Body Set the subject and body automatically entered default subject and body when sending the scanned originals by E mail Value Subject Up to 60 characters can be entered Body Up to 500 characters can be entered 9 12 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Description FTP Encrypted TX Set the default value for document encryption during transmission Value Off On NOTE This setting is displayed when the secure protocol SSL setting is On JPEG TIFF Print Select the image size resolution when printing JPEG or TIFF file Value Paper Size Image Resolution Print Resolution XPS Fit to Page Set the default value for the XPS fit to page function Value Off On Detail Settings Image Quality Set the default value for the image qual
295. s or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY
296. s such as when the machine runs out of toner and problems such as paper jams Appendix Introduces the convenient optional equipment available for this machine Provides information on media types and paper sizes Also includes a glossary of terms Explains how to enter characters and lists the machine specifications Conventions in This Guide The following conventions are used depending on the nature of the description Convention Description Example Bold Indicates the operation panel keys or a computer screen Press the Start key Regular Indicates the touch panel keys Press OK Italic Indicates a message displayed on the touch panel Ready to copy is displayed Used to emphasize a key word phrase or references to additional For more information information refer to Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2 23 Indicates supplemental information or operations for reference NOTE IMPORTANT Indicates items that are required or prohibited so as to avoid problems IMPORTANT Caution Indicates what must be observed to prevent injury or machine breakdown and how to deal with it A Caution Preface gt About this Operation Guide Job types for which each function can be set are shown with icons Description Description This function can be set while copying a This function can be set while printing from USB document memory Ready to copy 10 10 Ready to print from Box 10 10 Copies
297. screen Logout Users are automatically logged out in the following circumstances e When the machine is put to Sleep by pressing the Power key e When the Auto Sleep function is activated e When the auto panel reset function is activated e When Auto Low Power Mode is activated e When the machine is placed in Low Power Mode by pressing the Energy Saver key 3 13 Common Operations gt Favorites Favorites Frequently used functions can be registered as favorites so that they can be called up easily The following functions are pre registered on this machine You can delete these functions as well as register new functions The functions created by the external software such as File Management Utility are also displayed here e ID Card Copy e Paper Saving Copy e Scan to PC Address Entry e Scan to PC Address Book e Scan to E mail Address Entry e Scan to E mail Address Book Registering Favorites When registering a favorite you can choose from two methods for calling it up e Wizard mode Interactive selection form Registered settings are called up in order and configured as you check or change each one e Program mode Settings are called up immediately when you press the key to which they are registered Transmission is explained as an example below NOTE Up to 20 settings can be registered as favorites 1 Configure the function 10 10 Dest 0 Check Recall One
298. screen appears After you enter the login user name and login password name of the destination PC the shared folders appear Select the folder that you want to specify and press Next The address of the selected shared folder is set NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on 11 7 for details on entering characters Press Connection Test to check the connection to the computer you chose If the connection fails check the entries you made Select the folder from the Search Results list and go to step 6 If you selected Enter Folder Path go to step 4 6 22 sending gt Specifying Destination 4 Enter the destination information Input 0 1 Limit 64 GB0057_08 Enter the next information Once you have entered one item press Next to advance to the next item For send to folder SMB Data to be entered Max characters Host Name Host name or IP address of the PC to receive Up to 64 characters the data Path Path to the receiving folder such as follows Up to 128 characters For example User scannerdata Port Normally 139 1 65535 In Windows Vista 7 if 139 is not used set to 445 Login User Name User name to access the PC Up to 64 characters Domain name User name For example abcdnet james smith User name Domain name For example james smith abcdnet Login Password Password to access the PC Up to 64 characters For send to folder FTP Data to be entered Max ch
299. scribes guidelines for choosing paper Condition Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled dirty or torn Do not use paper that has a rough surface or paper fiber lint or that is especially delicate Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor copies but may also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine Choose paper with a smooth and even surface however avoid coated paper or paper with a treated surface as it may damage the drum or fusing unit Ingredient Do not use paper such as paper that has been coated or surface treated or paper that contains plastic or carbon These paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum Be sure to use the standard paper that contains at least 80 pulp i e not more than 20 of the total paper content consists of cotton or other fibers 11 11 Appendix gt Paper Supported Paper Sizes Paper of the following sizes is supported by the machine Measurements in the table take into account a 0 7 mm dimensional accuracy for length and width Corner angles must be 90 0 2 Multi Purpose Tray A6 R 105 x 148 mm B6 R 128 x 182 mm Cassette or Multi Purpose Tray A3 297 x 420 mm B4 257 x 364 mm Hagaki 100x148mm A4 297 x 210 mm Oufukuhagaki 148 x 200 mm A4 R 210 x 297 mm Executive 7 1 4 x10 1 2 B5 257 x 182 mm Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm B5 R 182 x 257 mm
300. scription Enhanced WSD Set whether to use Kyocera s proprietary web services Selecting Off will disable the functionality of WIA TWAIN and Network FAX drivers If you want to disable KYOCERA Net Viewer functionality Enhanced WSD Enhanced WSD SSL SNMP and SNMPv3 refer to Protocol Detail on page 9 21 must be set to Off Value Off On After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON Enhanced WSD SSL Item Description Enhanced WSD SSL Set whether to use Kyocera s proprietary web services over SSL Value Off On After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON IPSec Item Description Make this setting when you use IPSec Value Off On After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON Secure Protocol Description SSL Select whether or not to use SSL Value Off On IPP Security Select the IPP security level This setup is available when SSL is On Value IPP IPP over SSL IPPoverSSL only HTTP Security Select the HTTP security level This setup is available when SSL is On Value HTTP HTTPS HTTPS Only LDAP Security Ext Address Select the type of encryption according to the type of security employed by the LDAP server Book This setup is available when SSL is On Value Off SSL TLS STARTTLS LDAP Security User Property 9
301. seeeeeaeeesseeeseeeeseneeseeeseeeeseeeeseneess Manual L g History TransmMiSSiOM wiiceicanncosuesinaysownc Svanevowedendwareacs aiaa aaaeaii ai ai a aieiaa Seting E maAlSUDJOCU seerne eaen ien eea a aeaiee A ie ESETE DE AAE eaaa ENEE cne k OrDEVICE TAS e a E E E O E OR Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper cccceecccseeeceeeeeeeeeceeeecaeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeessneeseeeesanees 8 1 Status Job Cancel gt Checking Job Status E gt Checking Job Status Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed Available Status Screens The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the touch panel in four different screens Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs and Scheduled Jobs The following job statuses are available Print Job Status Copy Printer Printing from Document Box FAX reception E mail reception Job Report List Printing data from removable memory Send Job Status FAX transmission Folder SMB FTP transmission E mail Application Mixed Multiple destination Store Job Status Scan FAX Printer Scheduled Job Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission Display the screen 10 10 Status Job Ca ncel fe Job Status 2 fse Job Status fso Job Status 1 stesu Job Print Jobs Press either of Print Job Status Send Job Status Store Job Status or Scheduled Job to check the status
302. seeeseeeseueeseeeseeeseeeseeees 10 28 Optional Document Finisher Staple Jam c cc cccecccceeceeeeseeeseeeeseeeaeeeseeeseeesenees 10 29 DAA ICU ications EA EEE EE EE hae embenp Sonic oucnuseeonnatt 10 29 DOCUMENT PIOCCSSOM ccccacxcsraviutinnieneaceinatiauwhiniosuadosddndubuanesianceteted euminimeieccnetinasacpinatons 10 30 11 POSING caprin EE 11 1 Optional Equipment i sescnnndas ceenmetnceannmniad snadan cee dcetunmmdeudtenneanedmesedantinetandendelendatcenemssacmandiondecsoeeds 11 2 Overview of Optional Equipment ccc cceccceeccceecceeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeesaueseeeseeeeseeeseeeees 11 2 PF 470 Paper Feeder single Cassette ccccccsccceceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseueesseeeeenaaees 11 3 PF 471 Paper Feeder double Cassette ccccccceccecseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeeaees 11 3 DF 470 Document Finisher ccccccceeccceeeceeeceeeeeeeeee cece eeeaeeeaeesseeeseeeseeeesueeseeesaeess 11 3 FAX System U FAX KIt Me enn ee ne ee ee ee ee ee ee eee 11 3 Expansion Memory he oucncanesiect teeta enc pie dain dunce dts picts centered vir a Seiten ie a aana 11 3 Card Authentication Kit B siceassostccctsassnacaceads tenceuavaucsecendsnsteduaades teacdedyeeacewdedadecdensentn 11 4 IB 50 Gigabit Ethernet Board 0 0 0 ccccccc cece eeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseueeseeeseeeseeess 11 5 USB K yboard amen en ee ete innii ne ee oe 11 5 GVO ER FUNGUO scatceieccstces ancctssnsctereaecsceesecmeepienscatscebounaanecdeea
303. seeseeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeseeeesaeeeeeenes 11 3 DFA r0 DOCUMENT IAI SINGD scaedeceecaucais ceectenaneeseced E AEE sited NE EEE e EEEE 11 3 FAA SYSE U FAX KIE areen SENEE TE pace ve E E iE EA EE E E 11 3 EXDAM SION WIGIMONY sanccueaseactancadynacsonccasaewnatesseuhiedersenacideed E E E A 11 3 Card Authentication KIt B ccscisaewocecuseciiesxinndavenstolevenuweneomanauiedue ieidettsetevduembuetenaueeduw sae iehetavdle cumdceudslietenemnnbaleees 11 4 E90 Gigabit Ethernet BOAO csipke aean iDa e Eip ae aa i aaa aani 11 5 BEE LES E E ce oc E E A A N I E A E ee 11 5 OPUN FUNCION soseri E E A E E E E EE 11 5 Character Entry Method susse nie deiinnnviesbundwmdicndedeawdsiovaseasmncian decd andleimtiabe senseWlaanotinesivessiisennls ie ebsivawsiuesedumateniectndebtedenunaenes 11 7 PADOT aa vison rate A E ateawuned ack aeteasedotulivn aud E E E E 11 10 Basi Paper SpECNCaAONS cccrieicecccsictunctesstuseossuseuscndatactunasadesaeseegouerksteincsbeassaduecbraveteniedacduseueneloveenesatbeenauns 11 11 Choosing the Appropriate PAPST sisirin i aAa a a aa toda vad taaedbanacdese 11 11 SCAU ADOT sera an E E EE E E E EEE EEE EENE EE E AA 11 14 SPOIN TOS sae E E ee ee E A E eee 11 18 COMMON TMC ONS Serraria AS EEEE EA EE ESEE EE OE 11 18 CODY N U anr E E E E E A T 11 19 E AE e EEE E E A E E EE ON EA E E E A E E E A 11 20 SEEE A T A T E A AT E E E TA E E E T A T soescase 11 20 DOCUMENT PIOCESSOT sorires dnn aE EEE EE E r e E A ENN 11 21 Paper Feeder single cassette op
304. sh 2 9 27 Print Density 9 26 Tone Curve Adjustment 9 27 Toner Save Level EcoPrint 9 26 Applications 11 5 Auto Form Feed Timeout 11 23 Auto Image Rotation 4 16 Auto IP 11 23 Setup 9 19 Auto Paper Selection 11 23 Auto Sleep 2 23 11 23 B Background Density Adjust 3 55 Bonjour 11 23 Setup 9 19 C Cassette 2 2 Loading Paper 3 3 Paper Size and Media Type 9 8 Character Entry Method 11 7 Checking the Counter 3 11 Cleaning Document Processor 10 6 Glass Platen 10 6 Original Cover 10 6 Cleaning Cloth 2 3 Collate Offset 3 44 Color Selection 3 60 Combine 4 12 2in1 4 12 4in1 4 12 Border Line 4 12 Command Center RX 2 25 Connecting LAN Cable 2 10 Power Cable 2 11 USB Cable 2 11 Connection Method 2 8 Continuous Scan 3 40 Conventions in This Guide 1 14 Copying 4 1 Copying Settings Auto Priority 9 15 Auto Paper Selection 9 15 Reserve Next Priority 9 15 D Date Timer 2 24 9 24 Auto Error Clear 9 25 Auto Panel Reset 9 24 Auto Sleep 9 24 Date Time 9 24 Date Format 9 24 Error Clear Timer 9 25 Interrupt Clear Timer 9 25 Low Power Timer 9 24 Panel Reset Timer 9 24 Sleep Level 9 25 Sleep Timer 9 25 Time Zone 9 24 Default Auto Image Rotation 9 12 Background Density Adj 9 12 Collate Offset 9 12 Color Selection 9 12 Continuous Scan 9 12 EcoPrint 9 12 E mail Subject Body 9 12 File Format 9 12 File Name Entry 9 12 File Separation 9 12 FTP Encrypted TX 9 13 Image Quality 9 13 JPEG TIFF Print 9 13 Margin 9 12 O
305. sic Operation 5 Start sending Sta rt Press the Start key to start sending 6 4 sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC Check the information that needs to be set on the machine and create a folder to receive the document on your computer Screens of Windows 7 are used in the following explanation The details of the screens will vary in other versions of Windows NOTE Log on to Windows with administrator privileges Making a note of the computer name and full computer name Check the name of the computer name and full computer name 1 Display the window From the Start menu select Computer and then System Properties In Windows XP right click My Computer and select Properties The System Properties dialog box appears Click the Computer Name tab in the window that appears Check the computer name Computer name domain and workgroup settings Computer name aL Change settings Full computer name Frise Computer description Domain abcdnet Check the computer name and full computer name Screen example Computer name PC001 Full computer name PC001 abcdnet com Windows XP If the full computer name does not have a dot the full computer name and the computer name are the same If the full computer name has a dot the text string in front of the dot in the full computer name is the computer name Example PC001 abc
306. sion from your PC Software on DVD Windows Express Mode or Custom Mode can be selected for the installation method The software that can be installed and the printer port selection method vary depending on which method is selected Installation method Software Function Description Custom WV Koyo Express Mode KX driver Print This driver enables files on a computer to be printed by the machine Multiple page description languages PCL XL KPDL etc are supported by a single driver This printer driver allows you to take full advantage of the features of the machine Use this driver to print PDF files KX XPS printer driver Mini printer driver This printer driver supports the XPS XML Paper Specification format developed by Microsoft Corporation This is a Microsoft MiniDriver that supports PCL and KPDL PCL KPDL There are some restrictions on the machine features and O option features that can be used with this driver TWAIN driver Scan This driver enables scanning on the machine using a TWAIN compliant software application The machine has two types of TWAIN drivers one for scanning a document placed in the machine and one for reading document data stored in a user box WIA driver WIA Windows Imaging Acquisition is a function of Windows that enables reciprocal communication between an imaging device such as a scanner and an image processing so
307. sition Have you selected a position that cannot be stapled Press Paper Selection to select the available paper Press Continue to print without using Staple function Cannot staple the following paper Did you select a paper size type that cannot be stapled Press Paper Selection to select the available paper Press Continue to print without using Staple function Cassette failure 10 14 Contact your Service Representative Press the System Menu Counter key Adjustment Maintenance Service Setting and then Enable Repaired Unit Press Execute to perform Enable Repaired Unit Troubleshooting gt Responding to Messages Message Check the document processor Checkpoints Is the document processor open Corrective Actions Close the document processor Reference Page Check the toner container Open the front cover of the machine and pull out the toner container Shake the toner container well and reinstall it Check waste toner box D Message Developer unit is not installed Is the waste toner box full Replace the waste toner box Checkpoints The waste toner box is not installed correctly Set it correctly When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses Corrective Actions Replace the developer unit g to our specified developer unit See the leaflet su
308. sk Setting on page 9 23 Setting the Number of Stored Jobs To maintain free space on the RAM disk you can set the maximum number of stored jobs 1 Display the screen 10 10 gt System Menu Counter te Send 1 FAX System Menu Counter 10 10 Favorites i Sub Address Box GB0054_02 1 1 T Box System Menu Counter p Copy Job Retention p Deletion ot Job Retention 4 10 10 GB0290_00 GB0310_00 2 Enter the maximum number of stored jobs 10 10 GB0311_00 You can enter any number between 0 and 50 G NOTE If you enter a value of 0 zero you cannot use the Proof and Hold function 5 7 Printing gt Printing Data Saved on the Printer Printing and Deleting the Document You can print and delete documents stored in the Proof and Hold box 1 Display the screen Document Box 2 Box 10 10 Removable Hemon J _ Document Box Document Box 10 10 Sub Address Box Address ae Private Print Proof and Hold el GB0051_00 GB0650_00 2 Select the creator of the document 10 10 GB0652_00 3 Select the document 10 10 doc 100831170850 Displays details for individual documents _ doc 100831170814 1 1 _ doc 100831170659 _ doc 100831170519 Cancel GB0654_00 4 Print and delete the document To print the document 10 10 10 10
309. st for originals which contain a mixture of text and photos Best for photographs Sharply renders pencil text and fine lines Graphic Map Best for graphics and maps Printer Output Best for documents printed on this machine originally Text for OCR For documents to be read by OCR This function is displayed while copying This function is displayed when the color mode is Auto Color B amp W or Black amp White when sending or storing 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Original Image Ready to copy 10 10 Ready to copy 10 10 Copies J Sa a EE kk SS i Original Image ig ll ab Text Photo AN _ Paper B Zoom Density Selection ug ECOPrint Auto 100 Normal 0 L 2 off E es a e D o a 5 lt Duplex y Combine g Collate oe 4 7 Offset Background Density Adj 1 sided gt gt 1 sided_ Off Collate Aa off GB0001_01 GB0002_01 sv Favorites Close Add Edi Shortcut Use V or AN to scroll up and down 2 Select the image quality Copy Send Scan to USB Ready to copy 10 10 Ready to send 10 10 ABC a Text Photo ABC i a Text Photo Photo Photo gt ABCD Graphic Map OCR Text for OCR GB0037_01 GB0037_02 3 53 Common Operations gt Using Various
310. stScript 11 25 Power Cable Connecting 2 11 Power Off 2 12 Power On 2 12 PPM 11 25 Precautions for Use 1 3 Preparing Cables 2 9 Prevent Bleed through 3 56 Printer Driver 11 25 Printer Settings Copies 9 17 CR Action 9 18 Duplex 9 17 EcoPrint 9 17 Emulation 9 17 Form Feed TimeOut 9 18 KIR 9 18 LF Action 9 18 Orientation 9 17 Override A4 Letter 9 17 Paper Feed Mode 9 18 Resolution 9 18 Wide A4 9 17 Printing 5 1 Printing Speed 11 19 11 20 Index 3 Priority Override 3 64 Q Quick Setup Wizard 3 26 R RA Stateless 11 25 Setup 9 20 Raw Port Protocol Detail 9 21 Recycled Paper 11 17 Regarding Trade Names 1 9 Replacing Staples 10 5 Report Print 9 5 Accounting Report 9 6 Font List 9 5 Network Status 9 5 Service Status 9 6 Status Page 9 5 Resolution 9 18 11 19 11 20 Restart 9 4 Result Report Settings 9 6 Right Cover 2 2 S Safety Conventions in This Guide 1 2 Scan Resolution 3 52 Secure Protocol 9 22 Send as E mail 6 2 11 25 E mail Subject Body 6 43 sending 6 1 Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC 6 5 Send as E mail 6 2 Send to Folder SMB FTP 6 2 sending E mail 2 26 Sending Size 6 40 send Settings Color TIFF Compression 9 16 Default Screen 9 16 Dest Check before Send 9 15 Entry Check for New Dest 9 15 Send and Forward 9 16 Sharpness 3 54 Shortcuts Editing and Deleting 3 24 Registering 3 22 Using 3 25 Sleep 2 23 Slit Glass 2 2 SMB Client Transmission Protocol Detail 9 21 SMTP 11 25 SMTP
311. stalled applications The Application Name ID Application ID Version and other information can be checked Delete Deletes the application selected on the list Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Internet Set the proxy for connection to the Internet from an application Use Same Proxy Description Specify the proxy settings Value Off On Set whether or not the same proxy server is used for all protocols If the same proxy server is not used select Off Value Off On HTTP Proxy Server Set a proxy server HTTP Value Enter the proxy address and port number HTTPS Proxy Server Set a proxy server HTTPS This setup is available when Use Same Proxy is Off Value Enter the proxy address and port number No Proxy Domains Printer Set domains for which no proxy is used Value Enter the domain name Printing from computers settings are generally made on the application software screen However the following settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine Emulation Description Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types of printers Value PCL6 KPDL KPDL Auto KPDL Error Report When an error has occurred during printing in KPDL emulation mode set whether or not the error report is output Value Off On EcoPrint EcoPrint conserves ton
312. stored in the address book you can send by entering the address directly viii To send a FAX A It faxes As well as sending a FAX via the telephone lines you can also send a FAX via a network E NOTE For more information on setting up and sending a FAX refer to the FAX Operation Guide Administrator tasks eaa you want Send a FAX FAX directly from a computer Connect the modular cord for the telephone line to this machine Selection of Telephone Line Inch version only Network Setup LAN Cable Connection Install the Network FAX Driver on your computer 1 S A A E E E elegance elie Loading Paper 3 2 Operation FAX Operation Network FAX Operation For more information refer to the FAX Operation Guide If the destination is not stored in the address book you can send the FAX by entering the address directly kk Copies page 4 2 Paper Selection page 3 42 Zoom page 4 5 Density page 3 57 Duplex page 4 8 Combine page 4 72 Collate Offset page 3 44 Functions Original Size page 3 32 Original Orientation page 3 34 Mixed Size Originals page 3 35 Paper Output page 3 43 Staple page 3 49 Original Image page 3 53 EcoPrint page 4 75 Sharpness page 3 54 Background Density Adj page 3 55 Prevent Bleed through page 3 56 Margin page 3 46 Continuous Scan page 3 40 Auto Image R
313. sword Login Select the item that you want to change 10 10 User User af 1 1 Password Login Icon Male 1 GB0645_00 Icon Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Password Login a ncel GB0645_00 4 Register the user 10 10 Password Login Icon Male 1 Save l d Cancel GB0645_00 Editing and Deleting Users User properties can be changed and users can be deleted 1 Display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 Off On 1 1 d GB0736_00 System Menu Counter 10 10 gt pm 1 Male 2 2 gyre 1 Female 2 gre m Basket mm Piano Guitar We Car Bicycle Cancel GB0828_00 Use V or AN to scroll up and down 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 29 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 User Login Local Authentication Local User List 1 Simple login settings gt Local User Authorization 1 1 Edit or delete a user To edit a user GB0435_00 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration System Menu Counter 10 10 Simple Login Simple Login Setup 1 1 1 Select the user whose information you wish to edit and press Menu and then Edit a 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 01 User A 02User i 03 User C 04 User D 05User E 1 1 07 None 08 None 09 None m Ea 2 Edit the user Name 10 10 User User
314. sy paper used for calendars 11 16 Appendix gt Paper Recycled Paper Recycled paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 11 11 however its whiteness may be considered separately NOTE Before purchasing recycled paper in volume try testing a sample to ensure that the print quality 11 17 Appendix gt Specifications Specifications Q IMPORTANT Specifications are subject to change without notice Common functions Item Description FS 6525MFP FS 6530MFP Type Desktop Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser single drum system Image Write System Semiconductor laser and electrophotography Paper Weight Cassette 45 to 163 g m Multi Purpose Tray 45 to 256 g m Letter A4 or less 52 to 163 g m more than Letter A4 Media Type Cassette Plain Rough Vellum Recycled Preprinted Bond Color Prepunched Letterhead Thick High Quality Custom 1 to 8 Duplex Same as Simplex Multi Purpose Tray Plain Transparency OHP film Rough Vellum Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Thick Envelope High Quality Custom 1 to 8 Paper Size Cassette Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement R Oficio Il A3 A4 R A4 A5 R B4 B5 R B5 Folio 216 x 340 mm 8K 16K R 16K Multi Purpose Tray Maximum Ledger A3 Minimum Statement R A6 R Paper Capacity Cassette 500 sheets 80 g m Multi Purpose Tr
315. t Maintenance Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance Item Description Density Adjustment Adjust density Copy Adjust copy density Adjustment can be made in 7 levels Value 3 Lighter 2 1 O Normal 1 2 3 Darker Send Box Adjust scan density when sending or storing the data in Document Box Adjustment can be made in 7 levels Value 3 Lighter 2 1 O Normal 1 2 3 Darker Background Density Adj Darkens or lightens overall background density adjustment Copy Auto Darkens or lightens overall background density adjustment during copying Adjustment can be made in 7 levels Value 3 Lighter 2 1 O Normal 1 2 3 Darker Send Box Auto Darkens or lightens overall background density when sending images or storing them in the Document Box Adjustment can be made in 7 levels Value 3 Lighter 2 1 O Normal 1 2 3 Darker Toner Save Level EcoPrint Set the toner saving level when using EcoPrint Copy Lowers or raises the toner saving level during copying Adjustment can be made in 5 levels Value 1 to 5 Printer Lowers or raises the toner saving level during printing Adjustment can be made in 5 levels Value 1 to 5 Print Density Adjust print density Adjustment can be made in 5 levels Value 1 to 5 Auto Color Correction This setting allows you to adjust the detection level used by the machine to determine w
316. talling Software 3 Install using Express Mode 1 Select the print system to be installed If the machine is set to acquire an IP address automatically select the Use host name for port name checkbox Installer Discover Printing System 2 Choose the printing system you would like to install4 Utilities Install printing system utilities only ORKYOCERS Installer Printer Settings Type a name for your printer Some programs do not support printer and server name combinations longer than 31 characters Printing system name Share your printer with other users To share this printer type a share name KYOCERA 3 Start installing Installer Confirm Settings Confirm your installation settings Click Back to make changes Ej I To start the installation click Install ORKYOCERS NOTE The machine cannot be detected unless it is on If the computer fails to detect the machine verify that it is connected to the computer via a network or USB cable and that it is turned on and click Reload If the Windows security window appears click Install this driver software anyway 4 Finish the installation Installer Installation Completed Installation details v Print a test page M Enable Status Monitor V Show Quick Print tab Set Quick Print tab as default ORKYOCERS Follow the on screen instructions to restart
317. tem Menu Counter Quick Copy Job Retention LA 37inh s GB0290_00 Deletion of Job Retention Off GB0310_00 2 Select the time 10 10 1 2 Zz Use V or A to scroll up and down 00 G GB0312 6 sending This chapter explains the following topics BASIC DSI AUOM sece ed sczeceeeta se causes A E T EE E E E see tussetetaar 6 2 Preparation for Sending a DOCUMENT to a PC oo ieccccccceeeceeeeee cece eeeaeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeeseesseeeseeeseeesaeeeseesaneeseeeees 6 5 Making a note of the computer name and full computer NAME ccc eeccceecceeeceeeece cece eesaeeeaeeesaeeeeeeeaes 6 5 Making a note of the user NAME ANd domain NAME ccc seccseccseecceeceeeecceceseuceseeeseeeseueeseeeseeeseeeaeesseeeees 6 6 Creating a Shared Folder Making a Note of a Shared Folder ccc cecc cece eecceeeeeeceeeseeeseeteeeseeeeeeseeeaees 6 7 Configuring Windows Firewall for Windows 7 c ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeesaeeesaaees 6 10 Register the shared folder in the address DOOK ccccecccsecceeeeeeeeceeeeseeeseeeseueceeeseeeeseeeseeeseeeseeesaeeeaees 6 14 Specifying DSSTUIMAU ON cic cstciccasenntuscusteladiaiordacexoudenasueduedstnudciewenssuad na ad aA E arana eaa eai iiaeaa a Eaa 6 17 Ghoosing fom the Address BOOK cscs sacssivsoecsnnntacecseesaninvecesamtdeactissceveterensinstengacmelcandesauensmeadeasaendemnouteneces 6 17 Choosing DY O
318. ter RX is a tool used for tasks such as verifying the operating status of the machine and changing the settings for security network printing E mail transmission and advanced networking This section explains how to access Command Center RX and configure e mail settings For details on Command Center RX refer to the Command Center RX User Guide NOTE Here information on the FAX settings has been omitted For more information on using the FAX refer to the Fax System U Operation Guide The optional Fax Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality To change settings in Command Center RX you must log in as an administrator of the machine The default factory settings are set as shown below Login User Name Admin Login Password Admin Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished case sensitive The procedure for accessing Command Center RX is explained below 1 Display the screen 1 Launch your Web browser 2 Inthe Address or Location bar enter the machine s IP address E g http 192 168 48 21 G a E http 1921684821 KYOCERd Nadel Command Center EX Host Name Location English lAuto refresh Lazi SEII User Name Password Device Status w o cae H Scanner Ready TENN LJ Device Information amp Status Message Low power ae gt Job Status Links Status The web page displays basic information about the machine and Command Center RX as well
319. ter or an FTP server as the destination NOTE Refer to Creating a Shared Folder Making a Note of a Shared Folder on page 6 7 for details on how to share a folder Be sure that SMB Protocol or FTP in the Command Center RX is On For details refer to the Command Center RX User Guide 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6 2 display the screen Ready to send i 10 10 Dest 0 Check Recall One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book oe oe VO 1 2 E mail Folder FAX GB0055_00 ka V A 2 Select the folder type 10 10 SMB FTP gt 1 1 el If you selected FTP go to step 4 GB0103_00 6 21 sending gt Specifying Destination 3 Select the folder specification method 10 10 Search Folder from Network Search Folder by Host Name Enter Folder Path GB1022_00 O To search for a folder on a PC on the network press Search Folder from Network or Search Folder by Host Name C If you pressed Search Folder from Network you can enter the Domain Workgroup and Host Name to search PCs on the network for the destination If you pressed Search Folder by Host Name you can search all PCs on the network for a destination A maximum of 500 addresses can be displayed Select the host name PC name that you want to specify in the screen that appears and press Next The login user name and login password entry
320. the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help e The use of a non shielded interface cable with the referenced device is prohibited CAUTION The changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device contains the module FCC ID E522K3A0512 IC 1059B 2K3A0512 which complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and RSS Gen of IC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept
321. the printer begins printing do the following 4 Double click the printer icon 11 displayed on the taskbar at the bottom right of the Windows desktop to display a dialog box for the printer 2 Click the file for which you wish to cancel printing and select Cancel from the Document menu 3 29 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Using Various Functions This section describes common functionality that can be configured for copying sending and the document box 1 Display the screen 2 Select the functions Copy Ready to copy i 10 10 Copies J Er _ El SSS Paper n Zoom all Density X Selection _ Ea Auto 100 Normal 0 ee i Duplex Combine g Collate L oZ Offset 1 sided gt gt 1 sided off Collate GB0001_01 hed Favorites Press the key of each function When using USB memory plug it into the USB memory slot A1 Press Yes on the displayed screen When printing from USB memory select the file to be printed and press Print When storing a document to USB memory select the folder where the file will be stored and press Menu and then Store File For details refer to Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory on page 7 3 or Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB on page 7 6 NOTE If the screen does not appear press the Document Box key and then Removable Memory If the touch panel is turned o
322. the system if required This completes the printer driver installation procedure The TWAIN driver and WIA driver can be installed if the machine and computer are connected via a network You can install the WIA driver using Custom Mode If you are installing the TWAIN driver or WIA driver continue by configuring the TWAIN driver 2 20 or WIA driver 2 27 2 16 Preparation before Use gt Installing Software Uninstalling the Software Perform the following procedure to delete the Software from your computer NOTE Uninstallation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges 4 Display the screen Click on the Start in the Task Bar and then select All Programs Kyocera and Uninstall Kyocera Product Library to display the Uninstall Wizard 2 Uninstall the software Place a check in the check box of the software to be deleted Uninstaller Welcome to the Software Remove Wizard This wizard helps you remove software for your printing system l KYOCERA 3 Finish uninstalling If a system restart message appears restart the computer by following the screen prompts This completes the software uninstallation procedure 2 17 Preparation before Use gt Installing Software Installing Printer Driver in Macintosh The machine s printer functionality can be used by a Macintosh computer NOTE Installation on MAC OS must be done by a user log
323. thentication Protocol E mail Recipient 1 On U POP before SMTP Off E mail Recipient 2 E mail Recipient 3 Management POPS Account 1 POPS Account 2 Authenticate as LDAP b Authentication b Natificatioan f b POPS Account 3 Other 2 Configure the function Enter the correct settings in each field Description SMTP Protocol Enables or disables SMTP protocol To use E mail this protocol must be enabled SMTP Port Number Set the SMTP Port Number or use the SMTP default port 25 SMTP Server Name Enter the SMTP server IP address or its name The maximum length of the SMTP server name and IP address is 64 characters If entering the name a DNS server address must also be configured The DNS server address may be entered on the TCP IP General tab SMTP Server Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time out in seconds Authentication Protocol Enables or disables the SMTP authentication protocol or sets POP before SMTP as the protocol The SMTP authentication supports Microsoft Exchange 2000 Authenticate as Authentication can be set from three POP3 accounts or you can choose a different account Login User Name When Other is selected for Authenticate the login user name set here will be used for SMTP authentication The maximum length of the login user name is 64 characters 2 26 Preparation before Use gt Command Center RX Settings for E mail Login Password Descripti
324. ting from Document Box Mixed Multiple destination Job Report List Printing data from removable memory Store Job Log Scan FAX Printer Display the screen 10 10 Status Job Cancel Heroo too 2 J Ise Job Log Psoe Job Log 1 serves Vv Pause All Print Jobs GB0052_01 Use VV or AN to scroll up and down Press either of Print Job Log Send Job Log or Store Job Log to check the log Check the log Status Job Cancel 10 10 0011 Fj doco000112010081817 Completed ox f 0010 doc0000102010081815 amp Canceled v 1 3 0009 jdocO000092010081815 amp Completed 4 0008 doc me Error 4 GB0186_00 Displays details for individual jobs Press Close to exit the screen NOTE The job history can be sent by E mail For details refer to Sending the Log History on page 8 7 N Status Job Cancel gt Sending the Log History Sending the Log History You can send the log history by e mail You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically whenever a set number of jobs is reached 1 Display the screen 10 10 lt gt System Menu Counter Q Quick Setup Wizard A Language Report 1 GB0054_00 Report Print gt Admin Report Settings Result Report Setting Sending Log History lt Back Vv GB0560_00 NOTE If user login administrat
325. tion cccccccccsssecceeeeeceeeecsececceueeeceueeeseseesaueesseeessgesssageeeseeeeess 11 21 Paper Feeder double cassette option ccccccccecceceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeesseeeeseeeeesaeeeesaeeeeas 11 21 Document FINSNEr ODUON srairipssemrnoiinn aede a EE OENE E EE A E REE ea aane 11 22 Environmental Specifications x cisccaverascnssusdeenedsnswarn deusensiuasesdurdvaveuseaaerseagec eseiedwatavienencaetudoetdheousdanduccanerees 11 22 MOSS aar EEE as ne asa ers eh E cts eines EE E seas bowers saees aac enoe ussieeeo nace 11 23 Appendix gt Optional Equipment Optional Equipment Overview of Optional Equipment The following optional equipment is available for the machine PF 471 Paper Feeder double cassette FAX System U FAX Kit Expansion Memory PF 470 Paper Feeder single cassette Appendix gt Optional Equipment PF 470 Paper Feeder single cassette An additional cassette identical to the machine s cassettes can be installed in the machine Paper capacity and loading method are the same as Cassettes 1 PF 471 Paper Feeder double cassette Two additional cassettes identical to the machine s cassettes can be installed in the machine Paper capacity and loading method are the same as Cassettes 1 DF 470 Document Finisher The document finisher holds a large quantity of finished copies The finisher offers a convenient means of sorting Sorted
326. tion is displayed on the screen to select original size Value Custom Off On Size Entry Inch models X 2 to 17 in 0 01 increments Y 2 to 11 69 in 0 01 increments Metric models X 50 to 432 mm in 1 mm increments Y 50 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments Automatically detect originals of special or non standard size A6 Hagaki As A6 and Hagaki are similar in size select either one of them for automatic detection Value A6 Hagaki Folio Select Folio for automatic detection Value Off On 11 x 15 Select the 11x15 size for automatic detection Value Off On Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Paper Settings Item Custom Paper Size Description Set up frequently used custom paper size To register a custom paper size press On and enter the desired size The custom size option is displayed on the screen to select paper set in the multi purpose tray Value Custom Off On Size Entry Inch models X 5 83 to 17 in 0 01 increments Y 3 86 to 11 69 in 0 01 increments Metric models X 148 to 432 mm in 1 mm increments Y 98 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments Media Type Setting Select weight for each media type For Custom 1 8 settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed For details refer to Media Type Setting on page 9 11 Default Paper Source Select the default paper source from Cassette 1 3 and
327. tiple destinations To cancel a selection press the corresponding checkbox to clear the check mark Accept the destinations Ss 10 10 Address Book All IXa V 001 Sales department 1 123456 T _ 002 M Support department 123 456789 co one 1 1 003 Sales department 1 12345 com san __ 004 g Support department 11111 com pai l 04 GB0426_00 Destinations can be changed later Refer to Checking and Editing Destinations on page 6 25 t sending gt Specifying Destination Choosing by One Touch Key Select the destination using the One Touch Keys NOTE For more information on adding One Touch keys refer to Adding a Destination on One Touch Key on page 6 36 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6 2 display the screen Ready to send 10 10 Dest 0 One Touch Key Check E mail a Recall Se ee Address Book Ext Address Book Folder FAX GB0055_00 SSS 10 10 Use WV or AN to scroll up and down GB0095_00 Cancel Press the One Touch Keys where the destination is registered Multiple One Touch Keys can be selected You can specify a one touch key by one touch number by pressing the Quick No Search key 3 Accept the destination ESEN 10 10 001 123456 002 None 003 None Z 004 None 005 None 006 None 1 9 007 None 008 None 009 None 010 None 011 None 012 None Vv Q
328. to copy 10 10 2 UW A4 LJ Plain Ready to copy Paper Selection Select the cassette or multi purpose tray with the desired paper size Auto Automatically selects the appropriate paper size Cassette 1 Selects the paper in cassette 1 Cassette 2 Selects the paper in cassette 2 Cassette 3 Selects the paper in cassette 3 3 28 GB0004_00 10 10 Scrolls up and down when the help text cannot be displayed in its entirety on a single screen GH0001_00 Common Operations gt Canceling Jobs Canceling Jobs Cancel any print or send job being executed 1 Press the Stop key Stop 2 Cancel a job When there is a job is being scanned cue C mE E Scanned Pages 10 10 1 Cancel Canceling will be displayed and the current job will be canceled GB0222_01 When there is a job printing or on standby 10 10 0095 Ef doc0000952010092810 T Pause 1 GB0717_00 _ Menu Select the job you wish to cancel and press Delete NOTE The current print job is temporarily interrupted Continues without temporarily interrupting jobs being sent De Resume All Close Print Jobs lete 2 Displays details for individual jobs You can also cancel executing jobs and jobs on standby after checking their status Refer to Status Job Cancel on page 8 7 Canceling printing from a computer To cancel a print job executed using the printer driver before
329. ture is used with full AS color and auto color Background Density Adjust is disabled if Auto Color detects black and white originals Off Do not use this function Auto Adjusts the density automatically based on the original Manual Manually adjust the density 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Background Density Adj 10 10 10 10 Copies 1 E ee Sn a ia Original Image Paper mS Zoom f Density a Text Photo AN A ie SZZ Selection EcoPrint Auto 100 Normal 0 L2 M ee i ee r p o Er Duplex Combine ees COllate t 4 c a Offset Background Density Adj 1 sided gt 1 sided Off Collate Aaj GB0001_01 GB0002_01 Add Edi Shortcut Use V or A to scroll up and down 2 Adjusts the background density Auto 10 10 GB0061_00 o I e Manual 10 10 10 10 o I a Press 1 to 5 Lighter Darker to adjust the background density GB0061_00 GB0062_00 3 55 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Prevent Bleed through 0083 USB Hide background colors and image bleed through when scanning thin original 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Prevent Bleed through
330. tware or Typefaces except that you may make one backup copy You agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the original 5 This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces unless sooner terminated This License may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not remedied within thirty 30 days after notice from Monotype Imaging When this License expires or is terminated you shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefaces and documentation as requested 6 You agree that you will not modify alter disassemble decrypt reverse engineer or decompile the Software 7 Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety 90 days after delivery the Software will perform in accordance with Monotype Imaging published specifications and the diskette will be free from defects in material and workmanship Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs errors and omissions The parties agree that all other warranties expressed or implied including warranties of fitness for a particular purpose and merchantability are excluded 8 Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and Typefaces is repair or replacement of defective parts upon their return to Monotype Imaging In no event will Monotype Imaging
331. uage displayed on the touch panel Value English Deutsch Fran ais Espanol Italiano Nederlands Pyccxuu Portugu s Report Print reports to check the machine settings and status Default settings for printing the result reports can also be configured Report Print Item Description Status Page Prints the status page allowing you to check the information including current settings available memory space and optional equipment installed Status Page MFP Firmware Version Font List Prints the font list allowing you to check the font samples installed in the machine Scalable Bitmap Selection FSET Network Status Prints the network status allowing you to check the information including network interface firmware version network address and protocol Network Status Page MFP Firmware Version Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Description Service Status Prints the service status More detailed information is available than on the Status Page Service personnel usually print the service status pages for maintenance purpose Accounting Report Prints the accounting report allowing you to check the accounts that have been registered on the machine ACCOUNT REPORT MFP Firmware Version Result Report Settings Description Send Result Report Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete E mail Folder Automaticall
332. uide This Guide Describes how to load paper basic copy print and scan operations and troubleshooting FAX Operation Guide Describes how to install and use the Network FAX driver in order to use the FAX function and Network FAX transmission function Card Authentication Kit B Operation Guide Describes how to authenticate to the machine using the ID card Command Center RX User Guide Describes how to access the machine from a computer via a Web browser to check and change settings Printer Driver User Guide Describes how to install the printer driver and use printer functionality KYOCERA Net Direct Print Operation Guide Describes how to use functionality for printing PDF files without launching Adobe Acrobat or Reader KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide Describes how to monitor the network printing system with KYOCERA Net Viewer File Management Utility User Guide Describes how to distribute scanned documents over the network PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference Describes the native printer language PRESCRIBE commands PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference Describes PRESCRIBE command functionality and control for each type of emulation Contents 1 BE SS aaa cn eee attic ri sae invari OTE EE EEAO EE EEEE 1 1 NOUCO a cetera sacs a eni E EE E E atone sient ecaecdnn aseie gat E E EE A E 1 2 Safety Conventions in This Guide cccccccseeceececseeceeeceaeeceees
333. uit sien cinagn take couanshsus E dain Location MMGNC A ONS vec caseceseceuecenesuaenedatuassakeanenoweuvaeesetnceeeectetyauadenstygasioeeneneeesetexteeeeseane rani aea E EEEE IVI FOSS WRAY r a E E E E E E E inside the Right COVERT wcctevsciumenrewectiadudeusdeunaainmentionnicunvsnnateusntuatietdadsdhadepusationsianwstvedadabvsatenavextdvecsawends C E T E E oe A EE E E E weseeneeeas inside the Right COVERS wsccctveteasacns vxduasach Dutanasuieun stain eeri re enei aa E aaa aA DE na kaat enia ainia G2 Sr O a E E E E A EE E E A ES Optional Document Finisher ec ccccccceeeeceececeeeeceececeeeeseeeeceeeeseaeeseaeeseueeseaeeseeeseneesegeesneesneesaneees Optional Document Finisher Staple Jam cccccccccseececeseeeeeceeeeceeeceeeeceseeeeseeceseueeseusesueeseeeseeesaees PRAI AIIE ooe e ar ecstacy E E E E E E E E TA DOCUMENCErOCCSSON besaccetces scence sseceease a E E E E E EA E EE T 10 1 Troubleshooting gt Toner Container Replacement Toner Container Replacement When the touch panel displays Toner is empty replace the toner A CAUTION Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box Dangerous sparks may cause burns NOTE For the toner container always use a genuine toner container Using a toner container that is not genuine may cause image defects and product failure Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative The collected toner container
334. upport department Ca 001 SYSTEM DEP om rz 5 GB0788_00 Use V or AN to scroll up and down 003 fp Sales department 1 Member 2 Menu Cancel Delete H GB0396_01 Select the destination contacts or group to delete 6 35 Sending gt Adding a Destination on One Touch Key Adding a Destination on One Touch Key Add a new destination contact or group on One Touch Key Adding a Destination Add a new destination contact or group A maximum of 100 destinations can be registered To register a destination to a One Touch Key it must first be registered in the Address Book Register one or more destinations as needed before proceeding 1 Display the screen Use V or AN to scroll up and down System Menu Counter i 10 pr Internet 2 AN lt gt System Menu Counter 1 BP Aceress Book One Touch 4 5 C User Login Job Accounting E Printer V4 System Menu Counter Address Book One Touch Key Address Book Defaults gt GB0054_03 10 10 Print List gt GB0411_00 2 Add a One Touch Key 002 None 1 003 None 005 None 006 None 1 9 008 None 009 None 011 None 012 None i 4xomoa Select a One Touch Key with no registered destination and press K GB0422_00 3 Select the destinations Select the address 10 10 Address Book All IXE 001 pam Sales department 1 0123456 ce Searches by destination name ay ey x A
335. ure the network settings For details refer to Machine Setup Wizard on page 2 24 2 10 Preparation before Use gt Connecting Cables Connecting USB Cable The equipment can be connected with a USB cable and used as a printer in an environment where there is no network 4 Power Off Check that the indicators are off 2 Connect the machine 1 Connect the USB cable to the appropriate interface located on the left side of the body T aL i Pi ws EFS AX 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the PC Connecting the Power Cable Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power outlet Q IMPORTANT Only use the power cable that comes with the machine Preparation before Use gt Power On Off Power On Off Power On Power Off When the main power indicator is lit Recovery from sleep Main Power indicator Press the Power key When the main power indicator is off Turn the main power switch on Q IMPORTANT When turning off the main power switch do not turn on the main power switch again immediately Wait more than 5 seconds and then turn on the main power switch When not turning off the main power switch sleep Main Power indicator Press the Power key The Power key light will go out and the Main Power indicator will light up 2 12 Preparation before Use gt Po
336. ustom 1 8 NOTE To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead refer to Special Paper Action on page 9 10 Refer to Media Type Setting on page 9 10 for selecting Custom 1 8 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Common Settings Configures overall machine operation Default Screen Item Description Select the screen appearing right after start up default screen Value Copy Send FAX Document Box Favorites Application Status Default Screen Sound Buzzer Description Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations Volume Set the buzzer volume level Value O Mute 1 Minimum to 5 Maximum Key Confirmation Emit a sound when the operation panel and touch panel keys are pressed Value Off On Job Finish Emit a sound when a print job is normally completed Value Off On FAX Reception Only NOTE FAX Reception Only is displayed when the optional fax is installed Ready Warning Key Confirmation USB Keyboard Original Settings Custom Original Size Original Auto Detect Emit a sound when the warm up is completed Value Off On Emit a sound when errors occur Value Off On Emit a sound when a key on the optional USB keyboard is pressed Value Off On Description Set up frequently used custom original size To register a custom paper size press On and enter the desired size The custom size op
337. ut Logout Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting 4 Other users login for operations Enter the account ID 10 10 Enter the account ID Cd Counter GB0725_00 t 9 54 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Job Accounting Settings 4 Display the screen Use V or AN to scroll up and down di lt gt System Menu Counter Be mere tal Book One Touch Ce Printer System Menu Counte si Menu Counter _ User Login Settings Job Accounting Settings gt UNKNOWN LU JOD GB0054_03 Reject GB0434_00 NOTE You can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below 10 10 Login User Name ooe Ce Neme Login Login User Name Password Login Password poa FS 6525MFP FS 6530MFP Q oO oO N N a Oo io 2 Configure the function System Menu Counter 10 10 Job Accounting Print pae ot a Report Total Job Accounting Each Job Accounting GB0461_00 Enabling Disabling Job Accounting gt page 9 56 N Login Logout page 9 57 Adding an Account gt page 9 58 Editing and Deleting Accounts gt page 9 60 Restricting the Use of the Machine gt page 9 62 Counting the Number of Pages Printed gt page 9 64 Printing an Accounting Report gt page 9 66 Job Accounting Default Setti
338. ut 3 i j Limit 256 l Host Name e When selecting NTLM or Kerberos as the server type enter a domain name of 256 characters or less GB0437_02 GB0057_25 Enter the port number System Menu Counter 10 10 10 10 Server Type 1 65535 Host Name CE Port 2 ta GB0437_01 GB0439_00 r When selecting Ext as the server type enter the port number L Press Save 10 10 Server Type Ext Host Name abc Port 9093 GB0437_01 Cancel NOTE If the login user name and password are rejected check the following settings e Network Authentication setting of the machine e User property of the Authentication Server e Date and time setting of the machine and the Authentication Server If you cannot login because of the setting of the machine login with any administrator registered in the local user list and correct the settings If the server type is Kerberos only domain names entered in uppercase will be recognized 9 31 Setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Adding a User This adds a new user You can add Up to 100 users including the default login user name The table below explains the user information to be registered User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list up to 32 characters Login User Name Enter the login user name to login up to 64 characters The same login user name cannot be registe
339. utomatically recognized and connected Preparation before Use gt Installing Software 4 Configure the printer 1 Display the window A000 Print amp Fax laje _Show All j Q 000 System Preferences i E Printers Personal Adobe PDF 7 0 Fite 3 fi q erer TA kn n u M E a Q eee T j Appearance Desktop amp Dock Expos amp Language amp Security Spotlight dai ms Open Print Queue Screen Saver Spaces Text m Options amp Supplies Hardware Location Kind Adobe PDF J 3016 102 Oj E gt E S 8 CDs amp DVDs Displays Energy Keyboard Mouse Print amp Fax Sound j Status Paused Saver Internet amp Wireless 1 2 PA A Jd Share this printer on the network a _ MobileMe Network Bluetooth Sharing E i of System y Default printer Last Printer Used d T 1 R a a Xie dy Default paper size A4 J Accounts Date amp Time Parental Software Speech Startup Disk Time Machine Universal Controls Update Access N rr Click the lock to prevent further changes 2 Click the IP icon for an IP connection and then enter the IP address and printer name Add Printer Address 192 168 48 21 2 Valid and camniete address Queue B 4 3 Select the options available for the machine and click Continue Installable Options 192 168 48 21 Make sure your printer s options are accurately shown here s
340. v BranchCache Content Retrieval HTTP In BranchCache Content Retr All No Allow b Monitoring BranchCache Hosted Cache Server HTT BranchCache Hosted Cach All No Allow Pinter by Prone BranchCache Peer Discovery WSD In BranchCache Peer Discove All No Allow E Connect to a Network Projector TCP In Connect to a Network Proje Private No Allow aes connect to a Network Projector TCP In Connect to a Network Proje Domain No Allow Filter by Group connect to a Network Projector WSD Ev Connect to a Network Proje Private No Allow View connect to a Network Projector WSD Ev Connect to a Network Proje Domain No Allow connect to a Network Projector WSD Ev Connect to a Network Proje Private No Allow Refresh Connect to a Network Projector WSD Ev Connect to a Network Proje Domain No Allow gt Export List connect to a Network Projector WSD In Connect to a Network Proje All No Allow Help core Networking Destination Unreacha Core Networking All Yes Allow r e Rule Type Select the type of firewall rule to create Steps Rule Type What type of rule would you like to create Protocol and Ports Program Rule that controle cannectians far a nroaram EUS BranchCache Content Retrieval Uses HTTP Rule that controls connections for a Windows experience Custom Custom rule a Protocol and Ports Specify the protocols and
341. v bj nfm GBO0057_21 Up to 256 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters N Document Box gt Functions for Document Box JPEG TIFF Print Select the image size when printing JPEG or TIFF files Paper Size Fit the image size to the selected paper size Image Resolution Print Resolution Print at resolution of the actual image Fit the image size to the print resolution Display the screen 1 Referring to Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory on page 7 3 display the screen Ready to print from Box 10 10 Ready to print from Box 10 10 Copies AN Paper off s J Bi o ir N gap Encrypted PDF Password gz Collate Duplex LS Selection __ Offset b q JPEG TIFF Print A4 D Collate 1 sided lapi Paper Size p 2 A XPS Fit to Page Add Edi Shortcut GB0097_00 GBO0099_ 01 Cancel Use V or AN to scroll up and down Select the function Ready to print from Box 10 10 Image Resolution Print Resolution GB0101_00 a d 7 13 Document Box gt Functions for Document Box XPS Fit to Page Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS files 1 2 Display the screen 1 Referring to Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory on page 7 3 display the screen Ready to print from Box 10 10
342. wer On Off When turning off the main power switch Note that when the main power switch is turned off the machine will be unable to automatically receive print data from computers or faxes 1 Press the Power key Main Power indicator Check that the indicators are off Verify that the Power key light has gone out and that the Main Power indicator is lit up 2 Turn the main power switch off NOTE When the Processing indicator or Memory indicator is lit up the machine is operating Turning off the main power switch while the machine is operating may cause it to malfunction In case of not using the machine for an extended period of time A CAUTION If this machine will be left unused for an extended period e g overnight turn it off at the main power switch If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time e g vacation remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution If the optional Fax kit is installed note that turning the machine off at the main power switch disables fax transmission and reception Q IMPORTANT Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity 2 13 Preparation before Use gt Installing Software Installing Software Install appropriate software on your PC from the included DVD Product Library if you want to use the printer function of this machine or perform TWAIN WIA transmission or Network FAX transmis
343. wn on the platen Press Start The first pattern is read and adjustment begins The second pattern is output Confirm that a number 2 is printed on the pattern Place the pattern on the platen in the same way as the first pattern Press Start The second pattern is read and adjustment begins Turn the main power switch off and on The adjustment will be completed after restarting the system Drum Refresh 1 Drum Refresh 2 Auto Drum Refresh Perform Drum Refresh when images show streaking with white lines Takes about 90 seconds Press Start to perform Drum Refresh NOTE Drum Refresh cannot be performed while printing Execute Drum Refresh after the printing is done Use this mode when white spots appear on images Takes about 90 seconds To use Drum Refresh 2 load Ledger or A3 size paper into the multi purpose tray Press Start to perform Drum Refresh When you run Drum Refresh 2 the machine makes a vibrating sound for about 90 seconds until drum refreshing is completed The toner soiling on the ejected paper is normal and does not indicate a fault NOTE Drum Refresh cannot be performed while printing Execute Drum Refresh after the printing is done Auto Drum Refresh may be executed when the machine is turned on the power or recovered from the low power mode or sleep mode Auto Drum Refresh is executed automatically to keep the best image quality by monitoring its peripheral temperature and humidity V
344. y print a report of transmission result when E mail or SMB FTP transmission is complete Value Off On Error Only Canceled before Print a send result report if the job is canceled before being sent Sending Value Off On Job Finish Notice Setting Attaches sent images to job finish notices Value Do Not Attach Image Attach Image Sending Log History You can send the log history by e mail You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically whenever a set number of jobs is reached Refer to Sending the Log History on page 8 7 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu User Property Allows you to view information about logged in users and edit some of that information For details on User Login refer to User Login Administration on page 9 28 N Description User Name Changes the name shown on the user list Up to 32 characters can be entered Login User Name Displays the login user name that is entered at login Login Password Changes the password that is entered at login Up to 64 characters can be entered Access Level Displays the user s access level Account Name Displays the account to which the user belongs E mail Address Changes the user s e mail address Up to 128 characters can be entered Simple Login When simple login is enabled changes associated settings My Panel Registers settings for individual users Settings registered
345. y the screen Ready to store in Box 10 10 Ready to store in Box 10 10 g M A f m A Size i File L 2 sided Scan L Format _ Book Resolution PDF 1 sided 300x300dpi T Density Le File Name abn Entry 3x Storing Size Normal doc Za Same as Original Size Add Edi Shortcut GB0096_00 GB0098_00 Cancel Use VV or A to scroll up and down 2 Select the storing size Same as Original Size 10 10 Same as i Inch i Others gt GB0132_00 Cancel l Document Box gt Functions for Document Box Metric Inch or Others Ready to store in Box 10 10 Ready to store in Box 10 10 2 ee Same as Metric Inch gt Original Size 1 A4 i 1 3 A5 Others gt _ G Cancel GB0132_01 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Select the desired size GB0133_00 8 Status Job Cancel This chapter explains the following topics CHECKING Ol US arn A E E E E E O sim Details of the Status Screens isswciccscdacwsucteudneseorsenceusunesnweeudecaerdeieueaieuncnnedatvawhsudeuseusteussnedweens Sbwnnedtidactewdewnenss GNECKNO JOD HIIS IO wes cera tneteancasmnnts cnetdnaewtacadanceeacet enact E E AEE Sending the Log HISTON erste teste trstee ciecreneeeotcu sevice ae asi aeeai a ten eiia aiandi e aaia CUI Me FU SSTIMAUION e inie ee eer E Ea E O EE caves EEO T Automatic Log History Transmission ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeseeee

KYOCERA FS FS-6530MFP

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents